BSD 4.4 Lite Share Sources

45 files changed, 13325 insertions, 0 deletions

diff --git a/share/doc/smm/00.contents b/share/doc/smm/00.contents
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ed03c7a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/share/doc/smm/00.contents
@@ -0,0 +1,161 @@
+.\" Copyright (c) 1986, 1993
+.\"	The Regents of the University of California.  All rights reserved.
+.\"
+.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+.\" are met:
+.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+.\"    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+.\" 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
+.\"    must display the following acknowledgement:
+.\"	This product includes software developed by the University of
+.\"	California, Berkeley and its contributors.
+.\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
+.\"    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+.\"    without specific prior written permission.
+.\"
+.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+.\" ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
+.\"
+.\"	@(#)00.contents	8.1 (Berkeley) 7/5/93
+.\"
+.OH '''SMM Contents'
+.EH 'SMM Contents'''
+.TL
+UNIX System Manager's Manual (SMM)
+.sp
+\s-24.4 Berkeley Software Distribution\s+2
+.sp
+\fRJune, 1993\fR
+.PP
+This volume contains manual pages and supplementary documents useful to system
+administrators.
+The information in these documents applies to
+the 4.4BSD system as distributed by U.C. Berkeley.
+.SH
+Reference Manual \- Section 8
+.tl '''(8)'
+.IP
+Section 8 of the UNIX Programmer's Manual contains information related to
+system operation, administration,  and maintenance.
+.SH
+System Installation and Administration
+.IP
+.tl 'Installing and Operating 4.4BSD''SMM:1'
+.QP
+The definitive reference document for those occasions when
+you find you need to start over again.
+
+.IP
+.tl 'Building 4.4BSD Kernels with \fIConfig\fP''SMM:2'
+.QP
+In-depth discussions of the use and operation of the \fIconfig\fP
+program, and how to build your very own Unix kernel.
+
+.IP
+.tl 'Fsck \- The UNIX File System Check Program''SMM:3'
+.QP
+A reference document for using the \fIfsck\fP program during
+times of file system distress.
+
+.IP
+.tl 'Disc Quotas in a UNIX Environment''SMM:4'
+.QP
+A light introduction to the techniques
+for limiting the use of disc resources.
+
+.IP
+.tl 'A Fast File System for UNIX''SMM:5'
+.QP
+A description of the 4.4BSD file system organization,
+design and implementation.
+
+.IP
+.tl 'The 4.4BSD NFS Implementation''SMM:6'
+.QP
+An overview of the design, implementation, and use of NFS on 4.4BSD.
+
+.IP
+.tl 'Line Printer Spooler Manual''SMM:7'
+.QP
+This document describes the structure and installation procedure
+for the line printer spooling system.  
+
+.IP
+.tl 'Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide''SMM:8'
+.QP
+The last word in installing and operating the \fIsendmail\fP program.
+
+.ne 3
+.IP
+.tl 'Sendmail \- An Internetwork Mail Router''SMM:9'
+.QP
+An overview document on the design and implementation of \fIsendmail\fP.
+
+.IP
+.tl 'Name Server Operations Guide for BIND''SMM:10'
+.QP
+Setting up and operating the name to Internet addressing software.
+If you have a network this will be of interest.
+
+.IP
+.tl 'Timed Installation and Operation Guide''SMM:11'
+.QP
+Describes how to maintain time synchronization between machines
+in a local network.
+
+.IP
+.tl 'The Berkeley UNIX Time Synchronization Protocol''SMM:12'
+.QP
+The protocols and algorithms used by timed,
+the network time synchronization daemon.
+
+.IP
+.tl 'AMD \- The 4.4BSD Automounter''SMM:13'
+.QP
+Automatically mounting file systems on demand.
+
+.IP
+.tl 'Installation and Operation of UUCP''SMM:14'
+.QP
+Describes the implementation of uucp; for the installer and administrator.
+
+.IP
+.tl 'A Dial\-Up Network of UNIX Systems''SMM:15'
+.QP
+Describes UUCP, a program for communicating files between UNIX systems.
+
+.IP
+.tl 'On the Security of UNIX''SMM:16'
+.QP
+Hints on how to break UNIX, and how to avoid your system being broken.
+
+.IP
+.tl 'Password Security \- A Case History''SMM:17'
+.QP
+How the bad guys used to be able to break the password algorithm, and why
+they cannot now (at least not so easily).
+
+.IP
+.tl 'Networking Implementation Notes, 4.4BSD Edition''SMM:18'
+.QP
+A concise description of the system interfaces used within the
+networking subsystem.
+
+.IP
+.tl 'The PERL Programming Language''SMM:19'
+.QP
+The Practical Extraction and Report Language is ideal for
+writing those pesky adminitration scripts.
diff --git a/share/doc/smm/01.setup/0.t b/share/doc/smm/01.setup/0.t
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2f880eb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/share/doc/smm/01.setup/0.t
@@ -0,0 +1,131 @@
+.\" Copyright (c) 1988, 1993 The Regents of the University of California.
+.\" All rights reserved.
+.\"
+.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+.\" are met:
+.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+.\"    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+.\" 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
+.\"    must display the following acknowledgement:
+.\"	This product includes software developed by the University of
+.\"	California, Berkeley and its contributors.
+.\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
+.\"    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+.\"    without specific prior written permission.
+.\"
+.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+.\" ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
+.\"
+.\"	@(#)0.t	8.1 (Berkeley) 7/27/93
+.\"
+.ds Ux \s-1UNIX\s0
+.ds Bs \s-1BSD\s0
+.\" Current version:
+.ds 4B 4.4\*(Bs
+.ds Ps 4.3\*(Bs
+.\" tape and disk naming
+.ds Mt mt
+.ds Dk sd
+.ds Dn disk
+.ds Pa c
+.\" block size used on the tape
+.ds Bb 10240
+.ds Bz 20
+.\" document date
+.ds Dy July 27, 1993
+.de Sm
+\s-1\\$1\s0\\$2
+..
+.de Pn		\" pathname
+\f(CW\\$1\fP\\$2
+..
+.de Li		\" literal
+\f(CW\\$1\fP\\$2
+..
+.de I		\" italicize first arg
+\fI\\$1\fP\^\\$2
+..
+.de Xr		\" manual reference
+\fI\\$1\fP\^\\$2
+..
+.de Fn		\" function
+\fI\\$1\fP\^()\\$2
+..
+.bd S B 3
+.EH 'SMM:1-%''Installing and Operating \*(4B UNIX'
+.OH 'Installing and Operating \*(4B UNIX''SMM:1-%'
+.de Sh
+.NH \\$1
+\\$2
+.nr PD .1v
+.XS \\n%
+.ta 0.6i
+\\*(SN	\\$2
+.XE
+.nr PD .3v
+..
+.TL
+Installing and Operating \*(4B UNIX
+.br
+\*(Dy
+.AU
+Marshall Kirk McKusick
+.AU
+Keith Bostic
+.AU
+Michael J. Karels
+.AU
+Samuel J. Leffler
+.AI
+Computer Systems Research Group
+Department of Electrical Engineering and Computer Science
+University of California, Berkeley
+Berkeley, California  94720
+(415) 642-7780
+.AU
+Mike Hibler
+.AI
+Center for Software Science
+Department of Computer Science
+University of Utah
+Salt Lake City, Utah  84112
+(801) 581-5017
+.AB
+.PP
+This document contains instructions for the
+installation and operation of the
+\*(4B release of UNIX\**
+as distributed by The University of California at Berkeley.
+.FS
+UNIX is a registered trademark of USL in the USA and some other countries.
+.FE
+.PP
+It discusses procedures for installing UNIX on a new machine,
+and for upgrading an existing \*(Ps UNIX system to the new release.
+An explanation of how to lay out filesystems on available disks
+and the space requirements for various parts of the system are given.
+A brief overview of the major changes to
+the system between \*(Ps and \*(4B are outlined.
+An explanation of how to set up terminal lines and user accounts,
+and how to do system-specific tailoring is provided.
+A description of how to install and configure the \*(4B networking
+facilities is included.
+Finally, the document details system operation procedures:
+shutdown and startup, filesystem backup procedures,
+resource control, performance monitoring, and procedures for recompiling
+and reinstalling system software.
+.AE
+.bp +3
diff --git a/share/doc/smm/01.setup/1.t b/share/doc/smm/01.setup/1.t
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2f71b77
--- /dev/null
+++ b/share/doc/smm/01.setup/1.t
@@ -0,0 +1,172 @@
+.\" Copyright (c) 1988, 1993 The Regents of the University of California.
+.\" All rights reserved.
+.\"
+.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+.\" are met:
+.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+.\"    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+.\" 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
+.\"    must display the following acknowledgement:
+.\"	This product includes software developed by the University of
+.\"	California, Berkeley and its contributors.
+.\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
+.\"    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+.\"    without specific prior written permission.
+.\"
+.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+.\" ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
+.\"
+.\"	@(#)1.t	8.1 (Berkeley) 7/27/93
+.\"
+.ds lq ``
+.ds rq ''
+.ds LH "Installing/Operating \*(4B
+.ds RH Introduction
+.ds CF \*(Dy
+.LP
+.bp
+.Sh 1 "Introduction"
+.PP
+This document explains how to install the \*(4B Berkeley
+version of UNIX on your system.
+The filesystem format is compatible with \*(Ps
+and it will only be necessary for you to do a full bootstrap
+procedure if you are installing the release on a new machine.
+The object file formats are completely different from the System
+V release, so the most straightforward procedure for upgrading
+a System V system is to do a full bootstrap.
+.PP
+The full bootstrap procedure
+is outlined in section 2; the process starts with copying a filesystem
+image onto a new disk.
+This filesystem is then booted and used to extract the remainder of the
+system binaries and sources from the archives on the tape(s).
+.PP
+The technique for upgrading a \*(Ps system is described
+in section 3 of this document.
+The upgrade procedure involves extracting system binaries
+onto new root and
+.Pn /usr
+filesystems and merging local
+configuration files into the new system.
+User filesystems may be upgraded in place.
+Most \*(Ps binaries may be used with \*(4B in the course
+of the conversion.
+It is desirable to recompile local sources after the conversion,
+as the new compiler (GCC) provides superior code optimization.
+Consult section 3.5 for a description of some of the differences
+between \*(Ps and \*(4B.
+.Sh 2 "Distribution format"
+.PP
+The distribution comes in two formats:
+.DS
+(3)\0\0 6250bpi 2400' 9-track magnetic tapes, or
+(1)\0\0 8mm Exabyte tape
+.DE
+.PP
+If you have the facilities, we \fBstrongly\fP recommend copying the
+magnetic tape(s) in the distribution kit to guard against disaster.
+The tapes contain \*(Bb-byte records.
+There are interspersed tape marks;
+end-of-tape is signaled by a double end-of-file.
+The first file on the tape is architecture dependent.
+Additional files on the tape(s)
+contain tape archive images of the system binaries and sources (see
+.Xr tar (1)\**).
+.FS
+References of the form \fIX\fP(Y) mean the entry named
+\fIX\fP in section Y of the ``UNIX Programmer's Manual''.
+.FE
+See the tape label for a description of the contents
+and format of each individual tape.
+.Sh 2 "UNIX device naming"
+.PP
+Device names have a different syntax depending on whether you are talking
+to the standalone system or a running UNIX kernel.
+The standalone system syntax is currently architecture dependent and is
+described in the various architecture specific sections as applicable.
+When not running standalone, devices are available via files in the
+.Pn /dev/
+directory.
+The file name typically encodes the device type, its logical unit and
+a partition within that unit.
+For example,
+.Pn /dev/sd2b
+refers to the second partition (``b'') of
+SCSI (``sd'') drive number ``2'', while
+.Pn /dev/rmt0
+refers to the raw (``r'') interface of 9-track tape (``mt'') unit ``0''.
+.PP
+The mapping of physical addressing information (e.g. controller, target)
+to a logical unit number is dependent on the system configuration.
+In all simple cases, where only a single controller is present, a drive
+with physical unit number 0 (e.g., as determined by its unit
+specification, either unit plug or other selection mechanism)
+will be called unit 0 in its UNIX file name.
+This is not, however, strictly
+necessary, since the system has a level of indirection in this naming.
+If there are multiple controllers, the disk unit numbers will normally
+be counted sequentially across controllers.  This can be taken
+advantage of to make the system less dependent on the interconnect
+topology, and to make reconfiguration after hardware failure easier.
+.PP
+Each UNIX physical disk is divided into at most 8 logical disk partitions,
+each of which may occupy any consecutive cylinder range on the physical
+device.  The cylinders occupied by the 8 partitions for each drive type
+are specified initially in the disk description file
+.Pn /etc/disktab
+(c.f.
+.Xr disktab (5)).
+The partition information and description of the
+drive geometry are written in one of the first sectors of each disk with the
+.Xr disklabel (8)
+program.  Each partition may be used for either a
+raw data area such as a paging area or to store a UNIX filesystem.
+It is conventional for the first partition on a disk to be used
+to store a root filesystem, from which UNIX may be bootstrapped.
+The second partition is traditionally used as a paging area, and the
+rest of the disk is divided into spaces for additional ``mounted
+filesystems'' by use of one or more additional partitions.
+.Sh 2 "UNIX devices: block and raw"
+.PP
+UNIX makes a distinction between ``block'' and ``raw'' (character)
+devices.  Each disk has a block device interface where
+the system makes the device byte addressable and you can write
+a single byte in the middle of the disk.  The system will read
+out the data from the disk sector, insert the byte you gave it
+and put the modified data back.  The disks with the names
+.Pn /dev/xx0[a-h] ,
+etc., are block devices.
+There are also raw devices available.
+These have names like
+.Pn /dev/rxx0[a-h] ,
+the ``r'' here standing for ``raw''.
+Raw devices bypass the buffer cache and use DMA directly to/from
+the program's I/O buffers;
+they are normally restricted to full-sector transfers.
+In the bootstrap procedures we
+will often suggest using the raw devices, because these tend
+to work faster.
+Raw devices are used when making new filesystems,
+when checking unmounted filesystems,
+or for copying quiescent filesystems.
+The block devices are used to mount filesystems.
+.PP
+You should be aware that it is sometimes important whether to use
+the character device (for efficiency) or not (because it would not
+work, e.g. to write a single byte in the middle of a sector).
+Do not change the instructions by using the wrong type of device
+indiscriminately.
diff --git a/share/doc/smm/01.setup/2.t b/share/doc/smm/01.setup/2.t
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ddc4f7e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/share/doc/smm/01.setup/2.t
@@ -0,0 +1,1658 @@
+.\" Copyright (c) 1988, 1993 The Regents of the University of California.
+.\" All rights reserved.
+.\"
+.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+.\" are met:
+.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+.\"    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+.\" 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
+.\"    must display the following acknowledgement:
+.\"	This product includes software developed by the University of
+.\"	California, Berkeley and its contributors.
+.\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
+.\"    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+.\"    without specific prior written permission.
+.\"
+.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+.\" ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
+.\"
+.\"	@(#)2.t	8.1 (Berkeley) 7/27/93
+.\"
+.ds lq ``
+.ds rq ''
+.ds LH "Installing/Operating \*(4B
+.ds RH Bootstrapping
+.ds CF \*(Dy
+.Sh 1 "Bootstrap procedure"
+.PP
+This section explains the bootstrap procedure that can be used
+to get the kernel supplied with this distribution running on your machine.
+If you are not currently running \*(Ps you will
+have to do a full bootstrap.
+Section 3 describes how to upgrade a \*(Ps system.
+An understanding of the operations used in a full bootstrap
+is helpful in doing an upgrade as well.
+In either case, it is highly desirable to read and understand
+the remainder of this document before proceeding.
+.PP
+The distribution supports a somewhat wider set of machines than
+those for which we have built binaries.
+The architectures that are supported only in source form include:
+.IP \(bu
+Intel 386/486-based machines (ISA/AT or EISA bus only)
+.IP \(bu
+Sony News MIPS-based workstations
+.IP \(bu
+Omron Luna 68000-based workstations
+.LP
+If you wish to run one of these architectures,
+you will have to build a cross compilation environment.
+Note that the distribution does
+.B not
+include the machine support for the Tahoe and VAX architectures
+found in previous BSD distributions.
+Our primary development environment is the HP9000/300 series machines.
+The other architectures are developed and supported by
+people outside the university.
+Consequently, we are not able to directly test or maintain these 
+other architectures, so cannot comment on their robustness,
+reliability, or completeness.
+.Sh 2 "Bootstrapping from the tape"
+.LP
+The set of files on the distribution tape are as follows:
+.IP 1)
+A
+.Xr dd (1)
+(HP300),
+.Xr tar (1)
+(DECstation), or
+.Xr dump (8)
+(SPARC) image of the root filesystem
+.IP 2)
+A
+.Xr tar
+image of the
+.Pn /var
+filesystem
+.IP 3)
+A
+.Xr tar
+image of the
+.Pn /usr
+filesystem
+.IP 4)
+A
+.Xr tar
+image of
+.Pn /usr/src/sys
+.IP 5)
+A
+.Xr tar
+image of
+.Pn /usr/src
+except sys and contrib
+.IP 6)
+A
+.Xr tar
+image of
+.Pn /usr/src/contrib
+.IP 7)
+(8mm Exabyte tape distributions only)
+A
+.Xr tar
+image of
+.Pn /usr/src/X11R5
+.LP
+The tape bootstrap procedure used to create a
+working system involves the following major steps:
+.IP 1)
+Transfer a bootable root filesystem from the tape to a disk
+and get it booted and running.
+.IP 2)
+Build and restore the
+.Pn /var
+and
+.Pn /usr
+filesystems from tape with
+.Xr tar (1).
+.IP 3)
+Extract the system and utility source files as desired.
+.PP
+The following sections describe the above steps in detail.
+The details of the first step vary between architectures.
+The specific steps for the HP300, SPARC, and DECstation are
+given in the next three sections respectively.
+You should follow the instructions for your particular architecture.
+In all sections,
+commands you are expected to type are shown in italics, while that
+information printed by the system is shown emboldened.
+.Sh 2 "Booting the HP300"
+.Sh 3 "Supported hardware"
+.LP
+The hardware supported by \*(4B for the HP300/400 is as follows:
+.TS
+center box;
+lw(1i) lw(4i).
+CPU's	T{
+68020 based (318, 319, 320, 330 and 350),
+68030 based (340, 345, 360, 370, 375, 400) and
+68040 based (380, 425, 433).
+T}
+_
+DISK's	T{
+HP-IB/CS80 (7912, 7914, 7933, 7936, 7945, 7957, 7958, 7959, 2200, 2203)
+and SCSI-I (including magneto-optical).
+T}
+_
+TAPE's	T{
+Low-density CS80 cartridge (7914, 7946, 9144),
+high-density CS80 cartridge (9145),
+HP SCSI DAT and
+SCSI Exabyte.
+T}
+_
+RS232	T{
+98644 built-in single-port, 98642 4-port and 98638 8-port interfaces.
+T}
+_
+NETWORK	T{
+98643 internal and external LAN cards.
+T}
+_
+GRAPHICS	T{
+Terminal emulation and raw frame buffer support for
+98544 / 98545 / 98547 (Topcat color & monochrome),
+98548 / 98549 / 98550 (Catseye color & monochrome),
+98700 / 98710 (Gatorbox),
+98720 / 98721 (Renaissance),
+98730 / 98731 (DaVinci) and
+A1096A (Hyperion monochrome).
+T}
+_
+INPUT	T{
+General interface supporting all HIL devices.
+(e.g. keyboard, 2 and 3 button mice, ID module, ...)
+T}
+_
+MISC	T{
+Battery-backed real time clock,
+builtin and 98625A/B HP-IB interfaces,
+builtin and 98658A SCSI interfaces,
+serial printers and plotters on HP-IB,
+and SCSI autochanger device.
+T}
+.TE
+.LP
+Major items that are not supported
+include the 310 and 332 CPU's, 400 series machines
+configured for Domain/OS, EISA and VME bus adaptors, audio, the centronics
+port, 1/2" tape drives (7980), CD-ROM, and the PVRX/TVRX 3D graphics displays.
+.Sh 3 "Standalone device file naming"
+.LP
+The standalone system device name syntax on the HP300 is of the form:
+.DS
+xx(a,c,u,p)
+.DE
+where
+\fIxx\fP is the device type,
+\fIa\fP specifies the adaptor to use,
+\fIc\fP the controller,
+\fIu\fP the unit, and
+\fIp\fP a partition.
+The \fIdevice type\fP differentiates the various disks and tapes and is one of:
+``rd'' for HP-IB CS80 disks,
+``ct'' for HP-IB CS80 cartridge tapes, or
+``sd'' for SCSI-I disks
+(SCSI-I tapes are currently not supported).
+The \fIadaptor\fP field is a logical HP-IB or SCSI bus adaptor card number.
+This will typically be
+0 for SCSI disks,
+0 for devices on the ``slow'' HP-IB interface (usually tapes) and
+1 for devices on the ``fast'' HP-IB interface (usually disks).
+To get a complete mapping of physical (select-code) to logical card numbers
+just type a ^C at the standalone prompt.
+The \fIcontroller\fP field is the disk or tape's target number on the
+HP-IB or SCSI bus.
+For SCSI the range is 0 to 6 (7 is the adaptor address) and
+for HP-IB the range is 0 to 7.
+The \fIunit\fP field is unused and should be 0.
+The \fIpartition\fP field is interpreted differently for tapes
+and disks: for disks it is a disk partition (in the range 0-7),
+and for tapes it is a file number offset on the tape.
+Thus, partition 2 of a SCSI disk drive at target 3 on SCSI bus 1
+would be ``sd(1,3,0,2)''.
+If you have only one of any type bus adaptor, you may omit the adaptor
+and controller numbers;
+e.g. ``sd(0,2)'' could be used instead of ``sd(0,0,0,2)''.
+The following examples always use the full syntax for clarity.
+.Sh 3 "The procedure"
+.LP
+The basic steps involved in bringing up the HP300 are as follows:
+.IP 1)
+Obtain a second disk and format it, if necessary.
+.IP 2)
+Copy a root filesystem from the
+tape onto the beginning of the disk.
+.IP 3)
+Boot the UNIX system on the new disk.
+.IP 4)
+(Optional) Build a root filesystem optimized for your disk.
+.IP 5)
+Label the disks with the
+.Xr disklabel (8)
+program.
+.Sh 4 "Step 1: selecting and formatting a disk"
+.PP
+For your first system you will have to obtain a formatted disk
+of a type given in the ``supported hardware'' list above.
+If you want to load an entire binary system
+(i.e., everything except
+.Pn /usr/src ),
+on the single disk you will need a minimum of 290MB,
+ruling out anything smaller than a 7959B/S disk.
+The disklabel included in the bootstrap root image is laid out
+to accommodate this scenario.
+Note that an HP SCSI magneto-optical disk will work fine for this case.
+\*(4B will boot and run (albeit slowly) using one.
+If you want to load source on a single disk system,
+you will need at least 640MB (at least a 2213A SCSI or 2203A HP-IB disk).
+A disk as small as the 7945A (54MB) can be used for the bootstrap
+procedure but will hold only the root and primary swap partitions.
+If you plan to use multiple disks,
+refer to section 2.5 for suggestions on partitioning.
+.PP
+After selecting a disk, you may need to format it.
+Since most HP disk drives come pre-formatted
+(except optical media)
+you probably will not, but if necessary,
+you can format a disk under HP-UX using the
+.Xr mediainit (1m)
+program.
+Once you have \*(4B up and running on one machine you can use the
+.Xr scsiformat (8)
+program to format additional SCSI disks.
+Any additional HP-IB disks will have to be formatted using HP-UX.
+.Sh 4 "Step 2: copying the root filesystem from tape to disk"
+.PP
+Once you have a formatted second disk you can use the
+.Xr dd (1)
+command under HP-UX to copy the root filesystem image from
+the tape to the beginning of the second disk.
+For HP's, the root filesystem image is the first file on the tape.
+It includes a disklabel and bootblock along with the root filesystem.
+An example command to copy the image from tape to the beginning of a disk is:
+.DS
+.ft CW
+dd if=/dev/rmt/0m of=/dev/rdsk/1s0 bs=\*(Bzb
+.DE
+The actual special file syntax may vary depending on unit numbers and
+the version of HP-UX that is running.
+Consult the HP-UX
+.Xr mt (7)
+and
+.Xr disk (7)
+man pages for details.
+.PP
+Note that if you have a SCSI disk, you don't necessarily have to use
+HP-UX (or an HP) to create the boot disk.
+Any machine and operating system that will allow you to copy the
+raw disk image out to block 0 of the disk will do.
+.PP
+If you have only a single machine with a single disk,
+you may still be able to install and boot \*(4B if you have an
+HP-IB cartridge tape drive.
+If so, you can use a more difficult approach of booting a
+standalone copy program from the tape, and using that to copy the
+root filesystem image from the tape to the disk.
+To do this, you need to extract the first file of the distribution tape
+(the root image), copy it over to a machine with a cartridge drive
+and then copy the image onto tape.
+For example:
+.DS
+.ft CW
+dd if=/dev/rst0 of=bootimage bs=\*(Bzb
+rcp bootimage foo:/tmp/bootimage
+<login to foo>
+dd if=/tmp/bootimage of=/dev/rct/0m bs=\*(Bzb
+.DE
+Once this tape is created you can boot and run the standalone tape
+copy program from it.
+The copy program is loaded just as any other program would be loaded
+by the bootrom in ``attended'' mode:
+reset the CPU,
+hold down the space bar until the word ``Keyboard'' appears in the
+installed interface list, and
+enter the menu selection for SYS_TCOPY.
+Once loaded and running:
+.DS
+.TS
+lw(2i) l.
+\fBFrom:\fP \fI^C\fP	(control-C to see logical adaptor assignments)
+\fBhpib0 at sc7\fP
+\fBscsi0 at sc14\fP
+\fBFrom:\fP \fIct(0,7,0,0)\fP	(HP-IB tape, target 7, first tape file)
+\fBTo:\fP \fIsd(0,0,0,2)\fP	(SCSI disk, target 0, third partition)
+\fBCopy completed: 1728 records copied\fP
+.TE
+.DE
+.LP
+This copy will likely take 30 minutes or more.
+.Sh 4 "Step 3: booting the root filesystem"
+.PP
+You now have a bootable root filesystem on the disk.
+If you were previously running with two disks,
+it would be best if you shut down the machine and turn off power on
+the HP-UX drive.
+It will be less confusing and it will eliminate any chance of accidentally
+destroying the HP-UX disk.
+If you used a cartridge tape for booting you should also unload the tape
+at this point.
+Whether you booted from tape or copied from disk you should now reboot
+the machine and do another attended boot (see previous section),
+this time with SYS_TBOOT.
+Once loaded and running the boot program will display the CPU type and
+prompt for a kernel file to boot:
+.DS
+.B
+HP433 CPU
+Boot
+.R
+\fB:\fP \fI/vmunix\fP
+.DE
+.LP
+After providing the kernel name, the machine will boot \*(4B with
+output that looks about like this:
+.DS
+.B
+597480+34120+139288 start 0xfe8019ec
+Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1989, 1991, 1993
+	The Regents of the University of California.
+Copyright (c) 1992 Hewlett-Packard Company
+Copyright (c) 1992 Motorola Inc.
+All rights reserved.
+
+4.4BSD UNIX #1: Tue Jul 20 11:40:36 PDT 1993
+    mckusick@vangogh.CS.Berkeley.EDU:/usr/obj/sys/compile/GENERIC.hp300
+HP9000/433 (33MHz MC68040 CPU+MMU+FPU, 4k on-chip physical I/D caches)
+real mem = xxx
+avail mem = ###
+using ### buffers containing ### bytes of memory
+(... information about available devices ...)
+root device?
+.R
+.DE
+.PP
+The first three numbers are printed out by the bootstrap program and
+are the sizes of different parts of the system (text, initialized and
+uninitialized data).  The system also allocates several system data
+structures after it starts running.  The sizes of these structures are
+based on the amount of available memory and the maximum count of active
+users expected, as declared in a system configuration description.  This
+will be discussed later.
+.PP
+UNIX itself then runs for the first time and begins by printing out a banner
+identifying the release and
+version of the system that is in use and the date that it was compiled. 
+.PP
+Next the
+.I mem
+messages give the
+amount of real (physical) memory and the
+memory available to user programs
+in bytes.
+For example, if your machine has 16Mb bytes of memory, then
+\fBxxx\fP will be 16777216.
+.PP
+The messages that come out next show what devices were found on
+the current processor.  These messages are described in
+.Xr autoconf (4).
+The distributed system may not have
+found all the communications devices you have
+or all the mass storage peripherals you have, especially
+if you have more than
+two of anything.  You will correct this when you create
+a description of your machine from which to configure a site-dependent
+version of UNIX.
+The messages printed at boot here contain much of the information
+that will be used in creating the configuration.
+In a correctly configured system most of the information
+present in the configuration description
+is printed out at boot time as the system verifies that each device
+is present.
+.PP
+The \*(lqroot device?\*(rq prompt was printed by the system
+to ask you for the name of the root filesystem to use.
+This happens because the distribution system is a \fIgeneric\fP
+system, i.e., it can be bootstrapped on a cpu with its root device
+and paging area on any available disk drive.
+You will most likely respond to the root device question with ``sd0''
+if you are booting from a SCSI disk,
+or with ``rd0'' if you are booting from an HP-IB disk.
+This response shows that the disk it is running
+on is drive 0 of type ``sd'' or ``rd'' respectively.
+If you have other disks attached to the system,
+it is possible that the drive you are using will not be configured
+as logical drive 0.
+Check the autoconfiguration messages printed out by the kernel to
+make sure.
+These messages will show the type of every logical drive
+and their associated controller and slave addresses.
+You will later build a system tailored to your configuration
+that will not prompt you for a root device when it is bootstrapped.
+.DS
+\fBroot device?\fP \fI\*(Dk0\fP
+\fBWARNING: preposterous time in filesystem \-\- CHECK AND RESET THE DATE!\fP
+\fBerase ^?, kill ^U, intr ^C\fP
+\fB#\fP
+.DE
+.PP
+The \*(lqerase ...\*(rq message is part of the
+.Pn /.profile
+that was executed by the root shell when it started.  This message
+tells you about the settings of the character erase,
+line erase, and interrupt characters.
+.PP
+UNIX is now running,
+and the \fIUNIX Programmer's Manual\fP applies.  The ``#'' is the prompt
+from the Bourne shell, and lets you know that you are the super-user,
+whose login name is \*(lqroot\*(rq.
+.PP
+At this point, the root filesystem is mounted read-only.
+Before continuing the installation, the filesystem needs to be ``updated''
+to allow writing and device special files for the following steps need
+to be created.
+This is done as follows:
+.DS
+.TS
+lw(2i) l.
+\fB#\fP \fImount_mfs -s 1000 -T type /dev/null /tmp\fP	(create a writable filesystem)
+(\fItype\fP is the disk type as determined from /etc/disktab)
+\fB#\fP \fIcd /tmp\fP	(connect to that directory)
+\fB#\fP \fI../dev/MAKEDEV \*(Dk#\fP	(create special files for root disk)
+(\fI\*(Dk\fP is the disk type, \fI#\fP is the unit number)
+(ignore warning from ``sh'')
+\fB#\fP \fImount \-uw /tmp/\*(Dk#a /\fP	(read-write mount root filesystem)
+\fB#\fP \fIcd /dev\fP	(go to device directory)
+\fB#\fP \fI./MAKEDEV \*(Dk#\fP	(create permanent special files for root disk)
+(again, ignore warning from ``sh'')
+.TE
+.DE
+.Sh 4 "Step 4: (optional) restoring the root filesystem"
+.PP
+The root filesystem that you are currently running on is complete,
+however it probably is not optimally laid out for the disk on
+which you are running.
+If you will be cloning copies of the system onto multiple disks for
+other machines, you are advised to connect one of these disks to
+this machine, and build and restore a properly laid out root filesystem
+onto it.
+If this is the only machine on which you will be running \*(4B
+or peak performance is not an issue, you can skip this step and
+proceed directly to step 5.
+.PP
+Connect a second disk to your machine.
+If you bootstrapped using the two disk method, you can
+overwrite your initial HP-UX disk, as it will no longer
+be needed (assuming you have no plans to run HP-UX again).
+.PP
+To really create the root filesystem on drive 1
+you should first label the disk as described in step 5 below.
+Then run the following commands:
+.DS
+\fB#\fP \fIcd /dev\fP
+\fB#\fP \fI./MAKEDEV \*(Dk1a\fP
+\fB#\fP\|\fInewfs /dev/r\*(Dk1a\fP
+\fB#\fP\|\fImount /dev/\*(Dk1a /mnt\fP
+\fB#\fP\|\fIcd /mnt\fP
+\fB#\fP\|\fIdump 0f \- /dev/r\*(Dk0a | restore xf \-\fP
+(Note: restore will ask if you want to ``set owner/mode for '.'''
+to which you should reply ``yes''.)
+.DE
+.PP
+When this completes,
+you should then shut down the system, and boot on the disk that
+you just created following the procedure in step (3) above.
+.Sh 4 "Step 5: placing labels on the disks"
+.PP
+For each disk on the HP300, \*(4B places information about the geometry
+of the drive and the partition layout at byte offset 1024.
+This information is written with
+.Xr disklabel (8).
+.PP
+The root image just loaded includes a ``generic'' label intended to allow
+easy installation of the root and
+.Pn /usr
+and may not be suitable for the actual
+disk on which it was installed.
+In particular,
+it may make your disk appear larger or smaller than its real size.
+In the former case, you lose some capacity.
+In the latter, some of the partitions may map non-existent sectors
+leading to errors if those partitions are used.
+It is also possible that the defined geometry will interact poorly with
+the filesystem code resulting in reduced performance.
+However, as long as you are willing to give up a little space,
+not use certain partitions or suffer minor performance degradation,
+you might want to avoid this step;
+especially if you do not know how to use
+.Xr ed (1).
+.PP
+If you choose to edit this label,
+you can fill in correct geometry information from
+.Pn /etc/disktab .
+You may also want to rework the ``e'' and ``f'' partitions used for loading
+.Pn /usr
+and
+.Pn /var .
+You should not attempt to, and
+.Xr disklabel
+will not let you, modify the ``a'', ``b'' and ``d'' partitions.
+To edit a label:
+.DS
+\fB#\fP \fIEDITOR=ed\fP
+\fB#\fP \fIexport EDITOR\fP
+\fB#\fP \fIdisklabel  -r  -e  /dev/r\fBXX#\fPd
+.DE
+where \fBXX\fP is the type and \fB#\fP is the logical drive number; e.g.
+.Pn /dev/rsd0d
+or
+.Pn /dev/rrd0d .
+Note the explicit use of the ``d'' partition.
+This partition includes the bootblock as does ``c''
+and using it allows you to change the size of ``c''.
+.PP
+If you wish to label any additional disks, run the following command for each:
+.DS
+\fB#\|\fP\fIdisklabel  -rw  \fBXX#  type\fP  \fI"optional_pack_name"\fP
+.DE
+where \fBXX#\fP is the same as in the previous command
+and \fBtype\fP is the HP300 disk device name as listed in
+.Pn /etc/disktab .
+The optional information may contain any descriptive name for the
+contents of a disk, and may be up to 16 characters long.  This procedure
+will place the label on the disk using the information found in
+.Pn /etc/disktab
+for the disk type named.
+If you have changed the disk partition sizes,
+you may wish to add entries for the modified configuration in
+.Pn /etc/disktab
+before labeling the affected disks.
+.PP
+You have now completed the HP300 specific part of the installation.
+Now proceed to the generic part of the installation
+described starting in section 2.5 below.
+Note that where the disk name ``sd'' is used throughout section 2.5,
+you should substitute the name ``rd'' if you are running on an HP-IB disk.
+Also, if you are loading on a single disk with the default disklabel,
+.Pn /var
+should be restored to the ``f'' partition and
+.Pn /usr
+to the ``e'' partition.
+.Sh 2 "Booting the SPARC"
+.Sh 3 "Supported hardware"
+.LP
+The hardware supported by \*(4B for the SPARC is as follows:
+.TS
+center box;
+lw(1i) lw(4i).
+CPU's	T{
+SPARCstation 1 series (1, 1+, SLC, IPC) and
+SPARCstation 2 series (2, IPX).
+T}
+_
+DISK's	T{
+SCSI.
+T}
+_
+TAPE's	T{
+none.
+T}
+_
+NETWORK	T{
+SPARCstation Lance (le).
+T}
+_
+GRAPHICS	T{
+bwtwo and cgthree.
+T}
+_
+INPUT	T{
+Keyboard and mouse.
+T}
+_
+MISC	T{
+Battery-backed real time clock,
+built-in serial devices,
+Sbus SCSI controller,
+and audio device.
+T}
+.TE
+.LP
+Major items that are not supported include
+anything VME-based,
+the GX (cgsix) display,
+the floppy disk, and SCSI tapes.
+.Sh 3 "Limitations"
+.LP
+There are several important limitations on the \*(4B distribution
+for the SPARC:
+.IP 1)
+You
+.B must
+have SunOS 4.1.x or Solaris to bring up \*(4B.
+There is no SPARCstation bootstrap code in this distribution.  The
+Sun-supplied boot loader will be used to boot \*(4B; you must copy
+this from your SunOS distribution.  This imposes several
+restrictions on the system, as detailed below.
+.IP 2)
+The \*(4B SPARC kernel does not remap SCSI IDs.  A SCSI disk at
+target 0 will become ``sd0'', where in SunOS the same disk will
+normally be called ``sd3''.  If your existing SunOS system is
+diskful, it will be least painful to have SunOS running on the disk
+on target 0 lun 0 and put \*(4B on the disk on target 3 lun 0.  Both
+systems will then think they are running on ``sd0'', and you can
+boot either system as needed simply by changing the EEPROM's boot
+device.
+.IP 3)
+There is no SCSI tape driver.
+You must have another system for tape reading and backups.
+.IP 4)
+Although the \*(4B SPARC kernel will handle existing SunOS shared
+libraries, it does not use or create them itself, and therefore
+requires much more disk space than SunOS does.
+.IP 5)
+It is currently difficult (though not completely impossible) to
+run \*(4B diskless.  These instructions assume you will have a local
+boot, swap, and root filesystem.
+.IP 6)
+When using a serial port rather than a graphics display as the console,
+only port
+.Pn ttya
+can be used.
+Attempts to use port
+.Pn ttyb
+will fail when the kernel tries
+to print the boot up messages to the console.
+.Sh 3 "The procedure"
+.PP
+You must have a spare disk on which to place \*(4B.
+The steps involved in bootstrapping this tape are as follows:
+.IP 1)
+Bring up SunOS (preferably SunOS 4.1.x or Solaris 1.x, although
+Solaris 2 may work \(em this is untested).
+.IP 2)
+Attach auxiliary SCSI disk(s).  Format and label using the
+SunOS formatting and labeling programs as needed.
+Note that the root filesystem currently requires at least 10 MB; 16 MB
+or more is recommended.  The b partition will be used for swap;
+this should be at least 32 MB.
+.IP 3)
+Use the SunOS
+.Xr newfs
+to build the root filesystem.  You may also
+want to build other filesystems at the same time.  (By default, the
+\*(4B
+.Xr newfs
+builds a filesystem that SunOS will not handle; if you
+plan to switch OSes back and forth you may want to sacrifice the
+performance gain from the new filesystem format for compatibility.)
+You can build an old-format filesystem on \*(4B by giving the \-O
+option to
+.Xr newfs (8).
+.Xr Fsck (8)
+can convert old format filesystems to new format
+filesystems, but not vice versa,
+so you may want to initially build old format filesystems so that they
+can be mounted under SunOS,
+and then later convert them to new format filesystems when you are
+satisfied that \*(4B is running properly.
+In any case,
+.B
+you must build an old-style root filesystem
+.R
+so that the SunOS boot program will work.
+.IP 4)
+Mount the new root, then copy the SunOS
+.Pn /boot
+into place and use the SunOS ``installboot'' program
+to enable disk-based booting.
+Note that the filesystem must be mounted when you do the ``installboot'':
+.DS
+.ft CW
+# mount /dev/sd3a /mnt
+# cp /boot /mnt/boot
+# cd /usr/kvm/mdec
+# installboot /mnt/boot bootsd /dev/rsd3a
+.DE
+The SunOS
+.Pn /boot
+will load \*(4B kernels; there is no SPARCstation
+bootstrap code on the distribution.  Note that the SunOS
+.Pn /boot
+does not handle the new \*(4B filesystem format.
+.IP 5)
+Restore the contents of the \*(4B root filesystem.
+.DS
+.ft CW
+# cd /mnt
+# rrestore xf tapehost:/dev/nrst0
+.DE
+.IP 6)
+Boot the supplied kernel:
+.DS
+.ft CW
+# halt
+ok boot sd(0,3)vmunix -s		[for old proms] OR
+ok boot disk3 -s			[for new proms]
+\&... [\*(4B boot messages]
+.DE
+.LP
+To install the remaining filesystems, use the procedure described
+starting in section 2.5.
+In these instructions,
+.Pn /usr
+should be loaded into the ``e'' partition and
+.Pn /var
+in the ``f'' partition.
+.LP
+After completing the filesystem installation you may want
+to set up \*(4B to reboot automatically:
+.DS
+.ft CW
+# halt
+ok setenv boot-from sd(0,3)vmunix	[for old proms] OR
+ok setenv boot-device disk3		[for new proms]
+.DE
+If you build backwards-compatible filesystems, either with the SunOS
+newfs or with the \*(4B ``\-O'' option, you can mount these under
+SunOS.  The SunOS fsck will, however, always think that these filesystems
+are corrupted, as there are several new (previously unused)
+superblock fields that are updated in \*(4B.  Running ``fsck \-b32''
+and letting it ``fix'' the superblock will take care of this.
+.sp 0.5
+If you wish to run SunOS binaries that use SunOS shared libraries, you
+simply need to copy all the dynamic linker files from an existing
+SunOS system:
+.DS
+.ft CW
+# rcp sunos-host:/etc/ld.so.cache /etc/
+# rcp sunos-host:'/usr/lib/*.so*' /usr/lib/
+.DE
+The SunOS compiler and linker should be able to produce SunOS binaries
+under \*(4B, but this has not been tested.  If you plan to try it you
+will need the appropriate .sa files as well.
+.Sh 2 "Booting the DECstation"
+.Sh 3 "Supported hardware"
+.LP
+The hardware supported by \*(4B for the DECstation is as follows:
+.TS
+center box;
+lw(1i) lw(4i).
+CPU's	T{
+R2000 based (3100) and
+R3000 based (5000/200, 5000/20, 5000/25, 5000/1xx).
+T}
+_
+DISK's	T{
+SCSI-I (tested RZ23, RZ55, RZ57, Maxtor 8760S).
+T}
+_
+TAPE's	T{
+SCSI-I (tested DEC TK50, Archive DAT, Emulex MT02).
+T}
+_
+RS232	T{
+Internal DEC dc7085 and AMD 8530 based interfaces.
+T}
+_
+NETWORK	T{
+TURBOchannel PMAD-AA and internal LANCE based interfaces.
+T}
+_
+GRAPHICS	T{
+Terminal emulation and raw frame buffer support for
+3100 (color & monochrome),
+TURBOchannel PMAG-AA, PMAG-BA, PMAG-DV.
+T}
+_
+INPUT	T{
+Standard DEC keyboard (LK201) and mouse.
+T}
+_
+MISC	T{
+Battery-backed real time clock,
+internal and TURBOchannel PMAZ-AA SCSI interfaces.
+T}
+.TE
+.LP
+Major items that are not supported include the 5000/240
+(there is code but not compiled in or tested),
+R4000 based machines, FDDI and audio interfaces.
+Diskless machines are not supported but booting kernels and bootstrapping
+over the network is supported on the 5000 series.
+.Sh 3 "The procedure"
+.PP
+The first file on the distribution tape is a tar file that contains
+four files.
+The first step requires a running UNIX (or ULTRIX) system that can
+be used to extract the tar archive from the first file on the tape.
+The command:
+.DS
+.ft CW
+tar xf /dev/rmt0
+.DE
+will extract the following four files:
+.DS
+A) root.image: \fIdd\fP image of the root filesystem
+B) vmunix.tape: \fIdd\fP image for creating boot tapes
+C) vmunix.net: file for booting over the network
+D) root.dump: \fIdump\fP image of the root filesystem
+.DE
+There are three basic ways a system can be bootstrapped corresponding to the
+first three files.
+You may want to read the section on bootstrapping the HP300
+since many of the steps are similar.
+A spare, formatted SCSI disk is also useful.
+.Sh 4 "Procedure A: copy root filesystem to disk"
+.PP
+This procedure is similar to the HP300.
+If you have an extra disk, the easiest approach is to use \fIdd\fP\|(1)
+under ULTRIX to copy the root filesystem image to the beginning
+of the spare disk. 
+The root filesystem image includes a disklabel and bootblock along with the
+root filesystem.
+An example command to copy the image to the beginning of a disk is:
+.DS
+.ft CW
+dd if=root.image of=/dev/rz1c bs=\*(Bzb
+.DE
+The actual special file syntax will vary depending on unit numbers and
+the version of ULTRIX that is running.
+This system is now ready to boot. You can boot the kernel with one of the
+following PROM commands. If you are booting on a 3100, the disk must be SCSI
+id zero because of a bug.
+.DS
+.ft CW
+DEC 3100:    boot \-f rz(0,0,0)vmunix
+DEC 5000:    boot 5/rz0/vmunix
+.DE
+You can then proceed to section 2.5
+to create reasonable disk partitions for your machine
+and then install the rest of the system.
+.Sh 4 "Procedure B: bootstrap from tape"
+.PP
+If you have only a single machine with a single disk,
+you need to use the more difficult approach of booting a
+kernel and mini-root from tape or the network, and using it to restore
+the root filesystem.
+.PP
+First, you will need to create a boot tape. This can be done using
+\fIdd\fP as in the following example.
+.DS
+.ft CW
+dd if=vmunix.tape of=/dev/nrmt0 bs=1b
+dd if=root.dump of=/dev/nrmt0 bs=\*(Bzb
+.DE
+The actual special file syntax for the tape drive will vary depending on
+unit numbers, tape device and the version of ULTRIX that is running.
+.PP
+The first file on the boot tape contains a boot header, kernel, and
+mini-root filesystem that the PROM can copy into memory.
+Installing from tape has only been tested
+on a 3100 and a 5000/200 using a TK50 tape drive. Here are two example
+PROM commands to boot from tape.
+.DS
+.ft CW
+DEC 3100:    boot \-f tz(0,5,0) m    # 5 is the SCSI id of the TK50
+DEC 5000:    boot 5/tz6 m           # 6 is the SCSI id of the TK50
+.DE
+The `m' argument tells the kernel to look for a root filesystem in memory.
+Next you should proceed to section 2.4.3 to build a disk-based root filesystem.
+.Sh 4 "Procedure C: bootstrap over the network"
+.PP
+You will need a host machine that is running the \fIbootp\fP server 
+with the
+.Pn vmunix.net
+file installed in the default directory defined by the
+configuration file for
+.Xr bootp .
+Here are two example PROM commands to boot across the net:
+.DS
+.ft CW
+DEC 3100:	boot \-f tftp()vmunix.net m
+DEC 5000:	boot 6/tftp/vmunix.net m
+.DE
+This command should load the kernel and mini-root into memory and
+run the same as the tape install (procedure B).
+The rest of the steps are the same except
+you will need to start the network
+(if you are unsure how to fill in the <name> fields below,
+see sections 4.4 and 5).
+Execute the following to start the networking:
+.DS
+.ft CW
+# mount \-uw /
+# echo 127.0.0.1 localhost >> /etc/hosts
+# echo <your.host.inet.number> myname.my.domain myname >> /etc/hosts
+# echo <friend.host.inet.number> myfriend.my.domain myfriend >> /etc/hosts
+# ifconfig le0 inet myname
+.DE
+Next you should proceed to section 2.4.3 to build a disk-based root filesystem.
+.Sh 3 "Label disk and create the root filesystem"
+.LP
+There are five steps to create a disk-based root filesystem.
+.IP 1)
+Label the disk.
+.DS
+.ft CW
+# disklabel -W /dev/rrz?c		# This enables writing the label
+# disklabel -w -r -B /dev/rrz?c $DISKTYPE
+# newfs /dev/rrz?a
+\&...
+# fsck /dev/rrz?a
+\&...
+.DE
+Supported disk types are listed in
+.Pn /etc/disktab .
+.IP 2)
+Restore the root filesystem.
+.DS
+.ft CW
+# mount \-uw /
+# mount /dev/rz?a /a
+# cd /a
+.DE
+.ti +0.4i
+If you are restoring locally (procedure B), run:
+.DS
+.ft CW
+# mt \-f /dev/nrmt0 rew
+# restore \-xsf 2 /dev/rmt0
+.DE
+.ti +0.4i
+If you are restoring across the net (procedure c), run:
+.DS
+.ft CW
+# rrestore xf myfriend:/path/to/root.dump
+.DE
+.ti +0.4i
+When the restore finishes, clean up with:
+.DS
+.ft CW
+# cd /
+# sync
+# umount /a
+# fsck /dev/rz?a
+.DE
+.IP 3)
+Reset the system and initialize the PROM monitor to boot automatically.
+.DS
+.ft CW
+DEC 3100:	setenv bootpath boot \-f rz(0,?,0)vmunix
+DEC 5000:	setenv bootpath 5/rz?/vmunix -a
+.DE
+.IP 4)
+After booting UNIX, you will need to create
+.Pn /dev/mouse
+to run X windows as in the following example.
+.DS
+.ft CW
+rm /dev/mouse
+ln /dev/xx /dev/mouse
+.DE
+The 'xx' should be one of the following:
+.DS
+pm0	raw interface to PMAX graphics devices
+cfb0	raw interface to TURBOchannel PMAG-BA color frame buffer
+xcfb0	raw interface to maxine graphics devices
+mfb0	raw interface to mono graphics devices
+.DE
+You can then proceed to section 2.5 to install the rest of the system.
+Note that where the disk name ``sd'' is used throughout section 2.5,
+you should substitute the name ``rz''.
+.Sh 2 "Disk configuration"
+.PP
+All architectures now have a root filesystem up and running and
+proceed from this point to layout filesystems to make use
+of the available space and to balance disk load for better system
+performance.
+.Sh 3 "Disk naming and divisions"
+.PP
+Each physical disk drive can be divided into up to 8 partitions;
+UNIX typically uses only 3 or 4 partitions.
+For instance, the first partition, \*(Dk0a,
+is used for a root filesystem, a backup thereof,
+or a small filesystem like,
+.Pn /var/tmp ;
+the second partition, \*(Dk0b,
+is used for paging and swapping; and
+a third partition, typically \*(Dk0e,
+holds a user filesystem.
+.PP
+The space available on a disk varies per device.
+Each disk typically has a paging area of 30 to 100 megabytes
+and a root filesystem of about 17 megabytes.
+.\" XXX check
+The distributed system binaries occupy about 150 (180 with X11R5) megabytes
+.\" XXX check
+while the major sources occupy another 250 (340 with X11R5) megabytes.
+The
+.Pn /var
+filesystem as delivered on the tape is only 2Mb,
+however it should have at least 50Mb allocated to it just for
+normal system activity.
+Usually it is allocated the last partition on the disk
+so that it can provide as much space as possible to the
+.Pn /var/users
+filesystem.
+See section 2.5.4 for further details on disk layouts.
+.PP
+Be aware that the disks have their sizes
+measured in disk sectors (usually 512 bytes), while the UNIX filesystem
+blocks are variable sized.
+If
+.Sm BLOCKSIZE=1k
+is set in the user's environment, all user programs report
+disk space in kilobytes, otherwise,
+disk sizes are always reported in units of 512-byte sectors\**.
+.FS
+You can thank System V intransigence and POSIX duplicity for
+requiring that 512-byte blocks be the units that programs report.
+.FE
+The
+.Pn /etc/disktab
+file used in labelling disks and making filesystems
+specifies disk partition sizes in sectors.
+.Sh 3 "Layout considerations"
+.PP
+There are several considerations in deciding how
+to adjust the arrangement of things on your disks.
+The most important is making sure that there is adequate space
+for what is required; secondarily, throughput should be maximized.
+Paging space is an important parameter.
+The system, as distributed, sizes the configured
+paging areas each time the system is booted.  Further,
+multiple paging areas of different sizes may be interleaved.
+.PP
+Many common system programs (C, the editor, the assembler etc.)
+create intermediate files in the
+.Pn /tmp
+directory, so the filesystem where this is stored also should be made
+large enough to accommodate most high-water marks.
+Typically,
+.Pn /tmp
+is constructed from a memory-based filesystem (see
+.Xr mount_mfs (8)).
+Programs that want their temporary files to persist
+across system reboots (such as editors) should use
+.Pn /var/tmp .
+If you plan to use a disk-based
+.Pn /tmp
+filesystem to avoid loss across system reboots, it makes
+sense to mount this in a ``root'' (i.e. first partition)
+filesystem on another disk.
+All the programs that create files in
+.Pn /tmp
+take care to delete them, but are not immune to rare events
+and can leave dregs.
+The directory should be examined every so often and the old
+files deleted.
+.PP
+The efficiency with which UNIX is able to use the CPU
+is often strongly affected by the configuration of disk controllers;
+it is critical for good performance to balance disk load.
+There are at least five components of the disk load that you can
+divide between the available disks:
+.IP 1)
+The root filesystem.
+.IP 2)
+The
+.Pn /var
+and
+.Pn /var/tmp
+filesystems.
+.IP 3)
+The
+.Pn /usr
+filesystem.
+.IP 4)
+The user filesystems.
+.IP 5)
+The paging activity.
+.LP
+The following possibilities are ones we have used at times
+when we had 2, 3 and 4 disks:
+.TS
+center doublebox;
+l | c s s
+l | lw(5) | lw(5) | lw(5).
+	disks
+what	2	3	4
+_
+root	0	0	0
+var	1	2	3
+usr	1	1	1
+paging	0+1	0+2	0+2+3
+users	0	0+2	0+2
+archive	x	x	3
+.TE
+.PP
+The most important things to consider are to
+even out the disk load as much as possible, and to do this by
+decoupling filesystems (on separate arms) between which heavy copying occurs.
+Note that a long term average balanced load is not important; it is
+much more important to have an instantaneously balanced
+load when the system is busy.
+.PP
+Intelligent experimentation with a few filesystem arrangements can
+pay off in much improved performance.  It is particularly easy to
+move the root, the
+.Pn /var
+and
+.Pn /var/tmp
+filesystems and the paging areas.  Place the
+user files and the
+.Pn /usr
+directory as space needs dictate and experiment
+with the other, more easily moved filesystems.
+.Sh 3 "Filesystem parameters"
+.PP
+Each filesystem is parameterized according to its block size,
+fragment size, and the disk geometry characteristics of the
+medium on which it resides.  Inaccurate specification of the disk
+characteristics or haphazard choice of the filesystem parameters
+can result in substantial throughput degradation or significant
+waste of disk space.  As distributed,
+filesystems are configured according to the following table.
+.DS
+.TS
+center;
+l l l.
+Filesystem	Block size	Fragment size
+_
+root	8 kbytes	1 kbytes
+usr	8 kbytes	1 kbytes
+users	4 kbytes	512 bytes
+.TE
+.DE
+.PP
+The root filesystem block size is
+made large to optimize bandwidth to the associated disk.
+The large block size is important as many of the most
+heavily used programs are demand paged out of the
+.Pn /bin
+directory.
+The fragment size of 1 kbyte is a ``nominal'' value to use
+with a filesystem.  With a 1 kbyte fragment size
+disk space utilization is about the same
+as with the earlier versions of the filesystem.
+.PP
+The filesystems for users have a 4 kbyte block
+size with 512 byte fragment size.  These parameters
+have been selected based on observations of the
+performance of our user filesystems.  The 4 kbyte
+block size provides adequate bandwidth while the
+512 byte fragment size provides acceptable space compaction
+and disk fragmentation.
+.PP
+Other parameters may be chosen in constructing filesystems,
+but the factors involved in choosing a block
+size and fragment size are many and interact in complex
+ways.  Larger block sizes result in better
+throughput to large files in the filesystem as
+larger I/O requests will then be done by the
+system.  However,
+consideration must be given to the average file sizes
+found in the filesystem and the performance of the
+internal system buffer cache.   The system
+currently provides space in the inode for
+12 direct block pointers, 1 single indirect block
+pointer, 1 double indirect block pointer,
+and 1 triple indirect block pointer.
+If a file uses only direct blocks, access time to
+it will be optimized by maximizing the block size.
+If a file spills over into an indirect block,
+increasing the block size of the filesystem may
+decrease the amount of space used
+by eliminating the need to allocate an indirect block.
+However, if the block size is increased and an indirect
+block is still required, then more disk space will be
+used by the file because indirect blocks are allocated
+according to the block size of the filesystem.
+.PP
+In selecting a fragment size for a filesystem, at least
+two considerations should be given.  The major performance
+tradeoffs observed are between an 8 kbyte block filesystem
+and a 4 kbyte block filesystem.  Because of implementation
+constraints, the block size versus fragment size ratio can not
+be greater than 8.  This means that an 8 kbyte filesystem
+will always have a fragment size of at least 1 kbytes.  If
+a filesystem is created with a 4 kbyte block size and a
+1 kbyte fragment size, then upgraded to an 8 kbyte block size
+and 1 kbyte fragment size, identical space compaction will be
+observed.  However, if a filesystem has a 4 kbyte block size
+and 512 byte fragment size, converting it to an 8K/1K
+filesystem will result in 4-8% more space being
+used.  This implies that 4 kbyte block filesystems that
+might be upgraded to 8 kbyte blocks for higher performance should
+use fragment sizes of at least 1 kbytes to minimize the amount
+of work required in conversion.
+.PP
+A second, more important, consideration when selecting the
+fragment size for a filesystem is the level of fragmentation
+on the disk.  With an 8:1 fragment to block ratio, storage fragmentation
+occurs much sooner, particularly with a busy filesystem running
+near full capacity.  By comparison, the level of fragmentation in a
+4:1 fragment to block ratio filesystem is one tenth as severe.  This
+means that on filesystems where many files are created and
+deleted, the 512 byte fragment size is more likely to result in apparent
+space exhaustion because of fragmentation.  That is, when the filesystem
+is nearly full, file expansion that requires locating a
+contiguous area of disk space is more likely to fail on a 512
+byte filesystem than on a 1 kbyte filesystem.  To minimize
+fragmentation problems of this sort, a parameter in the super
+block specifies a minimum acceptable free space threshold.  When
+normal users (i.e. anyone but the super-user) attempt to allocate
+disk space and the free space threshold is exceeded, the user is
+returned an error as if the filesystem were really full.  This
+parameter is nominally set to 5%; it may be changed by supplying
+a parameter to
+.Xr newfs (8),
+or by updating the super block of an existing filesystem using
+.Xr tunefs (8).
+.PP
+Finally, a third, less common consideration is the attributes of
+the disk itself.  The fragment size should not be smaller than the
+physical sector size of the disk.  As an example, the HP magneto-optical
+disks have 1024 byte physical sectors.  Using a 512 byte fragment size
+on such disks will work but is extremely inefficient.
+.PP
+Note that the above discussion considers block sizes of up to only 8k.
+As of the 4.4 release, the maximum block size has been increased to 64k.
+This allows an entirely new set of block/fragment combinations for which
+there is little experience to date.
+In general though, unless a filesystem is to be used
+for a special purpose application (for example, storing
+image processing data), we recommend using the
+values supplied above.
+Remember that the current
+implementation limits the block size to at most 64 kbytes
+and the ratio of block size versus fragment size must be 1, 2, 4, or 8.
+.PP
+The disk geometry information used by the filesystem
+affects the block layout policies employed.  The file
+.Pn /etc/disktab ,
+as supplied, contains the data for most
+all drives supported by the system.  Before constructing
+a filesystem with
+.Xr newfs (8)
+you should label the disk (if it has not yet been labeled,
+and the driver supports labels).
+If labels cannot be used, you must instead
+specify the type of disk on which the filesystem resides;
+.Xr newfs
+then reads
+.Pn /etc/disktab
+instead of the pack label.
+This file also contains the default
+filesystem partition
+sizes, and default block and fragment sizes.  To
+override any of the default values you can modify the file,
+edit the disk label,
+or use an option to
+.Xr newfs .
+.Sh 3 "Implementing a layout"
+.PP
+To put a chosen disk layout into effect, you should use the
+.Xr newfs (8)
+command to create each new filesystem.
+Each filesystem must also be added to the file
+.Pn /etc/fstab
+so that it will be checked and mounted when the system is bootstrapped.
+.PP
+First we will consider a system with a single disk.
+There is little real choice on how to do the layout;
+the root filesystem goes in the ``a'' partition,
+.Pn /usr
+goes in the ``e'' partition, and
+.Pn /var
+fills out the remainder of the disk in the ``f'' partition.
+This is the organization used if you loaded the disk-image root filesystem.
+With the addition of a memory-based
+.Pn /tmp
+filesystem, its fstab entry would be as follows:
+.TS
+center;
+lfC lfC l l n n.
+/dev/\*(Dk0a	/	ufs	rw	1	1
+/dev/\*(Dk0b	none	swap	sw	0	0
+/dev/\*(Dk0b	/tmp	mfs	rw,-s=14000,-b=8192,-f=1024,-T=sd660	0	0
+/dev/\*(Dk0e	/usr	ufs	ro	1	2
+/dev/\*(Dk0f	/var	ufs	rw	1	2
+.TE
+.PP
+If we had a second disk, we would split the load between the drives.
+On the second disk, we place the
+.Pn /usr
+and
+.Pn /var
+filesystems in their usual \*(Dk1e and \*(Dk1f
+partitions respectively.
+The \*(Dk1b partition would be used as a second paging area,
+and the \*(Dk1a partition left as a spare root filesystem
+(alternatively \*(Dk1a could be used for
+.Pn /var/tmp ).
+The first disk still holds the
+the root filesystem in \*(Dk0a, and the primary swap area in \*(Dk0b.
+The \*(Dk0e partition is used to hold home directories in
+.Pn /var/users .
+The \*(Dk0f partition can be used for
+.Pn /usr/src
+or alternately the \*(Dk0e partition can be extended to cover
+the rest of the disk with
+.Xr disklabel (8).
+As before, the
+.Pn /tmp
+directory is a memory-based filesystem.
+Note that to interleave the paging between the two disks
+you must build a system configuration that specifies:
+.DS
+config	vmunix	root on \*(Dk0 swap on \*(Dk0 and \*(Dk1
+.DE
+The
+.Pn /etc/fstab
+file would then contain
+.TS
+center;
+lfC lfC l l n n.
+/dev/\*(Dk0a	/	ufs	rw	1	1
+/dev/\*(Dk0b	none	swap	sw	0	0
+/dev/\*(Dk1b	none	swap	sw	0	0
+/dev/\*(Dk0b	/tmp	mfs	rw,-s=14000,-b=8192,-f=1024,-T=sd660	0	0
+/dev/\*(Dk1e	/usr	ufs	ro	1	2
+/dev/\*(Dk0f	/usr/src	ufs	rw	1	2
+/dev/\*(Dk1f	/var	ufs	rw	1	2
+/dev/\*(Dk0e	/var/users	ufs	rw	1	2
+.TE
+.PP
+To make the
+.Pn /var
+filesystem we would do:
+.DS
+\fB#\fP \fIcd /dev\fP
+\fB#\fP \fIMAKEDEV \*(Dk1\fP
+\fB#\fP \fIdisklabel -wr \*(Dk1 "disk type" "disk name"\fP
+\fB#\fP \fInewfs \*(Dk1f\fP
+(information about filesystem prints out)
+\fB#\fP \fImkdir /var\fP
+\fB#\fP \fImount /dev/\*(Dk1f /var\fP
+.DE
+.Sh 2 "Installing the rest of the system"
+.PP
+At this point you should have your disks partitioned.
+The next step is to extract the rest of the data from the tape.
+At a minimum you need to set up the
+.Pn /var
+and
+.Pn /usr
+filesystems.
+You may also want to extract some or all the program sources.
+Since not all architectures support tape drives or don't support the
+correct ones, you may need to extract the files indirectly using
+.Xr rsh (1).
+For example, for a directly connected tape drive you might do:
+.DS
+\fB#\fP \fImt -f /dev/nr\*(Mt0 fsf\fP
+\fB#\fP \fItar xbpf \*(Bz /dev/nr\*(Mt0\fP
+.DE
+The equivalent indirect procedure (where the tape drive is on machine ``foo'')
+is:
+.DS
+\fB#\fP \fIrsh foo mt -f /dev/nr\*(Mt0 fsf\fP
+\fB#\fP \fIrsh foo dd if=/dev/nr\*(Mt0 bs=\*(Bzb | tar xbpf \*(Bz -\fP
+.DE
+Obviously, the target machine must be connected to the local network
+for this to work.
+To do this:
+.DS
+\fB#\fP \fIecho  127.0.0.1  localhost >> /etc/hosts\fP
+\fB#\fP \fIecho  \fPyour.host.inet.number  myname.my.domain  myname\fI >> /etc/hosts\fP
+\fB#\fP \fIecho  \fPfriend.host.inet.number  myfriend.my.domain  myfriend\fI >> /etc/hosts\fP
+\fB#\fP \fIifconfig  le0  inet  \fPmyname
+.DE
+where the ``host.inet.number'' fields are the IP addresses for your host and
+the host with the tape drive
+and the ``my.domain'' fields are the names of your machine and the tape-hosting
+machine.
+See sections 4.4 and 5 for more information on setting up the network.
+.PP
+Assuming a directly connected tape drive, here is how to extract and
+install
+.Pn /var
+and
+.Pn /usr :
+.br
+.ne 5
+.TS
+lw(2i) l.
+\fB#\fP \fImount \-uw /dev/\*(Dk#a /\fP	(read-write mount root filesystem)
+\fB#\fP \fIdate yymmddhhmm\fP	(set date, see \fIdate\fP\|(1))
+\&....
+\fB#\fP \fIpasswd -l root\fP	(set password for super-user)
+\fBNew password:\fP	(password will not echo)
+\fBRetype new password:\fP
+\fB#\fP \fIpasswd -l toor\fP	(set password for super-user)
+\fBNew password:\fP	(password will not echo)
+\fBRetype new password:\fP
+\fB#\fP \fIhostname mysitename\fP	(set your hostname)
+\fB#\fP \fInewfs r\*(Dk#p\fP	(create empty user filesystem)
+(\fI\*(Dk\fP is the disk type, \fI#\fP is the unit number,
+\fIp\fP is the partition; this takes a few minutes)
+\fB#\fP \fImount /dev/\*(Dk#p /var\fP	(mount the var filesystem)
+\fB#\fP \fIcd /var\fP	(make /var the current directory)
+\fB#\fP \fImt -f /dev/nr\*(Mt0 fsf\fP	(space to end of previous tape file)
+\fB#\fP \fItar xbpf \*(Bz /dev/nr\*(Mt0\fP	(extract all of var)
+(this takes a few minutes)
+\fB#\fP \fInewfs r\*(Dk#p\fP	(create empty user filesystem)
+(as before \fI\*(Dk\fP is the disk type, \fI#\fP is the unit number,
+\fIp\fP is the partition)
+\fB#\fP \fImount /dev/\*(Dk#p /mnt\fP	(mount the new /usr in temporary location)
+\fB#\fP \fIcd /mnt\fP	(make /mnt the current directory)
+\fB#\fP \fImt -f /dev/nr\*(Mt0 fsf\fP	(space to end of previous tape file)
+\fB#\fP \fItar xbpf \*(Bz /dev/nr\*(Mt0\fP	(extract all of usr except usr/src)
+(this takes about 15-20 minutes)
+\fB#\fP \fIcd /\fP	(make / the current directory)
+\fB#\fP \fIumount /mnt\fP	(unmount from temporary mount point)
+\fB#\fP \fIrm -r /usr/*\fP	(remove excess bootstrap binaries)
+\fB#\fP \fImount /dev/\*(Dk#p /usr\fP	(remount /usr)
+.TE
+If no disk label has been installed on the disk, the
+.Xr newfs
+command will require a third argument to specify the disk type,
+using one of the names in
+.Pn /etc/disktab .
+If the tape had been rewound or positioned incorrectly before the
+.Xr tar ,
+to extract
+.Pn /var
+it may be repositioned by the following commands.
+.DS
+\fB#\fP \fImt -f /dev/nr\*(Mt0 rew\fP
+\fB#\fP \fImt -f /dev/nr\*(Mt0 fsf 1\fP
+.DE
+The data on the second and third tape files has now been extracted.
+If you are using 6250bpi tapes, the first reel of the
+distribution is no longer needed; you should now mount the second
+reel instead.  The installation procedure continues from this
+point on the 8mm tape.
+The next step is to extract the sources.
+As previously noted,
+.Pn /usr/src
+.\" XXX Check
+requires about 250-340Mb of space.
+Ideally sources should be in a separate filesystem;
+if you plan to put them into your
+.Pn /usr
+filesystem, it will need at least 500Mb of space.
+Assuming that you will be using a separate filesystem on \*(Dk0f for
+.Pn /usr/src ,
+you will start by creating and mounting it:
+.DS
+\fB#\fP \fInewfs \*(Dk0f\fP
+(information about filesystem prints out)
+\fB#\fP \fImkdir /usr/src\fP
+\fB#\fP \fImount /dev/\*(Dk0f /usr/src\fP
+.DE
+.LP
+First you will extract the kernel source:
+.DS
+.TS
+lw(2i) l.
+\fB#\fP \fIcd /usr/src\fP
+\fB#\fP \fImt -f /dev/nr\*(Mt0 fsf\fP	(space to end of previous tape file)
+(this should only be done on Exabyte distributions)
+\fB#\fP \fItar xpbf \*(Bz /dev/nr\*(Mt0\fP	(extract the kernel sources)
+(this takes about 15-30 minutes)
+.TE
+.DE
+.LP
+The next tar file contains the sources for the utilities.
+It is extracted as follows:
+.DS
+.TS
+lw(2i) l.
+\fB#\fP \fIcd /usr/src\fP
+\fB#\fP \fImt -f /dev/nr\*(Mt0 fsf\fP	(space to end of previous tape file)
+\fB#\fP \fItar xpbf \*(Bz /dev/rmt12\fP 	(extract the utility source)
+(this takes about 30-60 minutes)
+.TE
+.DE
+.PP
+If you are using 6250bpi tapes, the second reel of the
+distribution is no longer needed; you should now mount the third
+reel instead.  The installation procedure continues from this
+point on the 8mm tape.
+.PP
+The next tar file contains the sources for the contributed software.
+It is extracted as follows:
+.DS
+.TS
+lw(2i) l.
+\fB#\fP \fIcd /usr/src\fP
+\fB#\fP \fImt -f /dev/nr\*(Mt0 fsf\fP	(space to end of previous tape file)
+(this should only be done on Exabyte distributions)
+\fB#\fP \fItar xpbf \*(Bz /dev/rmt12\fP 	(extract the contributed software source)
+(this takes about 30-60 minutes)
+.TE
+.DE
+.PP
+If you received a distribution on 8mm Exabyte tape,
+there is one additional tape file on the distribution tape
+that has not been installed to this point; it contains the
+sources for X11R5 in
+.Xr tar (1)
+format.  As distributed, X11R5 should be placed in
+.Pn /usr/src/X11R5 .
+.DS
+.TS
+lw(2i) l.
+\fB#\fP \fIcd /usr/src\fP
+\fB#\fP \fImt -f /dev/nr\*(Mt0 fsf\fP	(space to end of previous tape file)
+\fB#\fP \fItar xpbf \*(Bz /dev/nr\*(Mt0\fP	(extract the X11R5 source)
+(this takes about 30-60 minutes)
+.TE
+.DE
+Many of the X11 utilities search using the path
+.Pn /usr/X11 ,
+so be sure that you have a symbolic link that points at
+the location of your X11 binaries (here, X11R5).
+.PP
+Having now completed the extraction of the sources, 
+you may want to verify that your
+.Pn /usr/src
+filesystem is consistent.
+To do so, you must unmount it, and run
+.Xr fsck (8);
+assuming that you used \*(Dk0f you would proceed as follows:
+.DS
+.TS
+lw(2i) l.
+\fB#\fP \fIcd /\fP	(change directory, back to the root)
+\fB#\fP \fIumount /usr/src\fP	(unmount /usr/src)
+\fB#\fP \fIfsck /dev/r\*(Dk0f\fP
+.TE
+.DE
+The output from
+.Xr fsck
+should look something like:
+.DS
+.B
+** /dev/r\*(Dk0f
+** Last Mounted on /usr/src
+** Phase 1 - Check Blocks and Sizes
+** Phase 2 - Check Pathnames
+** Phase 3 - Check Connectivity
+** Phase 4 - Check Reference Counts
+** Phase 5 - Check Cyl groups
+23000 files, 261000 used, 39000 free (2200 frags, 4600 blocks)
+.R
+.DE
+.PP
+If there are inconsistencies in the filesystem, you may be prompted
+to apply corrective action; see the
+.Xr fsck (8)
+or \fIFsck \(en The UNIX File System Check Program\fP (SMM:3) for more details.
+.PP
+To use the
+.Pn /usr/src
+filesystem, you should now remount it with:
+.DS
+\fB#\fP \fImount /dev/\*(Dk0f /usr/src\fP
+.DE
+or if you have made an entry for it in
+.Pn /etc/fstab
+you can remount it with:
+.DS
+\fB#\fP \fImount /usr/src\fP
+.DE
+.Sh 2 "Additional conversion information"
+.PP
+After setting up the new \*(4B filesystems, you may restore the user
+files that were saved on tape before beginning the conversion.
+Note that the \*(4B
+.Xr restore
+program does its work on a mounted filesystem using normal system operations.
+This means that filesystem dumps may be restored even
+if the characteristics of the filesystem changed.
+To restore a dump tape for, say, the
+.Pn /a
+filesystem something like the following would be used:
+.DS
+\fB#\fP \fImkdir /a\fP
+\fB#\fP \fInewfs \*(Dk#p\fI
+\fB#\fP \fImount /dev/\*(Dk#p /a\fP
+\fB#\fP \fIcd /a\fP
+\fB#\fP \fIrestore x\fP
+.DE
+.PP
+If
+.Xr tar
+images were written instead of doing a dump, you should
+be sure to use its `\-p' option when reading the files back.  No matter
+how you restore a filesystem, be sure to unmount it and and check its
+integrity with
+.Xr fsck (8)
+when the job is complete.
diff --git a/share/doc/smm/01.setup/3.t b/share/doc/smm/01.setup/3.t
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b0f0c2b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/share/doc/smm/01.setup/3.t
@@ -0,0 +1,2001 @@
+.\" Copyright (c) 1980, 1986, 1988, 1993
+.\"	 The Regents of the University of California.  All rights reserved.
+.\"
+.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+.\" are met:
+.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+.\"    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+.\" 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
+.\"    must display the following acknowledgement:
+.\"	This product includes software developed by the University of
+.\"	California, Berkeley and its contributors.
+.\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
+.\"    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+.\"    without specific prior written permission.
+.\"
+.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+.\" ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
+.\"
+.\"	@(#)3.t	8.1 (Berkeley) 7/27/93
+.\"
+.ds lq ``
+.ds rq ''
+.ds RH "Upgrading a \*(Ps System
+.ds CF \*(Dy
+.Sh 1 "Upgrading a \*(Ps system"
+.PP
+This section describes the procedure for upgrading a \*(Ps
+system to \*(4B.  This procedure may vary according to the version of
+the system running before conversion.
+If you are converting from a
+System V system, some of this section will still apply (in particular,
+the filesystem conversion).  However, many of the system configuration
+files are different, and the executable file formats are completely
+incompatible.
+.PP
+In particular be wary when using this information to upgrade
+a \*(Ps HP300 system.
+There are at least four different versions of ``\*(Ps'' out there:
+.IP 1)
+HPBSD 1.x from Utah.
+.br
+This was the original version of \*(Ps for HP300s from which the
+other variants (and \*(4B) are derived.
+It is largely a \*(Ps system with Sun's NFS 3.0 filesystem code and
+some \*(Ps-Tahoe features (e.g. networking code).
+Since the filesystem code is 4.2/4.3 vintage and the filesystem
+hierarchy is largely \*(Ps, most of this section should apply.
+.IP 2)
+MORE/bsd from Mt. Xinu.
+.br
+This is a \*(Ps-Tahoe vintage system with Sun's NFS 4.0 filesystem code
+upgraded with Tahoe UFS features.
+The instructions for \*(Ps-Tahoe should largely apply.
+.IP 3)
+\*(Ps-Reno from CSRG.
+.br
+At least one site bootstrapped HP300 support from the Reno distribution.
+The Reno filesystem code was somewhere between \*(Ps and \*(4B: the VFS switch
+had been added but many of the UFS features (e.g. ``inline'' symlinks)
+were missing.
+The filesystem hierarchy reorganization first appeared in this release.
+Be extremely careful following these instructions if you are
+upgrading from the Reno distribution.
+.IP 4)
+HPBSD 2.0 from Utah.
+.br
+As if things were not bad enough already,
+this release has the \*(4B filesystem and networking code
+as well as some utilities, but still has a \*(Ps hierarchy.
+No filesystem conversions are necessary for this upgrade,
+but files will still need to be moved around.
+.Sh 2 "Installation overview"
+.PP
+If you are running \*(Ps, upgrading your system
+involves replacing your kernel and system utilities.
+In general, there are three possible ways to install a new \*(Bs distribution:
+(1) boot directly from the distribution tape, use it to load new binaries
+onto empty disks, and then merge or restore any existing configuration files
+and filesystems;
+(2) use an existing \*(Ps or later system to extract the root and
+.Pn /usr
+filesystems from the distribution tape,
+boot from the new system, then merge or restore existing
+configuration files and filesystems; or
+(3) extract the sources from the distribution tape onto an existing system,
+and use that system to cross-compile and install \*(4B.
+For this release, the second alternative is strongly advised,
+with the third alternative reserved as a last resort.
+In general, older binaries will continue to run under \*(4B,
+but there are many exceptions that are on the critical path
+for getting the system running.
+Ideally, the new system binaries (root and
+.Pn /usr
+filesystems) should be installed on spare disk partitions,
+then site-specific files should be merged into them.
+Once the new system is up and fully merged, the previous root and
+.Pn /usr
+filesystems can be reused.
+Other existing filesystems can be retained and used,
+except that (as usual) the new
+.Xr fsck
+should be run before they are mounted.
+.PP
+It is \fBSTRONGLY\fP advised that you make full dumps of each filesystem
+before beginning, especially any that you intend to modify in place
+during the merge.
+It is also desirable to run filesystem checks
+of all filesystems to be converted to \*(4B before shutting down.
+This is an excellent time to review your disk configuration
+for possible tuning of the layout.
+Most systems will need to provide a new filesystem for system use
+mounted on
+.Pn /var
+(see below).
+However, the
+.Pn /tmp
+filesystem can be an MFS virtual-memory-resident filesystem,
+potentially freeing an existing disk partition.
+(Additional swap space may be desirable as a consequence.)
+See
+.Xr mount_mfs (8).
+.PP
+The recommended installation procedure includes the following steps.
+The order of these steps will probably vary according to local needs.
+.IP \(bu
+Extract root and
+.Pn /usr
+filesystems from the distribution tapes.
+.IP \(bu
+Extract kernel and/or user-level sources from the distribution tape
+if space permits.
+This can serve as the backup documentation as needed.
+.IP \(bu
+Configure and boot a kernel for the local system.
+This can be delayed if the generic kernel from the distribution
+supports enough hardware to proceed.
+.IP \(bu
+Build a skeletal
+.Pn /var
+filesystem (see
+.Xr mtree (8)).
+.IP \(bu
+Merge site-dependent configuration files from
+.Pn /etc
+and
+.Pn /usr/lib
+into the new
+.Pn /etc
+directory.
+Note that many file formats and contents have changed; see section 3.4
+of this document.
+.IP \(bu
+Copy or merge files from
+.Pn /usr/adm ,
+.Pn /usr/spool ,
+.Pn /usr/preserve ,
+.Pn /usr/lib ,
+and other locations into
+.Pn /var .
+.IP \(bu
+Merge local macros, dictionaries, etc. into
+.Pn /usr/share .
+.IP \(bu
+Merge and update local software to reflect the system changes.
+.IP \(bu
+Take off the rest of the morning, you've earned it!
+.PP
+Section 3.2 lists the files to be saved as part of the conversion process.
+Section 3.3 describes the bootstrap process.
+Section 3.4 discusses the merger of the saved files back into the new system.
+Section 3.5 gives an overview of the major
+bug fixes and changes between \*(Ps and \*(4B.
+Section 3.6 provides general hints on possible problems to be
+aware of when converting from \*(Ps to \*(4B.
+.Sh 2 "Files to save"
+.PP
+The following list enumerates the standard set of files you will want to
+save and suggests directories in which site-specific files should be present.
+This list will likely be augmented with non-standard files you
+have added to your system.
+If you do not have enough space to create parallel
+filesystems, you should create a
+.Xr tar
+image of the following files before the new filesystems are created.
+The rest of this subsection describes where theses files
+have moved and how they have changed.
+.TS
+lfC c l.
+/.cshrc	\(dg	root csh startup script (moves to \f(CW/root/.cshrc\fP)
+/.login	\(dg	root csh login script (moves to \f(CW/root/.login\fP)
+/.profile	\(dg	root sh startup script (moves to \f(CW/root/.profile\fP)
+/.rhosts	\(dg	for trusted machines and users (moves to \f(CW/root/.rhosts\fP)
+/etc/disktab	\(dd	in case you changed disk partition sizes
+/etc/fstab	*	disk configuration data
+/etc/ftpusers	\(dg	for local additions
+/etc/gettytab	\(dd	getty database
+/etc/group	*	group data base
+/etc/hosts	\(dg	for local host information
+/etc/hosts.equiv	\(dg	for local host equivalence information
+/etc/hosts.lpd	\(dg	printer access file
+/etc/inetd.conf	*	Internet services configuration data
+/etc/named*	\(dg	named configuration files
+/etc/netstart	\(dg	network initialization
+/etc/networks	\(dg	for local network information
+/etc/passwd	*	user data base
+/etc/printcap	*	line printer database
+/etc/protocols	\(dd	in case you added any local protocols
+/etc/rc	*	for any local additions
+/etc/rc.local	*	site specific system startup commands
+/etc/remote	\(dg	auto-dialer configuration
+/etc/services	\(dd	for local additions
+/etc/shells	\(dd	list of valid shells
+/etc/syslog.conf	*	system logger configuration
+/etc/securettys	*	merged into ttys
+/etc/ttys	*	terminal line configuration data
+/etc/ttytype	*	merged into ttys
+/etc/termcap	\(dd	for any local entries that may have been added
+/lib	\(dd	for any locally developed language processors
+/usr/dict/*	\(dd	for local additions to words and papers
+/usr/include/*	\(dd	for local additions
+/usr/lib/aliases	*	mail forwarding data base (moves to \f(CW/etc/aliases\fP)
+/usr/lib/crontab	*	cron daemon data base (moves to \f(CW/etc/crontab\fP)
+/usr/lib/crontab.local	*	local cron daemon data base (moves to \f(CW/etc/crontab.local\fP)
+/usr/lib/lib*.a	\(dg	for local libraries
+/usr/lib/mail.rc	\(dg	system-wide mail(1) initialization (moves to \f(CW/etc/mail.rc\fP)
+/usr/lib/sendmail.cf	*	sendmail configuration (moves to \f(CW/etc/sendmail.cf\fP)
+/usr/lib/tmac/*	\(dd	for locally developed troff/nroff macros (moves to \f(CW/usr/share/tmac/*\fP)
+/usr/lib/uucp/*	\(dg	for local uucp configuration files
+/usr/man/manl	*	for manual pages for locally developed programs (moves to \f(CW/usr/local/man\fP)
+/usr/spool/*	\(dg	for current mail, news, uucp files, etc. (moves to \f(CW/var/spool\fP)
+/usr/src/local	\(dg	for source for locally developed programs
+/sys/conf/HOST	\(dg	configuration file for your machine (moves to \f(CW/sys/<arch>/conf\fP)
+/sys/conf/files.HOST	\(dg	list of special files in your kernel (moves to \f(CW/sys/<arch>/conf\fP)
+/*/quotas	*	filesystem quota files (moves to \f(CW/*/quotas.user\fP)
+.TE
+.DS
+\(dg\|Files that can be used from \*(Ps without change.
+\(dd\|Files that need local changes merged into \*(4B files.
+*\|Files that require special work to merge and are discussed in section 3.4.
+.DE
+.Sh 2 "Installing \*(4B"
+.PP
+The next step is to build a working \*(4B system.
+This can be done by following the steps in section 2 of
+this document for extracting the root and
+.Pn /usr
+filesystems from the distribution tape onto unused disk partitions.
+For the SPARC, the root filesystem dump on the tape could also be
+extracted directly.
+For the HP300 and DECstation, the raw disk image can be copied
+into an unused partition and this partition can then be dumped
+to create an image that can be restored.
+The exact procedure chosen will depend on the disk configuration
+and the number of suitable disk partitions that may be used.
+It is also desirable to run filesystem checks
+of all filesystems to be converted to \*(4B before shutting down.
+In any case, this is an excellent time to review your disk configuration
+for possible tuning of the layout.
+Section 2.5 and
+.Xr config (8)
+are required reading.
+.LP
+The filesystem in \*(4B has been reorganized in an effort to
+meet several goals:
+.IP 1)
+The root filesystem should be small.
+.IP 2)
+There should be a per-architecture centrally-shareable read-only
+.Pn /usr
+filesystem.
+.IP 3)
+Variable per-machine directories should be concentrated below
+a single mount point named
+.Pn /var .
+.IP 4)
+Site-wide machine independent shareable text files should be separated
+from architecture specific binary files and should be concentrated below
+a single mount point named
+.Pn /usr/share .
+.LP
+These goals are realized with the following general layouts.
+The reorganized root filesystem has the following directories:
+.TS
+lfC l.
+/etc	(config files)
+/bin	(user binaries needed when single-user)
+/sbin	(root binaries needed when single-user)
+/local	(locally added binaries used only by this machine)
+/tmp	(mount point for memory based filesystem)
+/dev	(local devices)
+/home	(mount point for AMD)
+/var	(mount point for per-machine variable directories)
+/usr	(mount point for multiuser binaries and files)
+.TE
+.LP
+The reorganized
+.Pn /usr
+filesystem has the following directories:
+.TS
+lfC l.
+/usr/bin	(user binaries)
+/usr/contrib	(software contributed to \*(4B)
+/usr/games	(binaries for games, score files in \f(CW/var\fP)
+/usr/include	(standard include files)
+/usr/lib	(lib*.a from old \f(CW/usr/lib\fP)
+/usr/libdata	(databases from old \f(CW/usr/lib\fP)
+/usr/libexec	(executables from old \f(CW/usr/lib\fP)
+/usr/local	(locally added binaries used site-wide)
+/usr/old	(deprecated binaries)
+/usr/sbin	(root binaries)
+/usr/share	(mount point for site-wide shared text)
+/usr/src	(mount point for sources)
+.TE
+.LP
+The reorganized
+.Pn /usr/share
+filesystem has the following directories:
+.TS
+lfC l.
+/usr/share/calendar	(various useful calendar files)
+/usr/share/dict	(dictionaries)
+/usr/share/doc	(\*(4B manual sources)
+/usr/share/games	(games text files)
+/usr/share/groff_font	(groff font information)
+/usr/share/man	(typeset manual pages)
+/usr/share/misc	(dumping ground for random text files)
+/usr/share/mk	(templates for \*(4B makefiles)
+/usr/share/skel	(template user home directory files)
+/usr/share/tmac	(various groff macro packages)
+/usr/share/zoneinfo	(information on time zones)
+.TE
+.LP
+The reorganized
+.Pn /var
+filesystem has the following directories:
+.TS
+lfC l.
+/var/account	(accounting files, formerly \f(CW/usr/adm\fP)
+/var/at	(\fIat\fP\|(1) spooling area)
+/var/backups	(backups of system files)
+/var/crash	(crash dumps)
+/var/db	(system-wide databases, e.g. tags)
+/var/games	(score files)
+/var/log	(log files)
+/var/mail	(users mail)
+/var/obj	(hierarchy to build \f(CW/usr/src\fP)
+/var/preserve	(preserve area for vi)
+/var/quotas	(directory to store quota files)
+/var/run	(directory to store *.pid files)
+/var/rwho	(rwho databases)
+/var/spool/ftp	(home directory for anonymous ftp)
+/var/spool/mqueue	(sendmail spooling directory)
+/var/spool/news	(news spooling area)
+/var/spool/output	(printer spooling area)
+/var/spool/uucp	(uucp spooling area)
+/var/tmp	(disk-based temporary directory)
+/var/users	(root of per-machine user home directories)
+.TE
+.PP
+The \*(4B bootstrap routines pass the identity of the boot device
+through to the kernel.
+The kernel then uses that device as its root filesystem.
+Thus, for example, if you boot from
+.Pn /dev/\*(Dk1a ,
+the kernel will use
+.Pn \*(Dk1a
+as its root filesystem. If
+.Pn /dev/\*(Dk1b
+is configured as a swap partition, 
+it will be used as the initial swap area,
+otherwise the normal primary swap area (\c
+.Pn /dev/\*(Dk0b )
+will be used.
+The \*(4B bootstrap is backward compatible with \*(Ps,
+so you can replace your old bootstrap if you use it
+to boot your first \*(4B kernel.
+However, the \*(Ps bootstrap cannot access \*(4B filesystems,
+so if you plan to convert your filesystems to \*(4B,
+you must install a new bootstrap \fIbefore\fP doing the conversion.
+Note that SPARC users cannot build a \*(4B compatible version
+of the bootstrap, so must \fInot\fP convert their root filesystem
+to the new \*(4B format.
+.PP
+Once you have extracted the \*(4B system and booted from it,
+you will have to build a kernel customized for your configuration.
+If you have any local device drivers,
+they will have to be incorporated into the new kernel.
+See section 4.1.3 and ``Building 4.3BSD UNIX Systems with Config'' (SMM:2).
+.PP
+If converting from \*(Ps, your old filesystems should be converted.
+If you've modified the partition
+sizes from the original \*(Ps ones, and are not already using the
+\*(4B disk labels, you will have to modify the default disk partition
+tables in the kernel.  Make the necessary table changes and boot
+your custom kernel \fBBEFORE\fP trying to access any of your old
+filesystems!  After doing this, if necessary, the remaining filesystems
+may be converted in place by running the \*(4B version of
+.Xr fsck (8)
+on each filesystem and allowing it to make the necessary corrections.
+The new version of
+.Xr fsck
+is more strict about the size of directories than
+the version supplied with \*(Ps.
+Thus the first time that it is run on a \*(Ps filesystem,
+it will produce messages of the form:
+.DS
+\fBDIRECTORY ...: LENGTH\fP xx \fBNOT MULTIPLE OF 512 (ADJUSTED)\fP
+.DE
+Length ``xx'' will be the size of the directory;
+it will be expanded to the next multiple of 512 bytes.
+The new
+.Xr fsck
+will also set default \fIinterleave\fP and
+\fInpsect\fP (number of physical sectors per track) values on older
+filesystems, in which these fields were unused spares; this correction
+will produce messages of the form:
+.DS
+\fBIMPOSSIBLE INTERLEAVE=0 IN SUPERBLOCK (SET TO DEFAULT)\fP\**
+\fBIMPOSSIBLE NPSECT=0 IN SUPERBLOCK (SET TO DEFAULT)\fP
+.DE
+.FS
+The defaults are to set \fIinterleave\fP to 1 and
+\fInpsect\fP to \fInsect\fP.
+This is correct on most drives;
+it affects only performance (usually virtually unmeasurably).
+.FE
+Filesystems that have had their interleave and npsect values
+set will be diagnosed by the old
+.Xr fsck
+as having a bad superblock; the old
+.Xr fsck
+will run only if given an alternate superblock
+(\fIfsck \-b32\fP),
+in which case it will re-zero these fields.
+The \*(4B kernel will internally set these fields to their defaults
+if fsck has not done so; again, the \fI\-b32\fP option may be
+necessary for running the old
+.Xr fsck .
+.PP
+In addition, \*(4B removes several limits on filesystem sizes
+that were present in \*(Ps.
+The limited filesystems
+continue to work in \*(4B, but should be converted
+as soon as it is convenient
+by running
+.Xr fsck
+with the \fI\-c 2\fP option.
+The sequence \fIfsck \-p \-c 2\fP will update them all,
+fix the interleave and npsect fields,
+fix any incorrect directory lengths,
+expand maximum uid's and gid's to 32-bits,
+place symbolic links less than 60 bytes into their inode,
+and fill in directory type fields all at once.
+The new filesystem formats are incompatible with older systems.
+If you wish to continue using these filesystems with the older
+systems you should make only the compatible changes using
+\fIfsck \-c 1\fP.
+.Sh 2 "Merging your files from \*(Ps into \*(4B"
+.PP
+When your system is booting reliably and you have the \*(4B root and
+.Pn /usr
+filesystems fully installed you will be ready
+to continue with the next step in the conversion process,
+merging your old files into the new system.
+.PP
+If you saved the files on a
+.Xr tar
+tape, extract them into a scratch directory, say
+.Pn /usr/convert :
+.DS
+\fB#\fP \fImkdir /usr/convert\fP
+\fB#\fP \fIcd /usr/convert\fP
+\fB#\fP \fItar xp\fP
+.DE
+.PP
+The data files marked in the previous table with a dagger (\(dg)
+may be used without change from the previous system.
+Those data files marked with a double dagger (\(dd) have syntax 
+changes or substantial enhancements.
+You should start with the \*(4B version and carefully
+integrate any local changes into the new file.
+Usually these local changes can be incorporated
+without conflict into the new file;
+some exceptions are noted below.
+The files marked with an asterisk (*) require
+particular attention and are discussed below.
+.PP
+As described in section 3.3,
+the most immediately obvious change in \*(4B is the reorganization
+of the system filesystems.
+Users of certain recent vendor releases have seen this general organization,
+although \*(4B takes the reorganization a bit further.
+The directories most affected are
+.Pn /etc ,
+that now contains only system configuration files;
+.Pn /var ,
+a new filesystem containing per-system spool and log files; and
+.Pn /usr/share,
+that contains most of the text files shareable across architectures
+such as documentation and macros.
+System administration programs formerly in
+.Pn /etc
+are now found in
+.Pn /sbin
+and
+.Pn /usr/sbin .
+Various programs and data files formerly in
+.Pn /usr/lib
+are now found in
+.Pn /usr/libexec
+and
+.Pn /usr/libdata ,
+respectively.
+Administrative files formerly in
+.Pn /usr/adm
+are in
+.Pn /var/account
+and, similarly, log files are now in
+.Pn /var/log .
+The directory
+.Pn /usr/ucb
+has been merged into
+.Pn /usr/bin ,
+and the sources for programs in
+.Pn /usr/bin
+are in
+.Pn /usr/src/usr.bin .
+Other source directories parallel the destination directories;
+.Pn /usr/src/etc
+has been greatly expanded, and
+.Pn /usr/src/share
+is new.
+The source for the manual pages, in general, are with the source
+code for the applications they document.
+Manual pages not closely corresponding to an application program
+are found in
+.Pn /usr/src/share/man .
+The locations of all man pages is listed in
+.Pn /usr/src/share/man/man0/man[1-8] .
+The manual page
+.Xr hier (7)
+has been updated and made more detailed;
+it is included in the printed documentation.
+You should review it to familiarize yourself with the new layout.
+.PP
+A new utility,
+.Xr mtree (8),
+is provided to build and check filesystem hierarchies
+with the proper contents, owners and permissions.
+Scripts are provided in
+.Pn /etc/mtree
+(and
+.Pn /usr/src/etc/mtree )
+for the root,
+.Pn /usr
+and
+.Pn /var
+filesystems.
+Once a filesystem has been made for
+.Pn /var ,
+.Xr mtree
+can be used to create a directory hierarchy there
+or you can simply use tar to extract the prototype from
+the second file of the distribution tape.
+.Sh 3 "Changes in the \f(CW/etc\fP directory"
+.PP
+The
+.Pn /etc
+directory now contains nearly all the host-specific configuration
+files.
+Note that some file formats have changed,
+and those configuration files containing pathnames are nearly all affected
+by the reorganization.
+See the examples provided in
+.Pn /etc
+(installed from
+.Pn /usr/src/etc )
+as a guide.
+The following table lists some of the local configuration files
+whose locations and/or contents have changed.
+.TS
+l l l
+lfC lfC l.
+\*(Ps and Earlier	\*(4B	Comments
+_	_	_
+/etc/fstab	/etc/fstab	new format; see below
+/etc/inetd.conf	/etc/inetd.conf	pathnames of executables changed
+/etc/printcap	/etc/printcap	pathnames changed
+/etc/syslog.conf	/etc/syslog.conf	pathnames of log files changed
+/etc/ttys	/etc/ttys	pathnames of executables changed
+/etc/passwd	/etc/master.passwd	new format; see below
+/usr/lib/sendmail.cf	/etc/sendmail.cf	changed pathnames
+/usr/lib/aliases	/etc/aliases	may contain changed pathnames
+/etc/*.pid	/var/run/*.pid	
+	
+.T&
+l l l
+lfC lfC l.
+New in \*(Ps-Tahoe	\*(4B	Comments
+_	_	_
+/usr/games/dm.config	/etc/dm.conf	configuration for games (see \fIdm\fP\|(8))
+/etc/zoneinfo/localtime	/etc/localtime	timezone configuration
+/etc/zoneinfo	/usr/share/zoneinfo	timezone configuration
+.TE
+.ne 1.5i
+.TS
+l l l
+lfC lfC l.
+	New in \*(4B	Comments
+_	_	_
+	/etc/aliases.db	database version of the aliases file
+	/etc/amd-home	location database of home directories
+	/etc/amd-vol	location database of exported filesystems
+	/etc/changelist	\f(CW/etc/security\fP files to back up
+	/etc/csh.cshrc	system-wide csh(1) initialization file
+	/etc/csh.login	system-wide csh(1) login file
+	/etc/csh.logout	system-wide csh(1) logout file
+	/etc/disklabels	directory for saving disklabels
+	/etc/exports	NFS list of export permissions
+	/etc/ftpwelcome	message displayed for ftp users; see ftpd(8)
+	/etc/kerberosIV	Kerberos directory; see below
+	/etc/man.conf	lists directories searched by \fIman\fP\|(1)
+	/etc/mtree	directory for local mtree files; see mtree(8)
+	/etc/netgroup	NFS group list used in \f(CW/etc/exports\fP
+	/etc/pwd.db	non-secure hashed user data base file
+	/etc/spwd.db	secure hashed user data base file
+	/etc/security	daily system security checker
+.TE
+.PP
+System security changes require adding several new ``well-known'' groups to
+.Pn /etc/group .
+The groups that are needed by the system as distributed are:
+.TS
+l n l.
+name	number	purpose
+_
+wheel	0	users allowed superuser privilege
+daemon	1	processes that need less than wheel privilege
+kmem	2	read access to kernel memory
+sys	3	access to kernel sources
+tty	4	access to terminals
+operator	5	read access to raw disks
+bin	7	group for system binaries
+news	8	group for news
+wsrc	9	write access to sources
+games	13	access to games
+staff	20	system staff
+guest	31	system guests
+nobody	39	the least privileged group
+utmp	45	access to utmp files
+dialer	117	access to remote ports and dialers
+.TE
+Only users in the ``wheel'' group are permitted to
+.Xr su
+to ``root''.
+Most programs that manage directories in
+.Pn /var/spool
+now run set-group-id to ``daemon'' so that users cannot
+directly access the files in the spool directories.
+The special files that access kernel memory,
+.Pn /dev/kmem
+and
+.Pn /dev/mem ,
+are made readable only by group ``kmem''.
+Standard system programs that require this access are
+made set-group-id to that group.
+The group ``sys'' is intended to control access to kernel sources,
+and other sources belong to group ``wsrc.''
+Rather than make user terminals writable by all users,
+they are now placed in group ``tty'' and made only group writable.
+Programs that should legitimately have access to write on user terminals
+such as
+.Xr talkd
+and
+.Xr write
+now run set-group-id to ``tty''.
+The ``operator'' group controls access to disks.
+By default, disks are readable by group ``operator'',
+so that programs such as
+.Xr dump
+can access the filesystem information without being set-user-id to ``root''.
+The
+.Xr shutdown (8)
+program is executable only by group operator
+and is setuid to root so that members of group operator may shut down
+the system without root access.
+.PP
+The ownership and modes of some directories have changed.
+The
+.Xr at
+programs now run set-user-id ``root'' instead of ``daemon.''
+Also, the uucp directory no longer needs to be publicly writable,
+as
+.Xr tip
+reverts to privileged status to remove its lock files.
+After copying your version of
+.Pn /var/spool ,
+you should do:
+.DS
+\fB#\fP \fIchown \-R root /var/spool/at\fP
+\fB#\fP \fIchown \-R uucp.daemon /var/spool/uucp\fP
+\fB#\fP \fIchmod \-R o\-w /var/spool/uucp\fP
+.DE
+.PP
+The format of the cron table,
+.Pn /etc/crontab ,
+has been changed to specify the user-id that should be used to run a process.
+The userid ``nobody'' is frequently useful for non-privileged programs.
+Local changes are now put in a separate file,
+.Pn /etc/crontab.local .
+.PP
+Some of the commands previously in
+.Pn /etc/rc.local
+have been moved to
+.Pn /etc/rc ;
+several new functions are now handled by
+.Pn /etc/rc ,
+.Pn /etc/netstart
+and
+.Pn /etc/rc.local .
+You should look closely at the prototype version of these files
+and read the manual pages for the commands contained in it
+before trying to merge your local copy.
+Note in particular that
+.Xr ifconfig
+has had many changes,
+and that host names are now fully specified as domain-style names
+(e.g., vangogh.CS.Berkeley.EDU) for the benefit of the name server.
+.PP
+Some of the commands previously in
+.Pn /etc/daily
+have been moved to
+.Pn /etc/security ,
+and several new functions have been added to
+.Pn /etc/security
+to do nightly security checks on the system.
+The script
+.Pn /etc/daily
+runs
+.Pn /etc/security
+each night, and mails the output to the super-user.
+Some of the checks done by
+.Pn /etc/security
+are:
+.DS
+\(bu Syntax errors in the password and group files.
+\(bu Duplicate user and group names and id's.
+\(bu Dangerous search paths and umask values for the superuser.
+\(bu Dangerous values in various initialization files.
+\(bu Dangerous .rhosts files.
+\(bu Dangerous directory and file ownership or permissions.
+\(bu Globally exported filesystems.
+\(bu Dangerous owners or permissions for special devices.
+.DE
+In addition, it reports any changes to setuid and setgid files, special
+devices, or the files in
+.Pn /etc/changelist
+since the last run of
+.Pn /etc/security .
+Backup copies of the files are saved in
+.Pn /var/backups .
+Finally, the system binaries are checksummed and their permissions
+validated against the
+.Xr mtree (8)
+specifications in
+.Pn /etc/mtree .
+.PP
+The C-library and system binaries on the distribution tape
+are compiled with new versions of
+.Xr gethostbyname
+and
+.Xr gethostbyaddr
+that use the name server,
+.Xr named (8).
+If you have only a small network and are not connected
+to a large network, you can use the distributed library routines without
+any problems; they use a linear scan of the host table
+.Pn /etc/hosts
+if the name server is not running.
+If you are on the Internet or have a large local network,
+it is recommend that you set up
+and use the name server.
+For instructions on how to set up the necessary configuration files,
+refer to ``Name Server Operations Guide for BIND'' (SMM:10).
+Several programs rely on the host name returned by
+.Xr gethostname
+to determine the local domain name.
+.PP
+If you are using the name server, your
+.Xr sendmail
+configuration file will need some updates to accommodate it.
+See the ``Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide'' (SMM:8) and
+the sample
+.Xr sendmail
+configuration files in
+.Pn /usr/src/usr.sbin/sendmail/cf .
+The aliases file,
+.Pn /etc/aliases
+has also been changed to add certain well-known addresses.
+.Sh 3 "Shadow password files"
+.PP
+The password file format adds change and expiration fields
+and its location has changed to protect
+the encrypted passwords stored there.
+The actual password file is now stored in
+.Pn /etc/master.passwd .
+The hashed dbm password files do not contain encrypted passwords,
+but contain the file offset to the entry with the password in
+.Pn /etc/master.passwd
+(that is readable only by root).
+Thus, the
+.Fn getpwnam
+and
+.Fn getpwuid
+functions will no longer return an encrypted password string to non-root
+callers.
+An old-style passwd file is created in
+.Pn /etc/passwd
+by the
+.Xr vipw (8)
+and
+.Xr pwd_mkdb (8)
+programs.
+See also
+.Xr passwd (5).
+.PP
+Several new users have also been added to the group of ``well-known'' users in
+.Pn /etc/passwd .
+The current list is:
+.DS
+.TS
+l c.
+name	number
+_
+root	0
+daemon	1
+operator	2
+bin	3
+games	7
+uucp	66
+nobody	32767
+.TE
+.DE
+The ``daemon'' user is used for daemon processes that
+do not need root privileges.
+The ``operator'' user-id is used as an account for dumpers
+so that they can log in without having the root password.
+By placing them in the ``operator'' group, 
+they can get read access to the disks.
+The ``uucp'' login has existed long before \*(4B,
+and is noted here just to provide a common user-id.
+The password entry ``nobody'' has been added to specify
+the user with least privilege.  The ``games'' user is a pseudo-user
+that controls access to game programs.
+.PP
+After installing your updated password file, you must run
+.Xr pwd_mkdb (8)
+to create the password database.
+Note that
+.Xr pwd_mkdb (8)
+is run whenever
+.Xr vipw (8)
+is run.
+.Sh 3 "The \f(CW/var\fP filesystem"
+.PP
+The spooling directories saved on tape may be restored in their
+eventual resting places without too much concern.  Be sure to
+use the `\-p' option to
+.Xr tar (1)
+so that files are recreated with the same file modes.
+The following commands provide a guide for copying spool and log files from
+an existing system into a new
+.Pn /var
+filesystem.
+At least the following directories should already exist on
+.Pn /var :
+.Pn output ,
+.Pn log ,
+.Pn backups
+and
+.Pn db .
+.LP
+.DS
+.ft CW
+SRC=/oldroot/usr
+
+cd $SRC; tar cf - msgs preserve | (cd /var && tar xpf -)
+.DE
+.DS
+.ft CW
+# copy $SRC/spool to /var
+cd $SRC/spool
+tar cf - at mail rwho | (cd /var && tar xpf -)
+tar cf - ftp mqueue news secretmail uucp uucppublic | \e
+	(cd /var/spool && tar xpf -)
+.DE
+.DS
+.ft CW
+# everything else in spool is probably a printer area
+mkdir .save
+mv at ftp mail mqueue rwho secretmail uucp uucppublic .save
+tar cf - * | (cd /var/spool/output && tar xpf -)
+mv .save/* .
+rmdir .save
+.DE
+.DS
+.ft CW
+cd /var/spool/mqueue
+mv syslog.7 /var/log/maillog.7
+mv syslog.6 /var/log/maillog.6
+mv syslog.5 /var/log/maillog.5
+mv syslog.4 /var/log/maillog.4
+mv syslog.3 /var/log/maillog.3
+mv syslog.2 /var/log/maillog.2
+mv syslog.1 /var/log/maillog.1
+mv syslog.0 /var/log/maillog.0
+mv syslog /var/log/maillog
+.DE
+.DS
+.ft CW
+# move $SRC/adm to /var
+cd $SRC/adm
+tar cf - . | (cd /var/account && tar  xpf -)
+cd /var/account
+rm -f msgbuf
+mv messages messages.[0-9] ../log
+mv wtmp wtmp.[0-9] ../log
+mv lastlog ../log
+.DE
+.Sh 2 "Bug fixes and changes between \*(Ps and \*(4B"
+.PP
+The major new facilities available in the \*(4B release are
+a new virtual memory system,
+the addition of ISO/OSI networking support,
+a new virtual filesystem interface supporting filesystem stacking,
+a freely redistributable implementation of NFS,
+a log-structured filesystem,
+enhancement of the local filesystems to support
+files and filesystems that are up to 2^63 bytes in size,
+enhanced security and system management support,
+and the conversion to and addition of the IEEE Std1003.1 (``POSIX'')
+facilities and many of the IEEE Std1003.2 facilities.
+In addition, many new utilities and additions to the C
+library are present as well.
+The kernel sources have been reorganized to collect all machine-dependent
+files for each architecture under one directory,
+and most of the machine-independent code is now free of code
+conditional on specific machines.
+The user structure and process structure have been reorganized
+to eliminate the statically-mapped user structure and to make most
+of the process resources shareable by multiple processes.
+The system and include files have been converted to be compatible
+with ANSI C, including function prototypes for most of the exported
+functions.
+There are numerous other changes throughout the system.
+.Sh 3 "Changes to the kernel"
+.PP
+This release includes several important structural kernel changes.
+The kernel uses a new internal system call convention;
+the use of global (``u-dot'') variables for parameters and error returns
+has been eliminated,
+and interrupted system calls no longer abort using non-local goto's (longjmp's).
+A new sleep interface separates signal handling from scheduling priority,
+returning characteristic errors to abort or restart the current system call.
+This sleep call also passes a string describing the process state,
+that is used by the ps(1) program.
+The old sleep interface can be used only for non-interruptible sleeps.
+The sleep interface (\fItsleep\fP) can be used at any priority,
+but is only interruptible if the PCATCH flag is set.
+When interrupted, \fItsleep\fP returns EINTR or ERESTART.
+.PP
+Many data structures that were previously statically allocated
+are now allocated dynamically.
+These structures include mount entries, file entries,
+user open file descriptors, the process entries, the vnode table,
+the name cache, and the quota structures.
+.PP
+To protect against indiscriminate reading or writing of kernel
+memory, all writing and most reading of kernel data structures
+must be done using a new ``sysctl'' interface.
+The information to be accessed is described through an extensible
+``Management Information Base'' (MIB) style name,
+described as a dotted set of components.
+A new utility,
+.Xr sysctl (8),
+retrieves kernel state and allows processes with appropriate
+privilege to set kernel state.
+.Sh 3 "Security"
+.PP
+The kernel runs with four different levels of security.
+Any superuser process can raise the security level, but only 
+.Fn init (8)
+can lower it.
+Security levels are defined as follows:
+.IP \-1
+Permanently insecure mode \- always run system in level 0 mode.
+.IP "  0"
+Insecure mode \- immutable and append-only flags may be turned off.
+All devices may be read or written subject to their permissions.
+.IP "  1"
+Secure mode \- immutable and append-only flags may not be cleared;
+disks for mounted filesystems,
+.Pn /dev/mem ,
+and
+.Pn /dev/kmem
+are read-only.
+.IP "  2"
+Highly secure mode \- same as secure mode, plus disks are always
+read-only whether mounted or not.
+This level precludes tampering with filesystems by unmounting them,
+but also inhibits running
+.Xr newfs (8)
+while the system is multi-user.
+See
+.Xr chflags (1)
+and the \-\fBo\fP option to 
+.Xr ls (1)
+for information on setting and displaying the immutable and append-only
+flags.
+.PP
+Normally, the system runs in level 0 mode while single user
+and in level 1 mode while multiuser.
+If the level 2 mode is desired while running multiuser,
+it can be set in the startup script
+.Pn /etc/rc
+using
+.Xr sysctl (1).
+If it is desired to run the system in level 0 mode while multiuser,
+the administrator must build a kernel with the variable
+.Li securelevel
+in the kernel source file
+.Pn /sys/kern/kern_sysctl.c
+initialized to \-1.
+.Sh 4 "Virtual memory changes"
+.PP
+The new virtual memory implementation is derived from the Mach
+operating system developed at Carnegie-Mellon,
+and was ported to the BSD kernel at the University of Utah.
+It is based on the 2.0 release of Mach
+(with some bug fixes from the 2.5 and 3.0 releases)
+and retains many of its essential features such as
+the separation of the machine dependent and independent layers
+(the ``pmap'' interface),
+efficient memory utilization using copy-on-write
+and other lazy-evaluation techniques,
+and support for large, sparse address spaces.
+It does not include the ``external pager'' interface instead using
+a primitive internal pager interface.
+The Mach virtual memory system call interface has been replaced with the
+``mmap''-based interface described in the ``Berkeley Software
+Architecture Manual'' (see UNIX Programmer's Manual,
+Supplementary Documents, PSD:5).
+The interface is similar to the interfaces shipped
+by several commercial vendors such as Sun, USL, and Convex Computer Corp.
+The integration of the new virtual memory is functionally complete,
+but still has serious performance problems under heavy memory load.
+The internal kernel interfaces have not yet been completed
+and the memory pool and buffer cache have not been merged.
+Some additional caveats:
+.IP \(bu
+Since the code is based on the 2.0 release of Mach,
+bugs and misfeatures of the BSD version should not be considered
+short-comings of the current Mach virtual memory system.
+.IP \(bu
+Because of the disjoint virtual memory (page) and IO (buffer) caches,
+it is possible to see inconsistencies if using both the mmap and
+read/write interfaces on the same file simultaneously.
+.IP \(bu
+Swap space is allocated on-demand rather than up front and no
+allocation checks are performed so it is possible to over-commit
+memory and eventually deadlock.
+.IP \(bu
+The semantics of the
+.Xr vfork (2)
+system call are slightly different.
+The synchronization between parent and child is preserved,
+but the memory sharing aspect is not.
+In practice this has been enough for backward compatibility,
+but newer code should just use
+.Xr fork (2).
+.Sh 4 "Networking additions and changes"
+.PP
+The ISO/OSI Networking consists of a kernel implementation of
+transport class 4 (TP-4),
+connectionless networking protocol (CLNP),
+and 802.3-based link-level support (hardware-compatible with Ethernet\**).
+.FS
+Ethernet is a trademark of the Xerox Corporation.
+.FE
+We also include support for ISO Connection-Oriented Network Service,
+X.25, TP-0.
+The session and presentation layers are provided outside
+the kernel using the ISO Development Environment by Marshall Rose,
+that is available via anonymous FTP
+(but is not included on the distribution tape).
+Included in this development environment are file
+transfer and management (FTAM), virtual terminals (VT),
+a directory services implementation (X.500),
+and miscellaneous other utilities.
+.PP
+Kernel support for the ISO OSI protocols is enabled with the ISO option
+in the kernel configuration file.
+The
+.Xr iso (4)
+manual page describes the protocols and addressing;
+see also
+.Xr clnp (4),
+.Xr tp (4)
+and
+.Xr cltp (4).
+The OSI equivalent to ARP is ESIS (End System to Intermediate System Routing
+Protocol); running this protocol is mandatory, however one can manually add
+translations for machines that do not participate by use of the
+.Xr route (8)
+command.
+Additional information is provided in the manual page describing
+.Xr esis (4).
+.PP
+The command
+.Xr route (8)
+has a new syntax and several new capabilities:
+it can install routes with a specified destination and mask,
+and can change route characteristics such as hop count, packet size
+and window size.
+.PP
+Several important enhancements have been added to the TCP/IP
+protocols including TCP header prediction and
+serial line IP (SLIP) with header compression.
+The routing implementation has been completely rewritten
+to use a hierarchical routing tree with a mask per route
+to support the arbitrary levels of routing found in the ISO protocols.
+The routing table also stores and caches route characteristics
+to speed the adaptation of the throughput and congestion avoidance
+algorithms.
+.PP
+The format of the
+.I sockaddr
+structure (the structure used to describe a generic network address with an
+address family and family-specific data)
+has changed from previous releases,
+as have the address family-specific versions of this structure.
+The
+.I sa_family
+family field has been split into a length,
+.Pn sa_len ,
+and a family,
+.Pn sa_family .
+System calls that pass a
+.I sockaddr
+structure into the kernel (e.g.
+.Fn sendto
+and
+.Fn connect )
+have a separate parameter that specifies the 
+.I sockaddr
+length, and thus it is not necessary to fill in the
+.I sa_len
+field for those system calls.
+System calls that pass a
+.I sockaddr
+structure back from the kernel (e.g. 
+.Fn recvfrom
+and
+.Fn accept )
+receive a completely filled-in
+.I sockaddr
+structure, thus the length field is valid.
+Because this would not work for old binaries,
+the new library uses a different system call number.
+Thus, most networking programs compiled under \*(4B are incompatible
+with older systems.
+.PP
+Although this change is mostly source and binary compatible
+with old programs, there are three exceptions.
+Programs with statically initialized
+.I sockaddr
+structures
+(usually the Internet form, a
+.I sockaddr_in )
+are not compatible.
+Generally, such programs should be changed to fill in the structure
+at run time, as C allows no way to initialize a structure without
+assuming the order and number of fields.
+Also, programs with use structures to describe a network packet format
+that contain embedded
+.I sockaddr
+structures also require change; a definition of an
+.I osockaddr
+structure is provided for this purpose.
+Finally, programs that use the
+.Sm SIOCGIFCONF
+ioctl to get a complete list of interface addresses
+need to check the
+.I sa_len
+field when iterating through the array of addresses returned,
+as not all the structures returned have the same length
+(this variance in length is nearly guaranteed by the presence of link-layer
+address structures).
+.Sh 4 "Additions and changes to filesystems"
+.PP
+The \*(4B distribution contains most of the interfaces
+specified in the IEEE Std1003.1 system interface standard.
+Filesystem additions include IEEE Std1003.1 FIFOs,
+byte-range file locking, and saved user and group identifiers.
+.PP
+A new virtual filesystem interface has been added to the
+kernel to support multiple filesystems.
+In comparison with other interfaces,
+the Berkeley interface has been structured for more efficient support
+of filesystems that maintain state (such as the local filesystem).
+The interface has been extended with support for stackable
+filesystems done at UCLA.
+These extensions allow for filesystems to be layered on top of each
+other and allow new vnode operations to be added without requiring
+changes to existing filesystem implementations.
+For example,
+the umap filesystem (see
+.Xr mount_umap (8))
+is used to mount a sub-tree of an existing filesystem
+that uses a different set of uids and gids than the local system.
+Such a filesystem could be mounted from a remote site via NFS or it
+could be a filesystem on removable media brought from some foreign
+location that uses a different password file.
+.PP
+Other new filesystems that may be stacked include the loopback filesystem
+.Xr mount_lofs (8),
+the kernel filesystem
+.Xr mount_kernfs (8),
+and the portal filesystem
+.Xr mount_portal (8).
+.PP
+The buffer cache in the kernel is now organized as a file block cache
+rather than a device block cache.
+As a consequence, cached blocks from a file
+and from the corresponding block device would no longer be kept consistent.
+The block device thus has little remaining value.
+Three changes have been made for these reasons:
+.IP 1)
+block devices may not be opened while they are mounted,
+and may not be mounted while open, so that the two versions of cached
+file blocks cannot be created,
+.IP 2)
+filesystem checks of the root now use the raw device
+to access the root filesystem, and
+.IP 3)
+the root filesystem is initially mounted read-only
+so that nothing can be written back to disk during or after change to
+the raw filesystem by
+.Xr fsck .
+.LP
+The root filesystem may be made writable while in single-user mode
+with the command:
+.DS
+.ft CW
+mount \-uw /
+.DE
+The mount command has an option to update the flags on a mounted filesystem,
+including the ability to upgrade a filesystem from read-only to read-write
+or downgrade it from read-write to read-only.
+.PP
+In addition to the local ``fast filesystem'',
+we have added an implementation of the network filesystem (NFS)
+that fully interoperates with the NFS shipped by Sun and its licensees.
+Because our NFS implementation was implemented
+by Rick Macklem of the University of Guelph
+using only the publicly available NFS specification,
+it does not require a license from Sun to use in source or binary form.
+By default it runs over UDP to be compatible with Sun's implementation.
+However, it can be configured on a per-mount basis to run over TCP.
+Using TCP allows it to be used quickly and efficiently through
+gateways and over long-haul networks.
+Using an extended protocol, it supports Leases to allow a limited
+callback mechanism that greatly reduces the network traffic necessary
+to maintain cache consistency between the server and its clients.
+Its use will be familiar to users of other implementations of NFS.
+See the manual pages
+.Xr mount (8),
+.Xr mountd (8),
+.Xr fstab (5),
+.Xr exports (5),
+.Xr netgroup (5),
+.Xr nfsd (8),
+.Xr nfsiod (8),
+and
+.Xr nfssvc (8).
+and the document ``The 4.4BSD NFS Implementation'' (SMM:6)
+for further information.
+The format of
+.Pn /etc/fstab
+has changed from previous \*(Bs releases
+to a blank-separated format to allow colons in pathnames.
+.PP
+A new local filesystem, the log-structured filesystem (LFS),
+has been added to the system.
+It provides near disk-speed output and fast crash recovery.
+This work is based, in part, on the LFS filesystem created
+for the Sprite operating system at Berkeley.
+While the kernel implementation is almost complete,
+only some of the utilities to support the
+filesystem have been written,
+so we do not recommend it for production use.
+See
+.Xr newlfs (8),
+.Xr mount_lfs (8)
+and
+.Xr lfs_cleanerd (8)
+for more information.
+For a in-depth description of the implementation and performance
+characteristics of log-structured filesystems in general,
+and this one in particular, see Dr. Margo Seltzer's doctoral thesis,
+available from the University of California Computer Science Department.
+.PP
+We have also added a memory-based filesystem that runs in
+pageable memory, allowing large temporary filesystems without
+requiring dedicated physical memory.
+.PP
+The local ``fast filesystem'' has been enhanced to do 
+clustering that allows large pieces of files to be
+allocated contiguously resulting in near doubling
+of filesystem throughput.
+The filesystem interface has been extended to allow
+files and filesystems to grow to 2^63 bytes in size.
+The quota system has been rewritten to support both
+user and group quotas (simultaneously if desired).
+Quota expiration is based on time rather than
+the previous metric of number of logins over quota.
+This change makes quotas more useful on fileservers
+onto which users seldom login.
+.PP
+The system security has been greatly enhanced by the
+addition of additional file flags that permit a file to be
+marked as immutable or append only.
+Once set, these flags can only be cleared by the super-user
+when the system is running in insecure mode (normally, single-user).
+In addition to the immutable and append-only flags,
+the filesystem supports a new user-settable flag ``nodump''.
+(File flags are set using the
+.Xr chflags (1)
+utility.)
+When set on a file,
+.Xr dump (8)
+will omit the file from incremental backups
+but retain them on full backups.
+See the ``-h'' flag to 
+.Xr dump (8)
+for details on how to change this default.
+The ``nodump'' flag is usually set on core dumps,
+system crash dumps, and object files generated by the compiler.
+Note that the flag is not preserved when files are copied
+so that installing an object file will cause it to be preserved.
+.PP
+The filesystem format used in \*(4B has several additions.
+Directory entries have an additional field,
+.Pn d_type ,
+that identifies the type of the entry
+(normally found in the
+.Pn st_mode
+field of the
+.Pn stat
+structure).
+This field is particularly useful for identifying
+directories without the need to use
+.Xr stat (2).
+.PP
+Short (less than sixty byte) symbolic links are now stored
+in the inode itself rather than in a separate data block.
+This saves disk space and makes access of symbolic links faster.
+Short symbolic links are not given a special type,
+so a user-level application is unaware of their special treatment.
+Unlike pre-\*(4B systems, symbolic links do
+not have an owner, group, access mode, times, etc.
+Instead, these attributes are taken from the directory that contains the link.
+The only attributes returned from an
+.Xr lstat (2)
+that refer to the symbolic link itself are the file type (S_IFLNK),
+size, blocks, and link count (always 1).
+.PP
+An implementation of an auto-mounter daemon,
+.Xr amd ,
+was contributed by Jan-Simon Pendry of the
+Imperial College of Science, Technology & Medicine.
+See the document ``AMD \- The 4.4BSD Automounter'' (SMM:13)
+for further information.
+.PP
+The directory
+.Pn /dev/fd
+contains special files
+.Pn 0
+through
+.Pn 63
+that, when opened, duplicate the corresponding file descriptor.
+The names
+.Pn /dev/stdin ,
+.Pn /dev/stdout
+and
+.Pn /dev/stderr
+refer to file descriptors 0, 1 and 2.
+See
+.Xr fd (4)
+and
+.Xr mount_fdesc (8)
+for more information.
+.Sh 4 "POSIX terminal driver changes"
+.PP
+The \*(4B system uses the IEEE P1003.1 (POSIX.1) terminal interface
+rather than the previous \*(Bs terminal interface.
+The terminal driver is similar to the System V terminal driver
+with the addition of the necessary extensions to get the
+functionality previously available in the \*(Ps terminal driver.
+Both the old
+.Xr ioctl
+calls and old options to
+.Xr stty (1)
+are emulated.
+This emulation is expected to be unavailable in many vendors releases,
+so conversion to the new interface is encouraged.
+.PP
+\*(4B also adds the IEEE Std1003.1 job control interface,
+that is similar to the \*(Ps job control interface,
+but adds a security model that was missing in the
+\*(Ps job control implementation.
+A new system call,
+.Fn setsid ,
+creates a job-control session consisting of a single process
+group with one member, the caller, that becomes a session leader.
+Only a session leader may acquire a controlling terminal.
+This is done explicitly via a
+.Sm TIOCSCTTY
+.Fn ioctl
+call, not implicitly by an
+.Fn open
+call.
+The call fails if the terminal is in use.
+Programs that allocate controlling terminals (or pseudo-terminals)
+require change to work in this environment.
+The versions of
+.Xr xterm
+provided in the X11R5 release includes the necessary changes.
+New library routines are available for allocating and initializing
+pseudo-terminals and other terminals as controlling terminal; see
+.Pn /usr/src/lib/libutil/pty.c
+and
+.Pn /usr/src/lib/libutil/login_tty.c .
+.PP
+The POSIX job control model formalizes the previous conventions
+used in setting up a process group.
+Unfortunately, this requires that changes be made in a defined order
+and with some synchronization that were not necessary in the past.
+Older job control shells (csh, ksh) will generally not operate correctly
+with the new system.
+.PP
+Most of the other kernel interfaces have been changed to correspond
+with the POSIX.1 interface, although that work is not complete.
+See the relevant manual pages and the IEEE POSIX standard.
+.Sh 4 "Native operating system compatibility"
+.PP
+Both the HP300 and SPARC ports feature the ability to run binaries
+built for the native operating system (HP-UX or SunOS) by emulating
+their system calls.
+Building an HP300 kernel with the HPUXCOMPAT and COMPAT_OHPUX options
+or a SPARC kernel with the COMPAT_SUNOS option will enable this feature
+(on by default in the generic kernel provided in the root filesystem image).
+Though this native operating system compatibility was provided by the
+developers as needed for their purposes and is by no means complete,
+it is complete enough to run several non-trivial applications including
+those that require HP-UX or SunOS shared libraries.
+For example, the vendor supplied X11 server and windowing environment
+can be used on both the HP300 and SPARC.
+.PP
+It is important to remember that merely copying over a native binary
+and executing it (or executing it directly across NFS) does not imply
+that it will run.
+All but the most trivial of applications are likely to require access
+to auxiliary files that do not exist under \*(4B (e.g.
+.Pn /etc/ld.so.cache )
+or have a slightly different format (e.g.
+.Pn /etc/passwd ).
+However, by using system call tracing and
+through creative use of symlinks,
+many problems can be tracked down and corrected.
+.PP
+The DECstation port also has code for ULTRIX emulation
+(kernel option ULTRIXCOMPAT, not compiled into the generic kernel)
+but it was used primarily for initially bootstrapping the port and
+has not been used since.
+Hence, some work may be required to make it generally useful.
+.Sh 3 "Changes to the utilities"
+.PP
+We have been tracking the IEEE Std1003.2 shell and utility work
+and have included prototypes of many of the proposed utilities
+based on draft 12 of the POSIX.2 Shell and Utilities document.
+Because most of the traditional utilities have been replaced
+with implementations conformant to the POSIX standards,
+you should realize that the utility software may not be as stable,
+reliable or well documented as in traditional Berkeley releases.
+In particular, almost the entire manual suite has been rewritten to
+reflect the POSIX defined interfaces, and in some instances
+it does not correctly reflect the current state of the software.
+It is also worth noting that, in rewriting this software, we have generally
+been rewarded with significant performance improvements.
+Most of the libraries and header files have been converted
+to be compliant with ANSI C.
+The shipped compiler (gcc) is a superset of ANSI C,
+but supports traditional C as a command-line option.
+The system libraries and utilities all compile
+with either ANSI or traditional C.
+.Sh 4 "Make and Makefiles"
+.PP
+This release uses a completely new version of the
+.Xr make
+program derived from the
+.Xr pmake
+program developed by the Sprite project at Berkeley.
+It supports existing makefiles, although certain incorrect makefiles
+may fail.
+The makefiles for the \*(4B sources make extensive use of the new
+facilities, especially conditionals and file inclusion, and are thus
+completely incompatible with older versions of
+.Xr make
+(but nearly all the makefiles are now trivial!).
+The standard include files for
+.Xr make
+are in
+.Pn /usr/share/mk .
+There is a
+.Pn bsd.README
+file in
+.Pn /usr/src/share/mk .
+.PP
+Another global change supported by the new
+.Xr make
+is designed to allow multiple architectures to share a copy of the sources.
+If a subdirectory named
+.Pn obj
+is present in the current directory,
+.Xr make
+descends into that directory and creates all object and other files there.
+We use this by building a directory hierarchy in
+.Pn /var/obj
+that parallels
+.Pn /usr/src .
+We then create the
+.Pn obj
+subdirectories in
+.Pn /usr/src
+as symbolic links to the corresponding directories in
+.Pn /var/obj .
+(This step is automated.
+The command ``make obj'' in
+.Pn /usr/src
+builds both the local symlink and the shadow directory,
+using
+.Pn /usr/obj ,
+that may be a symbolic link, as the root of the shadow tree.
+The use of
+.Pn /usr/obj
+is for historic reasons only, and the system make configuration files in
+.Pn /usr/share/mk
+can trivially be modified to use
+.Pn /var/obj
+instead.)
+We have one
+.Pn /var/obj
+hierarchy on the local system, and another on each
+system that shares the source filesystem.
+All the sources in
+.Pn /usr/src
+except for
+.Pn /usr/src/contrib
+and portions of
+.Pn /usr/src/old
+have been converted to use the new make and
+.Pn obj
+subdirectories;
+this change allows compilation for multiple
+architectures from the same source tree
+(that may be mounted read-only).
+.Sh 4 "Kerberos"
+.PP
+The Kerberos authentication server from MIT (version 4)
+is included in this release.
+See
+.Xr kerberos (1)
+for a general, if MIT-specific, introduction.
+If it is configured,
+.Xr login (1),
+.Xr passwd (1),
+.Xr rlogin (1)
+and
+.Xr rsh (1)
+will all begin to use it automatically.
+The file
+.Pn /etc/kerberosIV/README
+describes the configuration.
+Each system needs the file
+.Pn /etc/kerberosIV/krb.conf
+to set its realm and local servers,
+and a private key stored in
+.Pn /etc/kerberosIV/srvtab
+(see
+.Xr ext_srvtab (8)).
+The Kerberos server should be set up on a single, physically secure,
+server machine.
+Users and hosts may be added to the server database manually with
+.Xr kdb_edit (8),
+or users on authorized hosts can add themselves and a Kerberos
+password after verification of their ``local'' (passwd-file) password
+using the
+.Xr register (1)
+program.
+.PP
+Note that by default the password-changing program
+.Xr passwd (1)
+changes the Kerberos password, that must exist.
+The
+.Li \-l
+option to
+.Xr passwd (1)
+changes the ``local'' password if one exists.
+.PP
+Note that Version 5 of Kerberos will be released soon;
+Version 4 should probably be replaced at that time.
+.Sh 4 "Timezone support"
+.PP
+The timezone conversion code in the C library uses data files installed in
+.Pn /usr/share/zoneinfo
+to convert from ``GMT'' to various timezones.  The data file for the default
+timezone for the system should be copied to
+.Pn /etc/localtime .
+Other timezones can be selected by setting the TZ environment variable.
+.PP
+The data files initially installed in
+.Pn /usr/share/zoneinfo
+include corrections for leap seconds since the beginning of 1970.
+Thus, they assume that the
+kernel will increment the time at a constant rate during a leap second;
+that is, time just keeps on ticking.  The conversion routines will then
+name a leap second 23:59:60.  For purists, this effectively means that
+the kernel maintains TAI (International Atomic Time) rather than UTC
+(Coordinated Universal Time, aka GMT).
+.PP
+For systems that run current NTP (Network Time Protocol) implementations
+or that wish to conform to the letter of the POSIX.1 law, it is possible
+to rebuild the timezone data files so that leap seconds are not counted.
+(NTP causes the time to jump over a leap second, and POSIX effectively
+requires the clock to be reset by hand when a leap second occurs.
+In this mode, the kernel effectively runs UTC rather than TAI.)
+.PP
+The data files without leap second information
+are constructed from the source directory,
+.Pn /usr/src/share/zoneinfo .
+Change the variable REDO in Makefile
+from ``right'' to ``posix'', and then do
+.DS
+make obj	(if necessary)
+make
+make install
+.DE
+.PP
+You will then need to copy the correct default zone file to
+.Pn /etc/localtime ,
+as the old one would still have used leap seconds, and because the Makefile
+installs a default
+.Pn /etc/localtime
+each time ``make install'' is done.
+.PP
+It is possible to install both sets of timezone data files.  This results
+in subdirectories
+.Pn /usr/share/zoneinfo/right
+and
+.Pn /usr/share/zoneinfo/posix .
+Each contain a complete set of zone files.
+See
+.Pn /usr/src/share/zoneinfo/Makefile
+for details.
+.Sh 4 "Additions and changes to the libraries"
+.PP
+Notable additions to the libraries include functions to traverse a
+filesystem hierarchy, database interfaces to btree and hashing functions,
+a new, faster implementation of stdio and a radix and merge sort
+functions.
+.PP
+The
+.Xr fts (3)
+functions will do either physical or logical traversal of
+a file hierarchy as well as handle essentially infinite depth
+filesystems and filesystems with cycles.
+All the utilities in \*(4B which traverse file hierarchies
+have been converted to use
+.Xr fts (3).
+The conversion has always resulted in a significant performance
+gain, often of four or five to one in system time.
+.PP
+The
+.Xr dbopen (3)
+functions are intended to be a family of database access methods.
+Currently, they consist of
+.Xr hash (3),
+an extensible, dynamic hashing scheme,
+.Xr btree (3),
+a sorted, balanced tree structure (B+tree's), and
+.Xr recno (3),
+a flat-file interface for fixed or variable length records
+referenced by logical record number.
+Each of the access methods stores associated key/data pairs and
+uses the same record oriented interface for access.
+.PP
+The
+.Xr qsort (3)
+function has been rewritten for additional performance.
+In addition, three new types of sorting functions,
+.Xr heapsort (3),
+.Xr mergesort (3)
+and
+.Xr radixsort (3)
+have been added to the system.
+The
+.Xr mergesort
+function is optimized for data with pre-existing order,
+in which case it usually significantly outperforms
+.Xr qsort .
+The
+.Xr radixsort (3)
+functions are variants of most-significant-byte radix sorting.
+They take time linear to the number of bytes to be
+sorted, usually significantly outperforming
+.Xr qsort
+on data that can be sorted in this fashion.
+An implementation of the POSIX 1003.2 standard
+.Xr sort (1),
+based on
+.Xr radixsort ,
+is included in
+.Pn /usr/src/contrib/sort .
+.PP
+Some additional comments about the \*(4B C library:
+.IP \(bu
+The floating point support in the C library has been replaced
+and is now accurate.
+.IP \(bu
+The C functions specified by both ANSI C, POSIX 1003.1 and
+1003.2 are now part of the C library.
+This includes support for file name matching, shell globbing
+and both basic and extended regular expressions.
+.IP \(bu
+ANSI C multibyte and wide character support has been integrated.
+The rune functionality from the Bell Labs' Plan 9 system is provided
+as well.
+.IP \(bu
+The
+.Xr termcap (3)
+functions have been generalized and replaced with a general
+purpose interface named
+.Xr getcap (3).
+.IP \(bu
+The
+.Xr stdio (3)
+routines have been replaced, and are usually much faster.
+In addition, the
+.Xr funopen (3)
+interface permits applications to provide their own I/O stream
+function support.
+.PP
+The
+.Xr curses (3)
+library has been largely rewritten.
+Important additional features include support for scrolling and
+.Xr termios (3).
+.PP
+An application front-end editing library, named libedit, has been
+added to the system.
+.PP
+A superset implementation of the SunOS kernel memory interface library,
+libkvm, has been integrated into the system.
+.PP
+.Sh 4 "Additions and changes to other utilities"
+.PP
+There are many new utilities, offering many new capabilities,
+in \*(4B.
+Skimming through the section 1 and section 8 manual pages is sure
+to be useful.
+The additions to the utility suite include greatly enhanced versions of
+programs that display system status information, implementations of
+various traditional tools described in the IEEE Std1003.2 standard,
+new tools not previous available on Berkeley UNIX systems,
+and many others.
+Also, with only a very few exceptions, all the utilities from
+\*(Ps that included proprietary source code have been replaced,
+and their \*(4B counterparts are freely redistributable.
+Normally, this replacement resulted in significant performance
+improvements and the increase of the limits imposed on data by
+the utility as well.
+.PP
+A summary of specific additions and changes are as follows:
+.TS
+lfC l.
+amd	An auto-mounter implementation.
+ar	Replacement of the historic archive format with a new one.
+awk	Replaced by gawk; see /usr/src/old/awk for the historic version.
+bdes	Utility implementing DES modes of operation described in FIPS PUB 81.
+calendar	Addition of an interface for system calendars.
+cap_mkdb	Utility for building hashed versions of termcap style databases.
+cc	Replacement of pcc with gcc suite.
+chflags	A utility for setting the per-file user and system flags.
+chfn	An editor based replacement for changing user information.
+chpass	An editor based replacement for changing user information.
+chsh	An editor based replacement for changing user information.
+cksum	The POSIX 1003.2 checksum utility; compatible with sum.
+column	A columnar text formatting utility.
+cp	POSIX 1003.2 compatible, able to copy special files.
+csh	Freely redistributable and 8-bit clean.
+date	User specified formats added.
+dd	New EBCDIC conversion tables, major performance improvements.
+dev_mkdb	Hashed interface to devices.
+dm	Dungeon master.
+find	Several new options and primaries, major performance improvements.
+fstat	Utility displaying information on files open on the system.
+ftpd	Connection logging added.
+hexdump	A binary dump utility, superseding od.
+id	The POSIX 1003.2 user identification utility.
+inetd	Tcpmux added.
+jot	A text formatting utility.
+kdump	A system-call tracing facility.
+ktrace	A system-call tracing facility.
+kvm_mkdb	Hashed interface to the kernel name list.
+lam	A text formatting utility.
+lex	A new, freely redistributable, significantly faster version.
+locate	A database of the system files, by name, constructed weekly.
+logname	The POSIX 1003.2 user identification utility.
+mail.local	New local mail delivery agent, replacing mail.
+make	Replaced with a new, more powerful make, supporting include files.
+man	Added support for man page location configuration.
+mkdep	A new utility for generating make dependency lists.
+mkfifo	The POSIX 1003.2 FIFO creation utility.
+mtree	A new utility for mapping file hierarchies to a file.
+nfsstat	An NFS statistics utility.
+nvi	A freely redistributable replacement for the ex/vi editors.
+pax	The POSIX 1003.2 replacement for cpio and tar.
+printf	The POSIX 1003.2 replacement for echo.
+roff	Replaced by groff; see /usr/src/old/roff for the historic versions.
+rs	New utility for text formatting.
+shar	An archive building utility.
+sysctl	MIB-style interface to system state.
+tcopy	Fast tape-to-tape copying and verification.
+touch	Time and file reference specifications.
+tput	The POSIX 1003.2 terminal display utility.
+tr	Addition of character classes.
+uname	The POSIX 1003.2 system identification utility.
+vis	A filter for converting and displaying non-printable characters.
+xargs	The POSIX 1003.2 argument list constructor utility.
+yacc	A new, freely redistributable, significantly faster version.
+.TE
+.PP
+The new versions of
+.Xr lex (1)
+(``flex'') and 
+.Xr yacc (1)
+(``zoo'') should be installed early on if attempting to
+cross-compile \*(4B on another system.
+Note that the new
+.Xr lex
+program is not completely backward compatible with historic versions of
+.Xr lex ,
+although it is believed that all documented features are supported.
+.PP
+The
+.Xr find
+utility has two new options that are important to be aware of if you
+intend to use NFS.
+The ``fstype'' and ``prune'' options can be used together to prevent
+find from crossing NFS mount points.
+See
+.Pn /etc/daily
+for an example of their use.
+.Sh 2 "Hints on converting from \*(Ps to \*(4B"
+.PP
+This section summarizes changes between
+\*(Ps and \*(4B that are likely to 
+cause difficulty in doing the conversion.
+It does not include changes in the network;
+see section 5 for information on setting up the network.
+.PP
+Since the stat st_size field is now 64-bits instead of 32,
+doing something like:
+.DS
+.ft CW
+foo(st.st_size);
+.DE
+and then (improperly) defining foo with an ``int'' or ``long'' parameter:
+.DS
+.ft CW
+foo(size)
+	int size;
+{
+	...
+}
+.DE
+will fail miserably (well, it might work on a little endian machine).
+This problem showed up in
+.Xr emacs (1)
+as well as several other programs.
+A related problem is improperly casting (or failing to cast)
+the second argument to
+.Xr lseek (2),
+.Xr truncate (2),
+or
+.Xr ftruncate (2)
+ala:
+.DS
+.ft CW
+lseek(fd, (long)off, 0);
+.DE
+or
+.DS
+.ft CW
+lseek(fd, 0, 0);
+.DE
+The best solution is to include
+.Pn <unistd.h>
+which has prototypes that catch these types of errors.
+.PP
+Determining the ``namelen'' parameter for a
+.Xr connect (2)
+call on a unix domain socket should use the ``SUN_LEN'' macro from
+.Pn <sys/un.h> .
+One old way that was used:
+.DS
+.ft CW
+addrlen = strlen(unaddr.sun_path) + sizeof(unaddr.sun_family);
+.DE
+no longer works as there is an additional
+.Pn sun_len
+field.
+.PP
+The kernel's limit on the number of open files has been
+increased from 20 to 64.
+It is now possible to change this limit almost arbitrarily.
+The standard I/O library
+autoconfigures to the kernel limit.
+Note that file (``_iob'') entries may be allocated by
+.Xr malloc
+from
+.Xr fopen ;
+this allocation has been known to cause problems with programs
+that use their own memory allocators.
+Memory allocation does not occur until after 20 files have been opened
+by the standard I/O library.
+.PP
+.Xr Select
+can be used with more than 32 descriptors
+by using arrays of \fBint\fPs for the bit fields rather than single \fBint\fPs.
+Programs that used
+.Xr getdtablesize
+as their first argument to
+.Xr select
+will no longer work correctly.
+Usually the program can be modified to correctly specify the number
+of bits in an \fBint\fP.
+Alternatively the program can be modified to use an array of \fBint\fPs.
+There are a set of macros available in
+.Pn <sys/types.h>
+to simplify this.
+See
+.Xr select (2).
+.PP
+Old core files will not be intelligible by the current debuggers
+because of numerous changes to the user structure
+and because the kernel stack has been enlarged.
+The
+.Xr a.out
+header that was in the user structure is no longer present.
+Locally-written debuggers that try to check the magic number
+will need to be changed.
+.PP
+Files may not be deleted from directories having the ``sticky'' (ISVTX) bit
+set in their modes
+except by the owner of the file or of the directory, or by the superuser.
+This is primarily to protect users' files in publicly-writable directories
+such as
+.Pn /tmp
+and
+.Pn /var/tmp .
+All publicly-writable directories should have their ``sticky'' bits set
+with ``chmod +t.''
+.PP
+The following two sections contain additional notes about
+changes in \*(4B that affect the installation of local files;
+be sure to read them as well.
diff --git a/share/doc/smm/01.setup/4.t b/share/doc/smm/01.setup/4.t
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fee3fc2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/share/doc/smm/01.setup/4.t
@@ -0,0 +1,713 @@
+.\" Copyright (c) 1980, 1986, 1988 The Regents of the University of California.
+.\" All rights reserved.
+.\"
+.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+.\" are met:
+.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+.\"    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+.\" 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
+.\"    must display the following acknowledgement:
+.\"	This product includes software developed by the University of
+.\"	California, Berkeley and its contributors.
+.\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
+.\"    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+.\"    without specific prior written permission.
+.\"
+.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+.\" ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
+.\"
+.\"	@(#)4.t	8.1 (Berkeley) 7/29/93
+.\"
+.ds LH "Installing/Operating \*(4B
+.ds CF \*(Dy
+.ds RH "System setup
+.Sh 1 "System setup"
+.PP
+This section describes procedures used to set up a \*(4B UNIX system.
+These procedures are used when a system is first installed
+or when the system configuration changes.  Procedures for normal
+system operation are described in the next section.
+.Sh 2 "Kernel configuration"
+.PP
+This section briefly describes the layout of the kernel code and
+how files for devices are made.
+For a full discussion of configuring
+and building system images, consult the document ``Building
+4.3BSD UNIX Systems with Config'' (SMM:2).
+.Sh 3 "Kernel organization"
+.PP
+As distributed, the kernel source is in a
+separate tar image.  The source may be physically
+located anywhere within any filesystem so long as
+a symbolic link to the location is created for the file
+.Pn /sys
+(many files in
+.Pn /usr/include
+are normally symbolic links relative to
+.Pn /sys ).
+In further discussions of the system source all path names
+will be given relative to
+.Pn /sys .
+.LP
+The kernel is made up of several large generic parts:
+.TS
+l l l.
+sys		main kernel header files
+kern		kernel functions broken down as follows
+	init	system startup, syscall dispatching, entry points
+	kern	scheduling, descriptor handling and generic I/O
+	sys	process management, signals
+	tty	terminal handling and job control
+	vfs	filesystem management
+	uipc	interprocess communication (sockets)
+	subr	miscellaneous support routines
+vm		virtual memory management
+ufs		local filesystems broken down as follows
+	ufs	common local filesystem routines
+	ffs	fast filesystem
+	lfs	log-based filesystem
+	mfs	memory based filesystem
+nfs		Sun-compatible network filesystem
+miscfs		miscellaneous filesystems broken down as follows
+	deadfs	where rejected vnodes go to die
+	fdesc	access to per-process file descriptors
+	fifofs	IEEE Std1003.1 FIFOs
+	kernfs	filesystem access to kernel data structures
+	lofs	loopback filesystem
+	nullfs	another loopback filesystem
+	portal	associate processes with filesystem locations
+	specfs	device special files
+	umapfs	provide alternate uid/gid mappings
+dev		generic device drivers (SCSI, vnode, concatenated disk)
+.TE
+.LP
+The networking code is organized by protocol
+.TS
+l l.
+net	routing and generic interface drivers
+netinet	Internet protocols (TCP, UDP, IP, etc)
+netiso	ISO protocols (TP-4, CLNP, CLTP, etc)
+netns	Xerox network systems protocols (IDP, SPP, etc)
+netx25	CCITT X.25 protocols (X.25 Packet Level, HDLC/LAPB)
+.TE
+.LP
+A separate subdirectory is provided for each machine architecture
+.TS
+l l.
+hp300	HP 9000/300 series of Motorola 68000-based machines
+hp	code common to both HP 68k and (non-existent) PA-RISC ports
+i386	Intel 386/486-based PC machines
+luna68k	Omron 68000-based workstations
+news3400	Sony News MIPS-based workstations
+pmax	Digital 3100/5000 MIPS-based workstations
+sparc	Sun Microsystems SPARCstation 1, 1+, and 2
+tahoe	(deprecated) CCI Power 6-series machines
+vax	(deprecated) Digital VAX machines
+.TE
+.LP
+Each machine directory is subdivided by function;
+for example the hp300 directory contains
+.TS
+l l.
+include	exported machine-dependent header files
+hp300	machine-dependent support code and private header files
+dev	device drivers
+conf	configuration files
+stand	machine-dependent standalone code
+.TE
+.LP
+Other kernel related directories
+.TS
+l l.
+compile	area to compile kernels
+conf	machine-independent configuration files
+stand	machine-independent standalone code
+.TE
+.Sh 3 "Devices and device drivers"
+.PP
+Devices supported by UNIX are implemented in the kernel
+by drivers whose source is kept in
+.Pn /sys/<architecture>/dev .
+These drivers are loaded
+into the system when included in a cpu specific configuration file
+kept in the conf directory.  Devices are accessed through special
+files in the filesystem, made by the
+.Xr mknod (8)
+program and normally kept in the
+.Pn /dev
+directory.
+For all the devices supported by the distribution system, the
+files in
+.Pn /dev
+are created by the
+.Pn /dev/MAKEDEV
+shell script.
+.PP
+Determine the set of devices that you have and create a new
+.Pn /dev
+directory by running the MAKEDEV script.
+First create a new directory
+.Pn /newdev ,
+copy MAKEDEV into it, edit the file MAKEDEV.local
+to provide an entry for local needs,
+and run it to generate a
+.Pn /newdev directory.
+For instance,
+.DS
+\fB#\fP \fIcd /\fP
+\fB#\fP \fImkdir newdev\fP
+\fB#\fP \fIcp dev/MAKEDEV newdev/MAKEDEV\fP
+\fB#\fP \fIcd newdev\fP
+\fB#\fP \fIMAKEDEV \*(Dk0 pt0 std LOCAL\fP
+.DE
+Note the ``std'' argument causes standard devices such as
+.Pn /dev/console ,
+the machine console, to be created.
+.PP
+You can then do
+.DS
+\fB#\fP \fIcd /\fP
+\fB#\fP \fImv dev olddev ; mv newdev dev\fP
+\fB#\fP \fIsync\fP
+.DE
+to install the new device directory.
+.Sh 3 "Building new system images"
+.PP
+The kernel configuration of each UNIX system is described by
+a single configuration file, stored in the
+.Pn /sys/<architecture>/conf
+directory.
+To learn about the format of this file and the procedure used
+to build system images,
+start by reading ``Building 4.3BSD UNIX Systems with Config'' (SMM:2),
+look at the manual pages in section 4
+of the UNIX manual for the devices you have,
+and look at the sample configuration files in the
+.Pn /sys/<architecture>/conf
+directory.
+.PP
+The configured system image
+.Pn vmunix
+should be copied to the root, and then booted to try it out.
+It is best to name it
+.Pn /newvmunix
+so as not to destroy the working system until you are sure it does work:
+.DS
+\fB#\fP \fIcp vmunix /newvmunix\fP
+\fB#\fP \fIsync\fP
+.DE
+It is also a good idea to keep the previous system around under some other
+name.  In particular, we recommend that you save the generic distribution
+version of the system permanently as
+.Pn /genvmunix
+for use in emergencies.
+To boot the new version of the system you should follow the
+bootstrap procedures outlined in section 6.1.
+After having booted and tested the new system, it should be installed as
+.Pn /vmunix
+before going into multiuser operation.
+A systematic scheme for numbering and saving old versions
+of the system may be useful.
+.Sh 2 "Configuring terminals"
+.PP
+If UNIX is to support simultaneous
+access from directly-connected terminals other than the console,
+the file
+.Pn /etc/ttys
+(see
+.Xr ttys (5))
+must be edited.
+.PP
+To add a new terminal device, be sure the device is configured into the system
+and that the special files for the device have been made by
+.Pn /dev/MAKEDEV .
+Then, enable the appropriate lines of
+.Pn /etc/ttys
+by setting the ``status''
+field to \fBon\fP (or add new lines).
+Note that lines in
+.Pn /etc/ttys
+are one-for-one with entries in the file of current users
+(see
+.Pn /var/run/utmp ),
+and therefore it is best to make changes
+while running in single-user mode
+and to add all the entries for a new device at once.
+.PP
+Each line in the
+.Pn /etc/ttys
+file is broken into four tab separated
+fields (comments are shown by a `#' character and extend to
+the end of the line).  For each terminal line the four fields
+are:
+the device (without a leading
+.Pn /dev ),
+the program
+.Pn /sbin/init
+should startup to service the line
+(or \fBnone\fP if the line is to be left alone),
+the terminal type (found in
+.Pn /usr/share/misc/termcap ),
+and optional status information describing if the terminal is
+enabled or not and if it is ``secure'' (i.e. the super user should
+be allowed to login on the line).
+If the console is marked as ``insecure'',
+then the root password is required to bring the machine up single-user.
+All fields are character strings
+with entries requiring embedded white space enclosed in double
+quotes.
+Thus a newly added terminal
+.Pn /dev/tty00
+could be added as
+.DS
+tty00 	"/usr/libexec/getty std.9600"	vt100	on secure	# mike's office
+.DE
+The std.9600 parameter provided to
+.Pn /usr/libexec/getty
+is used in searching the file
+.Pn /etc/gettytab ;
+it specifies a terminal's characteristics (such as baud rate).
+To make custom terminal types, consult
+.Xr gettytab (5)
+before modifying
+.Pn /etc/gettytab .
+.PP
+Dialup terminals should be wired so that carrier is asserted only when the
+phone line is dialed up.
+For non-dialup terminals, from which modem control is not available,
+you must wire back the signals so that
+the carrier appears to always be present.  For further details,
+find your terminal driver in section 4 of the manual.
+.PP
+For network terminals (i.e. pseudo terminals), no program should
+be started up on the lines.  Thus, the normal entry in
+.Pn /etc/ttys
+would look like
+.DS
+ttyp0 	none	network
+.DE
+(Note, the fourth field is not needed here.)
+.PP
+When the system is running multi-user, all terminals that are listed in
+.Pn /etc/ttys
+as \fBon\fP have their line enabled.
+If, during normal operations, you wish
+to disable a terminal line, you can edit the file
+.Pn /etc/ttys
+to change the terminal's status to \fBoff\fP and
+then send a hangup signal to the
+.Xr init
+process, by doing
+.DS
+\fB#\fP \fIkill \-1 1\fP
+.DE
+Terminals can similarly be enabled by changing the status field
+from \fBoff\fP to \fBon\fP and sending a hangup signal to
+.Xr init .
+.PP
+Note that if a special file is inaccessible when
+.Xr init
+tries to create a process for it,
+.Xr init
+will log a message to the
+system error logging process (see
+.Xr syslogd (8))
+and try to reopen the terminal every minute, reprinting the warning
+message every 10 minutes.  Messages of this sort are normally
+printed on the console, though other actions may occur depending
+on the configuration information found in
+.Pn /etc/syslog.conf .
+.PP
+Finally note that you should change the names of any dialup
+terminals to ttyd?
+where ? is in [0-9a-zA-Z], as some programs use this property of the
+names to determine if a terminal is a dialup.
+Shell commands to do this should be put in the
+.Pn /dev/MAKEDEV.local
+script.
+.PP
+While it is possible to use truly arbitrary strings for terminal names,
+the accounting and noticeably the
+.Xr ps (1)
+command make good use of the convention that tty names
+(by default, and also after dialups are named as suggested above)
+are distinct in the last 2 characters.
+Change this and you may be sorry later, as the heuristic
+.Xr ps (1)
+uses based on these conventions will then break down and
+.Xr ps
+will run MUCH slower.
+.Sh 2 "Adding users"
+.PP
+The procedure for adding a new user is described in
+.Xr adduser (8).
+You should add accounts for the initial user community, giving
+each a directory and a password, and putting users who will wish
+to share software in the same groups.
+.PP
+Several guest accounts have been provided on the distribution
+system; these accounts are for people at Berkeley,
+Bell Laboratories, and others
+who have done major work on UNIX in the past.  You can delete these accounts,
+or leave them on the system if you expect that these people would have
+occasion to login as guests on your system.
+.Sh 2 "Site tailoring"
+.PP
+All programs that require the site's name, or some similar
+characteristic, obtain the information through system calls
+or from files located in
+.Pn /etc .
+Aside from parts of the
+system related to the network, to tailor the system to your
+site you must simply select a site name, then edit the file
+.DS
+/etc/netstart
+.DE
+The first lines in
+.Pn /etc/netstart
+use a variable to set the hostname,
+.DS
+hostname=\fImysitename\fP
+/bin/hostname $hostname
+.DE
+to define the value returned by the
+.Xr gethostname (2)
+system call.  If you are running the name server, your site
+name should be your fully qualified domain name.  Programs such as
+.Xr getty (8),
+.Xr mail (1),
+.Xr wall (1),
+and
+.Xr uucp (1)
+use this system call so that the binary images are site
+independent.
+.PP
+You will also need to edit
+.Pn /etc/netstart
+to do the network interface initialization using
+.Xr ifconfig (8).
+If you are not sure how to do this, see sections 5.1, 5.2, and 5.3.
+If you are not running a routing daemon and have
+more than one Ethernet in your environment
+you will need to set up a default route;
+see section 5.4 for details.
+Before bringing your system up multiuser,
+you should ensure that the networking is properly configured.
+The network is started by running
+.Pn /etc/netstart .
+Once started, you should test connectivity using
+.Xr ping (8).
+You should first test connectivity to yourself, 
+then another host on your Ethernet,
+and finally a host on another Ethernet.
+The
+.Xr netstat (8)
+program can be used to inspect and debug
+your routes; see section 5.4.
+.Sh 2 "Setting up the line printer system"
+.PP
+The line printer system consists of at least
+the following files and commands:
+.DS
+.TS
+l l.
+/usr/bin/lpq	spooling queue examination program
+/usr/bin/lprm	program to delete jobs from a queue
+/usr/bin/lpr	program to enter a job in a printer queue
+/etc/printcap	printer configuration and capability database
+/usr/sbin/lpd	line printer daemon, scans spooling queues
+/usr/sbin/lpc	line printer control program
+/etc/hosts.lpd	list of host allowed to use the printers
+.TE
+.DE
+.PP
+The file
+.Pn /etc/printcap
+is a master database describing line
+printers directly attached to a machine and, also, printers
+accessible across a network.  The manual page
+.Xr printcap (5)
+describes the format of this database and also
+shows the default values for such things as the directory
+in which spooling is performed.  The line printer system handles
+multiple printers, multiple spooling queues, local and remote
+printers, and also printers attached via serial lines that require
+line initialization such as the baud rate.  Raster output devices
+such as a Varian or Versatec, and laser printers such as an Imagen,
+are also supported by the line printer system.
+.PP
+Remote spooling via the network is handled with two spooling
+queues, one on the local machine and one on the remote machine.
+When a remote printer job is started with
+.Xr lpr ,
+the job is queued locally and a daemon process created to oversee the
+transfer of the job to the remote machine.  If the destination
+machine is unreachable, the job will remain queued until it is
+possible to transfer the files to the spooling queue on the
+remote machine.  The
+.Xr lpq
+program shows the contents of spool
+queues on both the local and remote machines.
+.PP
+To configure your line printers, consult the printcap manual page
+and the accompanying document, ``4.3BSD Line Printer Spooler Manual'' (SMM:7).
+A call to the
+.Xr lpd
+program should be present in
+.Pn /etc/rc .
+.Sh 2 "Setting up the mail system"
+.PP
+The mail system consists of the following commands:
+.DS
+.TS
+l l.
+/usr/bin/mail	UCB mail program, described in \fImail\fP\|(1)
+/usr/sbin/sendmail	mail routing program
+/var/spool/mail	mail spooling directory
+/var/spool/secretmail	secure mail directory
+/usr/bin/xsend	secure mail sender
+/usr/bin/xget	secure mail receiver
+/etc/aliases	mail forwarding information
+/usr/bin/newaliases	command to rebuild binary forwarding database
+/usr/bin/biff	mail notification enabler
+/usr/libexec/comsat	mail notification daemon
+.TE
+.DE
+Mail is normally sent and received using the
+.Xr mail (1)
+command (found in
+.Pn /usr/bin/mail ),
+which provides a front-end to edit the messages sent
+and received, and passes the messages to
+.Xr sendmail (8)
+for routing.
+The routing algorithm uses knowledge of the network name syntax,
+aliasing and forwarding information, and network topology, as
+defined in the configuration file
+.Pn /usr/lib/sendmail.cf ,
+to process each piece of mail.
+Local mail is delivered by giving it to the program
+.Pn /usr/libexec/mail.local
+that adds it to the mailboxes in the directory
+.Pn /var/spool/mail/<username> ,
+using a locking protocol to avoid problems with simultaneous updates.
+After the mail is delivered, the local mail delivery daemon
+.Pn /usr/libexec/comsat
+is notified, which in turn notifies users who have issued a
+``\fIbiff\fP y'' command that mail has arrived.
+.PP
+Mail queued in the directory
+.Pn /var/spool/mail
+is normally readable only by the recipient.
+To send mail that is secure against perusal
+(except by a code-breaker) you should use the secret mail facility,
+which encrypts the mail.
+.PP
+To set up the mail facility you should read the instructions in the
+file READ_ME in the directory
+.Pn /usr/src/usr.sbin/sendmail
+and then adjust the necessary configuration files.
+You should also set up the file
+.Pn /etc/aliases
+for your installation, creating mail groups as appropriate.
+For more informations see
+``Sendmail Installation and Operation Guide'' (SMM:8) and
+``Sendmail \- An Internetwork Mail Router'' (SMM:9).
+.Sh 3 "Setting up a UUCP connection"
+.LP
+The version of
+.Xr uucp
+included in \*(4B has the following features:
+.IP \(bu 3
+support for many auto call units and dialers
+in addition to the DEC DN11,
+.IP \(bu 3
+breakup of the spooling area into multiple subdirectories,
+.IP \(bu 3
+addition of an
+.Pn L.cmds
+file to control the set
+of commands that may be executed by a remote site,
+.IP \(bu 3
+enhanced ``expect-send'' sequence capabilities when
+logging in to a remote site,
+.IP \(bu 3
+new commands to be used in polling sites and
+obtaining snap shots of
+.Xr uucp
+activity,
+.IP \(bu 3
+additional protocols for different communication media.
+.LP
+This section gives a brief overview of
+.Xr uucp
+and points out the most important steps in its installation.
+.PP
+To connect two UNIX machines with a
+.Xr uucp
+network link using modems,
+one site must have an automatic call unit
+and the other must have a dialup port.
+It is better if both sites have both.
+.PP
+You should first read the paper in the UNIX System Manager's Manual:
+``Uucp Implementation Description'' (SMM:14).
+It describes in detail the file formats and conventions,
+and will give you a little context.
+In addition,
+the document ``setup.tblms'',
+located in the directory
+.Pn /usr/src/usr.bin/uucp/UUAIDS ,
+may be of use in tailoring the software to your needs.
+.PP
+The
+.Xr uucp
+support is located in three major directories:
+.Pn /usr/bin,
+.Pn /usr/lib/uucp,
+and
+.Pn /var/spool/uucp .
+User commands are kept in
+.Pn /usr/bin,
+operational commands in
+.Pn /usr/lib/uucp ,
+and
+.Pn /var/spool/uucp
+is used as a spooling area.
+The commands in
+.Pn /usr/bin
+are:
+.DS
+.TS
+l l.
+/usr/bin/uucp	file-copy command
+/usr/bin/uux	remote execution command
+/usr/bin/uusend	binary file transfer using mail
+/usr/bin/uuencode	binary file encoder (for \fIuusend\fP)
+/usr/bin/uudecode	binary file decoder (for \fIuusend\fP)
+/usr/bin/uulog	scans session log files
+/usr/bin/uusnap	gives a snap-shot of \fIuucp\fP activity
+/usr/bin/uupoll	polls remote system until an answer is received
+/usr/bin/uuname	prints a list of known uucp hosts
+/usr/bin/uuq	gives information about the queue
+.TE
+.DE
+The important files and commands in
+.Pn /usr/lib/uucp
+are:
+.DS
+.TS
+l l.
+/usr/lib/uucp/L-devices	list of dialers and hard-wired lines
+/usr/lib/uucp/L-dialcodes	dialcode abbreviations
+/usr/lib/uucp/L.aliases	hostname aliases
+/usr/lib/uucp/L.cmds	commands remote sites may execute
+/usr/lib/uucp/L.sys	systems to communicate with, how to connect, and when
+/usr/lib/uucp/SEQF	sequence numbering control file
+/usr/lib/uucp/USERFILE	remote site pathname access specifications
+/usr/lib/uucp/uucico	\fIuucp\fP protocol daemon
+/usr/lib/uucp/uuclean	cleans up garbage files in spool area
+/usr/lib/uucp/uuxqt	\fIuucp\fP remote execution server
+.TE
+.DE
+while the spooling area contains the following important files and directories:
+.DS
+.TS
+l l.
+/var/spool/uucp/C.	directory for command, ``C.'' files
+/var/spool/uucp/D.	directory for data, ``D.'', files
+/var/spool/uucp/X.	directory for command execution, ``X.'', files
+/var/spool/uucp/D.\fImachine\fP	directory for local ``D.'' files
+/var/spool/uucp/D.\fImachine\fPX	directory for local ``X.'' files
+/var/spool/uucp/TM.	directory for temporary, ``TM.'', files
+/var/spool/uucp/LOGFILE	log file of \fIuucp\fP activity
+/var/spool/uucp/SYSLOG	log file of \fIuucp\fP file transfers
+.TE
+.DE
+.PP
+To install
+.Xr uucp
+on your system,
+start by selecting a site name
+(shorter than 14 characters). 
+A
+.Xr uucp
+account must be created in the password file and a password set up.
+Then,
+create the appropriate spooling directories with mode 755
+and owned by user
+.Xr uucp ,
+group \fIdaemon\fP.
+.PP
+If you have an auto-call unit,
+the L.sys, L-dialcodes, and L-devices files should be created.
+The L.sys file should contain
+the phone numbers and login sequences
+required to establish a connection with a
+.Xr uucp
+daemon on another machine.
+For example, our L.sys file looks something like:
+.DS
+adiron Any ACU 1200 out0123456789- ogin-EOT-ogin uucp
+cbosg Never Slave 300
+cbosgd Never Slave 300
+chico Never Slave 1200 out2010123456
+.DE
+The first field is the name of a site,
+the second shows when the machine may be called,
+the third field specifies how the host is connected
+(through an ACU, a hard-wired line, etc.),
+then comes the phone number to use in connecting through an auto-call unit,
+and finally a login sequence.
+The phone number
+may contain common abbreviations that are defined in the L-dialcodes file.
+The device specification should refer to devices
+specified in the L-devices file.
+Listing only ACU causes the
+.Xr uucp
+daemon,
+.Xr uucico ,
+to search for any available auto-call unit in L-devices.
+Our L-dialcodes file is of the form:
+.DS
+ucb 2
+out 9%
+.DE
+while our L-devices file is:
+.DS
+ACU cul0 unused 1200 ventel
+.DE
+Refer to the README file in the
+.Xr uucp
+source directory for more information about installation.
+.PP
+As
+.Xr uucp
+operates it creates (and removes) many small
+files in the directories underneath
+.Pn /var/spool/uucp .
+Sometimes files are left undeleted;
+these are most easily purged with the
+.Xr uuclean
+program.
+The log files can grow without bound unless trimmed back;
+.Xr uulog
+maintains these files.
+Many useful aids in maintaining your
+.Xr uucp
+installation are included in a subdirectory UUAIDS beneath
+.Pn /usr/src/usr.bin/uucp .
+Peruse this directory and read the ``setup'' instructions also located there.
diff --git a/share/doc/smm/01.setup/5.t b/share/doc/smm/01.setup/5.t
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..10b86dd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/share/doc/smm/01.setup/5.t
@@ -0,0 +1,586 @@
+.\" Copyright (c) 1980, 1986, 1988, 1993 The Regents of the University of California.
+.\" All rights reserved.
+.\"
+.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+.\" are met:
+.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+.\"    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+.\" 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
+.\"    must display the following acknowledgement:
+.\"	This product includes software developed by the University of
+.\"	California, Berkeley and its contributors.
+.\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
+.\"    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+.\"    without specific prior written permission.
+.\"
+.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+.\" ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
+.\"
+.\"	@(#)5.t	8.1 (Berkeley) 7/27/93
+.\"
+.ds lq ``
+.ds rq ''
+.ds LH "Installing/Operating \*(4B
+.ds RH Network setup
+.ds CF \*(Dy
+.Sh 1 "Network setup"
+.PP
+\*(4B provides support for the standard Internet
+protocols IP, ICMP, TCP, and UDP.  These protocols may be used
+on top of a variety of hardware devices ranging from
+serial lines to local area network controllers
+for the Ethernet.  Network services are split between the
+kernel (communication protocols) and user programs (user
+services such as TELNET and FTP).  This section describes
+how to configure your system to use the Internet networking support.
+\*(4B also supports the Xerox Network Systems (NS) protocols.
+IDP and SPP are implemented in the kernel,
+and other protocols such as Courier run at the user level.
+\*(4B provides some support for the ISO OSI protocols CLNP
+TP4, and ESIS.  User level process
+complete the application protocols such as X.400 and X.500.
+.Sh 2 "System configuration"
+.PP
+To configure the kernel to include the Internet communication
+protocols, define the INET option.
+Xerox NS support is enabled with the NS option.
+ISO OSI support is enabled with the ISO option.
+In either case, include the pseudo-devices
+``pty'', and ``loop'' in your machine's configuration
+file. 
+The ``pty'' pseudo-device forces the pseudo terminal device driver
+to be configured into the system, see
+.Xr pty (4),
+while the ``loop'' pseudo-device forces inclusion of the software loopback
+interface driver.
+The loop driver is used in network testing
+and also by the error logging system.
+.PP
+If you are planning to use the Internet network facilities on a 10Mb/s
+Ethernet, the pseudo-device ``ether'' should also be included
+in the configuration; this forces inclusion of the Address Resolution
+Protocol module used in mapping between 48-bit Ethernet
+and 32-bit Internet addresses.
+.PP
+Before configuring the appropriate networking hardware, you should
+consult the manual pages in section 4 of the Programmer's Manual
+selecting the appropriate interfaces for your architecture.
+.PP
+All network interface drivers including the loopback interface,
+require that their host address(es) be defined at boot time.
+This is done with
+.Xr ifconfig (8)
+commands included in the
+.Pn /etc/netstart
+file.
+Interfaces that are able to dynamically deduce the host
+part of an address may check that the host part of the address is correct.
+The manual page for each network interface
+describes the method used to establish a host's address.
+.Xr Ifconfig (8)
+can also be used to set options for the interface at boot time.
+Options are set independently for each interface, and
+apply to all packets sent using that interface.
+Alternatively, translations for such hosts may be set in advance
+or ``published'' by a \*(4B host by use of the
+.Xr arp (8)
+command.
+Note that the use of trailer link-level is now negotiated between \*(4B hosts
+using ARP,
+and it is thus no longer necessary to disable the use of trailers
+with
+.Xr ifconfig .
+.PP
+The OSI equivalent to ARP is ESIS (End System to Intermediate System Routing
+Protocol); running this protocol is mandatory, however one can manually add
+translations for machines that do not participate by use of the
+.Xr route (8)
+command.
+Additional information is provided in the manual page describing
+.Xr ESIS (4).
+.PP
+To use the pseudo terminals just configured, device
+entries must be created in the
+.Pn /dev
+directory.  To create 32
+pseudo terminals (plenty, unless you have a heavy network load)
+execute the following commands.
+.DS
+\fB#\fP \fIcd /dev\fP
+\fB#\fP \fIMAKEDEV pty0 pty1\fP
+.DE
+More pseudo terminals may be made by specifying
+.Pn pty2 ,
+.Pn pty3 ,
+etc.  The kernel normally includes support for 32 pseudo terminals
+unless the configuration file specifies a different number.
+Each pseudo terminal really consists of two files in
+.Pn /dev :
+a master and a slave.  The master pseudo terminal file is named
+.Pn /dev/ptyp? ,
+while the slave side is
+.Pn /dev/ttyp? .
+Pseudo terminals are also used by several programs not related to the network.
+In addition to creating the pseudo terminals,
+be sure to install them in the
+.Pn /etc/ttys
+file (with a `none' in the second column so no
+.Xr getty
+is started).
+.Sh 2 "Local subnets"
+.PP
+In \*(4B the Internet support
+includes the notion of ``subnets''.  This is a mechanism
+by which multiple local networks may appears as a single Internet
+network to off-site hosts.  Subnetworks are useful because
+they allow a site to hide their local topology, requiring only a single
+route in external gateways;
+it also means that local network numbers may be locally administered.
+The standard describing this change in Internet addressing is RFC-950.
+.PP
+To set up local subnets one must first decide how the available
+address space (the Internet ``host part'' of the 32-bit address)
+is to be partitioned.
+Sites with a class A network
+number have a 24-bit host address space with which to work, sites with a
+class B network number have a 16-bit host address space, while sites with
+a class C network number have an 8-bit host address space\**.
+.FS
+If you are unfamiliar with the Internet addressing structure, consult
+``Address Mappings'', Internet RFC-796, J. Postel; available from
+the Internet Network Information Center at SRI.
+.FE
+To define local subnets you must steal some bits
+from the local host address space for use in extending the network
+portion of the Internet address.  This reinterpretation of Internet
+addresses is done only for local networks; i.e. it is not visible
+to hosts off-site.  For example, if your site has a class B network
+number, hosts on this network have an Internet address that contains
+the network number, 16 bits, and the host number, another
+16 bits.  To define 254 local subnets, each
+possessing at most 255 hosts, 8 bits may be taken from the local part.
+(The use of subnets 0 and all-1's, 255 in this example, is discouraged
+to avoid confusion about broadcast addresses.)
+These new network
+numbers are then constructed by concatenating the original 16-bit network
+number with the extra 8 bits containing the local subnet number.
+.PP
+The existence of local subnets is communicated to the system at the time a
+network interface is configured with the
+.I netmask
+option to the
+.Xr ifconfig
+program.  A ``network mask'' is specified to define the
+portion of the Internet address that is to be considered the network part
+for that network.
+This mask normally contains the bits corresponding to the standard
+network part as well as the portion of the local part
+that has been assigned to subnets.
+If no mask is specified when the address is set,
+it will be set according to the class of the network.
+For example, at Berkeley (class B network 128.32) 8 bits
+of the local part have been reserved for defining subnets;
+consequently the
+.Pn /etc/netstart
+file contains lines of the form
+.DS
+.ft CW
+/sbin/ifconfig le0 netmask 0xffffff00 128.32.1.7
+.DE
+This specifies that for interface ``le0'', the upper 24 bits of
+the Internet address should be used in calculating network numbers
+(netmask 0xffffff00), and the interface's Internet address is
+``128.32.1.7'' (host 7 on network 128.32.1).  Hosts \fIm\fP on
+sub-network \fIn\fP of this network would then have addresses of
+the form ``128.32.\fIn\fP.\fIm\fP'';  for example, host
+99 on network 129 would have an address ``128.32.129.99''.
+For hosts with multiple interfaces, the network mask should
+be set for each interface,
+although in practice only the mask of the first interface on each network
+is really used.
+.Sh 2 "Internet broadcast addresses"
+.PP
+The address defined as the broadcast address for Internet networks
+according to RFC-919 is the address with a host part of all 1's.
+The address used by 4.2BSD was the address with a host part of 0.
+\*(4B uses the standard broadcast address (all 1's) by default,
+but allows the broadcast address to be set (with
+.Xr ifconfig )
+for each interface.
+This allows networks consisting of both 4.2BSD, \*(Ps and \*(4B hosts
+to coexist while the upgrade process proceeds.
+In the presence of subnets, the broadcast address uses the subnet field
+as for normal host addresses, with the remaining host part set to 1's
+(or 0's, on a network that has not yet been converted).
+\*(4B hosts recognize and accept packets
+sent to the logical-network broadcast address as well as those sent
+to the subnet broadcast address, and when using an all-1's broadcast,
+also recognize and receive packets sent to host 0 as a broadcast.
+.Sh 2 "Routing"
+.PP
+If your environment allows access to networks not directly
+attached to your host you will need to set up routing information
+to allow packets to be properly routed.  Two schemes are
+supported by the system.  The first scheme
+employs a routing table management daemon.
+Optimally, you should use the routing daemon
+.Xr gated
+available from Cornell university.
+We use it on our systems and it works well,
+especially for multi-homed hosts using Serial Line IP (SLIP).
+Unfortunately, we were not able to obtain permission to
+include it on \*(4B.
+.PP
+If you do not wish to or cannot obtain
+.Xr gated ,
+the distribution does include
+.Xr routed (8)
+to maintain the system routing tables.  The routing daemon
+uses a variant of the Xerox Routing Information Protocol
+to maintain up to date routing tables in a cluster of local
+area networks.  By using the
+.Pn /etc/gateways
+file, the routing daemon can also be used to initialize static routes
+to distant networks (see the next section for further discussion).
+When the routing daemon is started up
+(usually from
+.Pn /etc/rc )
+it reads
+.Pn /etc/gateways
+if it exists and installs those routes defined there,
+then broadcasts on each local network
+to which the host is attached to find other instances of the routing
+daemon.  If any responses are received, the routing daemons
+cooperate in maintaining a globally consistent view of routing
+in the local environment.  This view can be extended to include
+remote sites also running the routing daemon by setting up suitable
+entries in
+.Pn /etc/gateways ;
+consult
+.Xr routed (8)
+for a more thorough discussion.
+.PP
+The second approach is to define a default or wildcard
+route to a smart
+gateway and depend on the gateway to provide ICMP routing
+redirect information to dynamically create a routing data
+base.  This is done by adding an entry of the form
+.DS
+.ft CW
+/sbin/route add default \fIsmart-gateway\fP 1
+.DE
+to
+.Pn /etc/netstart ;
+see
+.Xr route (8)
+for more information.  The default route
+will be used by the system as a ``last resort''
+in routing packets to their destination.  Assuming the gateway
+to which packets are directed is able to generate the proper
+routing redirect messages, the system will then add routing
+table entries based on the information supplied.  This approach
+has certain advantages over the routing daemon, but is
+unsuitable in an environment where there are only bridges (i.e.
+pseudo gateways that, for instance, do not generate routing
+redirect messages).  Further, if the
+smart gateway goes down there is no alternative, save manual
+alteration of the routing table entry, to maintaining service.
+.PP
+The system always listens, and processes, routing redirect
+information, so it is possible to combine both of the above
+facilities.  For example, the routing table management process
+might be used to maintain up to date information about routes
+to geographically local networks, while employing the wildcard
+routing techniques for ``distant'' networks.  The
+.Xr netstat (1)
+program may be used to display routing table contents as well
+as various routing oriented statistics.  For example,
+.DS
+\fB#\fP \fInetstat \-r\fP
+.DE
+will display the contents of the routing tables, while
+.DS
+\fB#\fP \fInetstat \-r \-s\fP
+.DE
+will show the number of routing table entries dynamically
+created as a result of routing redirect messages, etc.
+.Sh 2 "Use of \*(4B machines as gateways"
+.PP
+Several changes have been made in \*(4B in the area of gateway support
+(or packet forwarding, if one prefers).
+A new configuration option, GATEWAY, is used when configuring
+a machine to be used as a gateway.
+This option increases the size of the routing hash tables in the kernel.
+Unless configured with that option,
+hosts with only a single non-loopback interface never attempt
+to forward packets or to respond with ICMP error messages to misdirected
+packets.
+This change reduces the problems that may occur when different hosts
+on a network disagree on the network number or broadcast address.
+Another change is that \*(4B machines that forward packets back through
+the same interface on which they arrived
+will send ICMP redirects to the source host if it is on the same network.
+This improves the interaction of \*(4B gateways with hosts that configure
+their routes via default gateways and redirects.
+The generation of redirects may be disabled with the configuration option
+IPSENDREDIRECTS=0 or while the system is running by using the command:
+.DS
+.ft CW
+sysctl -w net.inet.ip.redirect=0
+.DE
+in environments where it may cause difficulties.
+.Sh 2 "Network databases"
+.PP
+Several data files are used by the network library routines
+and server programs.  Most of these files are host independent
+and updated only rarely.
+.br
+.ne 1i
+.TS
+lfC l l.
+File	Manual reference	Use
+_
+/etc/hosts	\fIhosts\fP\|(5)	local host names
+/etc/networks	\fInetworks\fP\|(5)	network names
+/etc/services	\fIservices\fP\|(5)	list of known services
+/etc/protocols	\fIprotocols\fP\|(5)	protocol names
+/etc/hosts.equiv	\fIrshd\fP\|(8)	list of ``trusted'' hosts
+/etc/netstart	\fIrc\fP\|(8)	command script for initializing network
+/etc/rc	\fIrc\fP\|(8)	command script for starting standard servers
+/etc/rc.local	\fIrc\fP\|(8)	command script for starting local servers
+/etc/ftpusers	\fIftpd\fP\|(8)	list of ``unwelcome'' ftp users
+/etc/hosts.lpd	\fIlpd\fP\|(8)	list of hosts allowed to access printers
+/etc/inetd.conf	\fIinetd\fP\|(8)	list of servers started by \fIinetd\fP
+.TE
+The files distributed are set up for Internet hosts.
+Local networks and hosts should be added to describe the local
+configuration; the Berkeley entries may serve as examples
+(see also the section on
+.Pn /etc/hosts ).
+Network numbers will have to be chosen for each Ethernet.
+For sites connected to the Internet,
+the normal channels should be used for allocation of network
+numbers (contact hostmaster@SRI-NIC.ARPA).
+For other sites,
+these could be chosen more or less arbitrarily,
+but it is generally better to request official numbers
+to avoid conversion if a connection to the Internet (or others on the Internet)
+is ever established.
+.Sh 3 "Network servers"
+.PP
+Most network servers are automatically started up at boot time
+by the command file
+.Pn /etc/rc
+or by the Internet daemon (see below).
+These include the following:
+.TS
+lfC l l.
+Program	Server	Started by
+_
+/usr/sbin/syslogd	error logging server	\f(CW/etc/rc\fP
+/usr/sbin/named	Internet name server	\f(CW/etc/rc\fP
+/sbin/routed	routing table management daemon	\f(CW/etc/rc\fP
+/usr/sbin/rwhod	system status daemon	\f(CW/etc/rc\fP
+/usr/sbin/timed	time synchronization daemon	\f(CW/etc/rc\fP
+/usr/sbin/sendmail	SMTP server	\f(CW/etc/rc\fP
+/usr/libexec/rshd	shell server	inetd
+/usr/libexec/rexecd	exec server	inetd
+/usr/libexec/rlogind	login server	inetd
+/usr/libexec/telnetd	TELNET server	inetd
+/usr/libexec/ftpd	FTP server	inetd
+/usr/libexec/fingerd	Finger server	inetd
+/usr/libexec/tftpd	TFTP server	inetd
+.TE
+Consult the manual pages and accompanying documentation (particularly
+for named and sendmail) for details about their operation.
+.PP
+The use of
+.Xr routed
+and
+.Xr rwhod
+is controlled by shell
+variables set in
+.Pn /etc/netstart .
+By default,
+.Xr routed
+is used, but
+.Xr rwhod
+is not; they are enabled by setting the variables \fIroutedflags\fP and
+.Xr rwhod
+to strings other than ``NO.''
+The value of \fIroutedflags\fP provides host-specific options to
+.Xr routed .
+For example,
+.DS
+.ft CW
+routedflags=-q
+rwhod=NO
+.DE
+would run
+.Xr "routed -q"
+and would not run
+.Xr rwhod .
+.PP
+To have other network servers started as well,
+commands of the following sort should be placed in the site-dependent file
+.Pn /etc/rc.local .
+.DS
+.ft CW
+if [ -f /usr/sbin/timed ]; then
+	/usr/sbin/timed & echo -n ' timed'			>/dev/console
+f\&i
+.DE
+.Sh 3 "Internet daemon"
+.PP
+In \*(4B most of the servers for user-visible services are started up by a
+``super server'', the Internet daemon.  The Internet
+daemon,
+.Pn /usr/sbin/inetd ,
+acts as a master server for
+programs specified in its configuration file,
+.Pn /etc/inetd.conf ,
+listening for service requests for these servers, and starting
+up the appropriate program whenever a request is received.
+The configuration file contains lines containing a service
+name (as found in
+.Pn /etc/services ),
+the type of socket the
+server expects (e.g. stream or dgram), the protocol to be
+used with the socket (as found in
+.Pn /etc/protocols ),
+whether to wait for each server to complete before starting up another,
+the user name by which the server should run, the server
+program's name, and at most five arguments to pass to the
+server program.
+Some trivial services are implemented internally in
+.Xr inetd ,
+and their servers are listed as ``internal.''
+For example, an entry for the file
+transfer protocol server would appear as
+.DS
+.ft CW
+ftp	stream	tcp	nowait	root	/usr/libexec/ftpd	ftpd
+.DE
+Consult
+.Xr inetd (8)
+for more detail on the format of the configuration file
+and the operation of the Internet daemon.
+.Sh 3 "The \f(CW/etc/hosts.equiv\fP file"
+.PP
+The remote login and shell servers use an
+authentication scheme based on trusted hosts.  The
+.Pn hosts.equiv
+file contains a list of hosts that are considered trusted
+and, under a single administrative control.  When a user
+contacts a remote login or shell server requesting service,
+the client process passes the user's name and the official
+name of the host on which the client is located.  In the simple
+case, if the host's name is located in
+.Pn hosts.equiv
+and the user has an account on the server's machine, then service
+is rendered (i.e. the user is allowed to log in, or the command
+is executed).  Users may expand this ``equivalence'' of
+machines by installing a
+.Pn \&.rhosts
+file in their login directory.
+The root login is handled specially, bypassing the
+.Pn hosts.equiv
+file, and using only the
+.Pn /.rhosts
+file.
+.PP
+Thus, to create a class of equivalent machines, the
+.Pn hosts.equiv
+file should contain the \fIofficial\fP names for those machines.
+If you are running the name server, you may omit the domain part
+of the host name for machines in your local domain.
+For example, four machines on our local
+network are considered trusted, so the
+.Pn hosts.equiv
+file is of the form:
+.DS
+.ft CW
+vangogh.CS.Berkeley.EDU
+picasso.CS.Berkeley.EDU
+okeeffe.CS.Berkeley.EDU
+.DE
+.Sh 3 "The \f(CW/etc/ftpusers\fP file"
+.PP
+The FTP server included in the system provides support for an
+anonymous FTP account.  Because of the inherent security problems
+with such a facility you should read this section carefully if
+you consider providing such a service.
+.PP
+An anonymous account is enabled by creating a user
+.Xr ftp .
+When a client uses the anonymous account a
+.Xr chroot (2)
+system call is performed by the server to restrict the client
+from moving outside that part of the filesystem where the
+user ftp home directory is located.  Because a
+.Xr chroot
+call is used, certain programs and files used by the server
+process must be placed in the ftp home directory.
+Further, one must be
+sure that all directories and executable images are unwritable.
+The following directory setup is recommended.  The
+use of the
+.Xr awk
+commands to copy the
+.Pn /etc/passwd
+and
+.Pn /etc/group
+files are \fBSTRONGLY\fP recommended.
+.DS
+\fB#\fP \fIcd ~ftp\fP
+\fB#\fP \fIchmod 555 .; chown ftp .; chgrp ftp .\fP
+\fB#\fP \fImkdir bin etc pub\fP
+\fB#\fP \fIchown root bin etc\fP
+\fB#\fP \fIchmod 555 bin etc\fP
+\fB#\fP \fIchown ftp pub\fP
+\fB#\fP \fIchmod 777 pub\fP
+\fB#\fP \fIcd bin\fP
+\fB#\fP \fIcp /bin/sh /bin/ls .\fP
+\fB#\fP \fIchmod 111 sh ls\fP
+\fB#\fP \fIcd ../etc\fP
+\fB#\fP \fIawk -F: '{$2="*";print$1":"$2":"$3":"$4":"$5":"$6":"}' < /etc/passwd > passwd\fP
+\fB#\fP \fIawk -F: '{$2="*";print$1":"$2":"}' < /etc/group > group\fP
+\fB#\fP \fIchmod 444 passwd group\fP
+.DE
+When local users wish to place files in the anonymous
+area, they must be placed in a subdirectory.  In the
+setup here, the directory
+.Pn ~ftp/pub
+is used.
+.PP
+Aside from the problems of directory modes and such,
+the ftp server may provide a loophole for interlopers
+if certain user accounts are allowed.
+The file
+.Pn /etc/ftpusers
+is checked on each connection.
+If the requested user name is located in the file, the
+request for service is denied.  This file normally has
+the following names on our systems.
+.DS
+uucp
+root
+.DE
+Accounts without passwords need not be listed in this file as the ftp
+server will refuse service to these users.
+Accounts with nonstandard shells (any not listed in
+.Pn /etc/shells )
+will also be denied access via ftp.
diff --git a/share/doc/smm/01.setup/6.t b/share/doc/smm/01.setup/6.t
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d043474
--- /dev/null
+++ b/share/doc/smm/01.setup/6.t
@@ -0,0 +1,663 @@
+.\" Copyright (c) 1980, 1986, 1988, 1993 The Regents of the University of California.
+.\" All rights reserved.
+.\"
+.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+.\" are met:
+.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+.\"    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+.\" 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
+.\"    must display the following acknowledgement:
+.\"	This product includes software developed by the University of
+.\"	California, Berkeley and its contributors.
+.\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
+.\"    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+.\"    without specific prior written permission.
+.\"
+.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+.\" ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
+.\"
+.\"	@(#)6.t	8.1 (Berkeley) 7/27/93
+.\"
+.ds LH "Installing/Operating \*(4B
+.ds CF \*(Dy
+.Sh 1 "System operation"
+.PP
+This section describes procedures used to operate a \*(4B UNIX system.
+Procedures described here are used periodically, to reboot the system,
+analyze error messages from devices, do disk backups, monitor
+system performance, recompile system software and control local changes.
+.Sh 2 "Bootstrap and shutdown procedures"
+.PP
+In a normal reboot, the system checks the disks and comes up multi-user
+without intervention at the console.
+Such a reboot
+can be stopped (after it prints the date) with a ^C (interrupt).
+This will leave the system in single-user mode, with only the console
+terminal active.
+(If the console has been marked ``insecure'' in
+.Pn /etc/ttys
+you must enter the root password to bring the machine to single-user mode.)
+It is also possible to allow the filesystem checks to complete
+and then to return to single-user mode by signaling
+.Xr fsck (8)
+with a QUIT signal (^\|\e).
+.PP
+To bring the system up to a multi-user configuration from the single-user
+status,
+all you have to do is hit ^D on the console.  The system
+will then execute
+.Pn /etc/rc ,
+a multi-user restart script (and
+.Pn /etc/rc.local ),
+and come up on the terminals listed as
+active in the file
+.Pn /etc/ttys .
+See
+.Xr init (8)
+and
+.Xr ttys (5) for more details.
+Note, however, that this does not cause a filesystem check to be done.
+Unless the system was taken down cleanly, you should run
+``fsck \-p'' or force a reboot with
+.Xr reboot (8)
+to have the disks checked.
+.PP
+To take the system down to a single user state you can use
+.DS
+\fB#\fP \fIkill 1\fP
+.DE
+or use the
+.Xr shutdown (8)
+command (which is much more polite, if there are other users logged in)
+when you are running multi-user.
+Either command will kill all processes and give you a shell on the console,
+as if you had just booted.  Filesystems remain mounted after the
+system is taken single-user.  If you wish to come up multi-user again, you
+should do this by:
+.DS
+\fB#\fP \fIcd /\fP
+\fB#\fP \fI/sbin/umount -a\fP
+\fB#\fP \fI^D\fP
+.DE
+.PP
+Each system shutdown, crash, processor halt and reboot
+is recorded in the system log
+with its cause.
+.Sh 2 "Device errors and diagnostics"
+.PP
+When serious errors occur on peripherals or in the system, the system
+prints a warning diagnostic on the console.
+These messages are collected
+by the system error logging process
+.Xr syslogd (8)
+and written into a system error log file
+.Pn /var/log/messages .
+Less serious errors are sent directly to
+.Xr syslogd ,
+which may log them on the console.
+The error priorities that are logged and the locations to which they are logged
+are controlled by
+.Pn /etc/syslog.conf .
+See
+.Xr syslogd (8)
+for further details.
+.PP
+Error messages printed by the devices in the system are described with the
+drivers for the devices in section 4 of the programmer's manual.
+If errors occur suggesting hardware problems, you should contact
+your hardware support group or field service.  It is a good idea to
+examine the error log file regularly
+(e.g. with the command \fItail \-r /var/log/messages\fP).
+.Sh 2 "Filesystem checks, backups, and disaster recovery"
+.PP
+Periodically (say every week or so in the absence of any problems)
+and always (usually automatically) after a crash,
+all the filesystems should be checked for consistency
+by
+.Xr fsck (1).
+The procedures of
+.Xr reboot (8)
+should be used to get the system to a state where a filesystem
+check can be done manually or automatically.
+.PP
+Dumping of the filesystems should be done regularly,
+since once the system is going it is easy to
+become complacent.
+Complete and incremental dumps are easily done with
+.Xr dump (8).
+You should arrange to do a towers-of-hanoi dump sequence; we tune
+ours so that almost all files are dumped on two tapes and kept for at
+least a week in most every case.  We take full dumps every month (and keep
+these indefinitely).
+Operators can execute ``dump w'' at login that will tell them what needs
+to be dumped
+(based on the
+.Pn /etc/fstab
+information).
+Be sure to create a group
+.B operator
+in the file
+.Pn /etc/group
+so that dump can notify logged-in operators when it needs help.
+.PP
+More precisely, we have three sets of dump tapes: 10 daily tapes,
+5 weekly sets of 2 tapes, and fresh sets of three tapes monthly.
+We do daily dumps circularly on the daily tapes with sequence
+`3 2 5 4 7 6 9 8 9 9 9 ...'.
+Each weekly is a level 1 and the daily dump sequence level
+restarts after each weekly dump.
+Full dumps are level 0 and the daily sequence restarts after each full dump
+also.
+.PP
+Thus a typical dump sequence would be:
+.br
+.ne 6
+.TS
+center;
+c c c c c
+n n n l l.
+tape name	level number	date	opr	size
+_
+FULL	0	Nov 24, 1992	operator	137K
+D1	3	Nov 28, 1992	operator	29K
+D2	2	Nov 29, 1992	operator	34K
+D3	5	Nov 30, 1992	operator	19K
+D4	4	Dec 1, 1992	operator	22K
+W1	1	Dec 2, 1992	operator	40K
+D5	3	Dec 4, 1992	operator	15K
+D6	2	Dec 5, 1992	operator	25K
+D7	5	Dec 6, 1992	operator	15K
+D8	4	Dec 7, 1992	operator	19K
+W2	1	Dec 9, 1992	operator	118K
+D9	3	Dec 11, 1992	operator	15K
+D10	2	Dec 12, 1992	operator	26K
+D1	5	Dec 15, 1992	operator	14K
+W3	1	Dec 17, 1992	operator	71K
+D2	3	Dec 18, 1992	operator	13K
+FULL	0	Dec 22, 1992	operator	135K
+.TE
+We do weekly dumps often enough that daily dumps always fit on one tape.
+.PP
+Dumping of files by name is best done by
+.Xr tar (1)
+but the amount of data that can be moved in this way is limited
+to a single tape.
+Finally if there are enough drives entire
+disks can be copied with
+.Xr dd (1)
+using the raw special files and an appropriate
+blocking factor; the number of sectors per track is usually
+a good value to use, consult
+.Pn /etc/disktab .
+.PP
+It is desirable that full dumps of the root filesystem be
+made regularly.
+This is especially true when only one disk is available.
+Then, if the
+root filesystem is damaged by a hardware or software failure, you
+can rebuild a workable disk doing a restore in the
+same way that the initial root filesystem was created.
+.PP
+Exhaustion of user-file space is certain to occur
+now and then; disk quotas may be imposed, or if you
+prefer a less fascist approach, try using the programs
+.Xr du (1),
+.Xr df (1),
+and
+.Xr quot (8),
+combined with threatening
+messages of the day, and personal letters.
+.Sh 2 "Moving filesystem data"
+.PP
+If you have the resources,
+the best way to move a filesystem
+is to dump it to a spare disk partition, or magtape, using
+.Xr dump (8),
+use
+.Xr newfs (8)
+to create the new filesystem,
+and restore the filesystem using
+.Xr restore (8).
+Filesystems may also be moved by piping the output of
+.Xr dump
+to
+.Xr restore .
+The
+.Xr restore
+program uses an ``in-place'' algorithm that
+allows filesystem dumps to be restored without concern for the
+original size of the filesystem.  Further, portions of a
+filesystem may be selectively restored using a method similar
+to the tape archive program.
+.PP
+If you have to merge a filesystem into another, existing one,
+the best bet is to use
+.Xr tar (1).
+If you must shrink a filesystem, the best bet is to dump
+the original and restore it onto the new filesystem.
+If you
+are playing with the root filesystem and only have one drive,
+the procedure is more complicated.
+If the only drive is a Winchester disk, this procedure may not be used
+without overwriting the existing root or another partition.
+What you do is the following:
+.IP 1.
+GET A SECOND PACK, OR USE ANOTHER DISK DRIVE!!!!
+.IP 2.
+Dump the root filesystem to tape using
+.Xr dump (8).
+.IP 3.
+Bring the system down.
+.IP 4.
+Mount the new pack in the correct disk drive, if
+using removable media.
+.IP 5.
+Load the distribution tape and install the new
+root filesystem as you did when first installing the system.
+Boot normally
+using the newly created disk filesystem.
+.PP
+Note that if you change the disk partition tables or add new disk
+drivers they should also be added to the standalone system in
+.Pn /sys/<architecture>/stand ,
+and the default disk partition tables in
+.Pn /etc/disktab
+should be modified.
+.Sh 2 "Monitoring system performance"
+.PP
+The
+.Xr systat
+program provided with the system is designed to be an aid to monitoring
+systemwide activity.  The default ``pigs'' mode shows a dynamic ``ps''.
+By running in the ``vmstat'' mode
+when the system is active you can judge the system activity in several
+dimensions: job distribution, virtual memory load, paging and swapping
+activity, device interrupts, and disk and cpu utilization.
+Ideally, there should be few blocked (b) jobs,
+there should be little paging or swapping activity, there should
+be available bandwidth on the disk devices (most single arms peak
+out at 20-30 tps in practice), and the user cpu utilization (us) should
+be high (above 50%).
+.PP
+If the system is busy, then the count of active jobs may be large,
+and several of these jobs may often be blocked (b).  If the virtual
+memory is active, then the paging demon will be running (sr will
+be non-zero).  It is healthy for the paging demon to free pages when
+the virtual memory gets active; it is triggered by the amount of free
+memory dropping below a threshold and increases its pace as free memory
+goes to zero.
+.PP
+If you run in the ``vmstat'' mode
+when the system is busy, you can find
+imbalances by noting abnormal job distributions.  If many
+processes are blocked (b), then the disk subsystem
+is overloaded or imbalanced.  If you have several non-dma
+devices or open teletype lines that are ``ringing'', or user programs
+that are doing high-speed non-buffered input/output, then the system
+time may go high (60-70% or higher).
+It is often possible to pin down the cause of high system time by
+looking to see if there is excessive context switching (cs), interrupt
+activity (in) and per-device interrupt counts,
+or system call activity (sy).  Cumulatively on one of
+our large machines we average about 60-200 context switches and interrupts
+per second and about 50-500 system calls per second.
+.PP
+If the system is heavily loaded, or if you have little memory
+for your load (2M is little in most any case), then the system
+may be forced to swap.  This is likely to be accompanied by a noticeable
+reduction in system performance and pregnant pauses when interactive
+jobs such as editors swap out.
+If you expect to be in a memory-poor environment
+for an extended period you might consider administratively
+limiting system load.
+.Sh 2 "Recompiling and reinstalling system software"
+.PP
+It is easy to regenerate either the entire system or a single utility,
+and it is a good idea to try rebuilding pieces of the system to build
+confidence in the procedures.
+.LP
+In general, there are six well-known targets supported by
+all the makefiles on the system:
+.IP all 9
+This entry is the default target, the same as if no target is specified.
+This target builds the kernel, binary or library, as well as its
+associated manual pages.
+This target \fBdoes not\fP build the dependency files.
+Some of the utilities require that a \fImake depend\fP be done before
+a \fImake all\fP can succeed.
+.IP depend
+Build the include file dependency file, ``.depend'', which is
+read by
+.Xr make .
+See
+.Xr mkdep (1)
+for further details.
+.IP install
+Install the kernel, binary or library, as well as its associated
+manual pages.
+See
+.Xr install (1)
+for further details.
+.IP clean
+Remove the kernel, binary or library, as well as any object files
+created when building it.
+.IP cleandir
+The same as clean, except that the dependency files and formatted
+manual pages are removed as well.
+.IP obj
+Build a shadow directory structure in the area referenced by
+.Pn /usr/obj
+and create a symbolic link in the current source directory to
+referenced it, named ``obj''.
+Once this shadow structure has been created, all the files created by
+.Xr make
+will live in the shadow structure, and
+.Pn /usr/src
+may be mounted read-only by multiple machines.
+Doing a \fImake obj\fP in
+.Pn /usr/src
+will build the shadow directory structure for everything on the
+system except for the contributed, old, and kernel software.
+.PP
+The system consists of three major parts:
+the kernel itself, found in
+.Pn /usr/src/sys ,
+the libraries , found in
+.Pn /usr/src/lib ,
+and the user programs (the rest of
+.Pn /usr/src ).
+.PP
+Deprecated software, found in
+.Pn /usr/src/old ,
+often has old style makefiles;
+some of it does not compile under \*(4B at all.
+.PP
+Contributed software, found in
+.Pn /usr/src/contrib ,
+usually does not support the ``cleandir'', ``depend'', or ``obj'' targets.
+.PP
+The kernel does not support the ``obj'' shadow structure.
+All kernels are compiled in subdirectories of
+.Pn /usr/src/sys/compile
+which is usually abbreviated as
+.Pn /sys/compile .
+If you want to mount your source tree read-only,
+.Pn /usr/src/sys/compile
+will have to be on a separate filesystem from
+.Pn /usr/src .
+Separation from
+.Pn /usr/src
+can be done by making
+.Pn /usr/src/sys/compile
+a symbolic link that references
+.Pn /usr/obj/sys/compile .
+If it is a symbolic link, the \fIS\fP variable in the kernel
+Makefile must be changed from
+.Pn \&../..
+to the absolute pathname needed to locate the kernel sources, usually
+.Pn /usr/src/sys .
+The symbolic link created by
+.Xr config (8)
+for
+.Pn machine
+must also be manually changed to an absolute pathname.
+Finally, the
+.Pn /usr/src/sys/libkern/obj
+directory must be located in
+.Pn /usr/obj/sys/libkern .
+.PP
+Each of the standard utilities and libraries may be built and
+installed by changing directories into the correct location and
+doing:
+.DS
+\fB#\fP \fImake\fP
+\fB#\fP \fImake install\fP
+.DE
+Note, if system include files have changed between compiles,
+.Xr make
+will not do the correct dependency checks if the dependency
+files have not been built using the ``depend'' target.
+.PP
+The entire library and utility suite for the system may be recompiled
+from scratch by changing directory to
+.Pn /usr/src
+and doing:
+.DS
+\fB#\fP \fImake build\fP
+.DE
+This target installs the system include files, cleans the source
+tree, builds and installs the libraries, and builds and installs
+the system utilities.
+.PP
+To recompile a specific program, first determine where the binary
+resides with the
+.Xr whereis (1)
+command, then change to the corresponding source directory and build
+it with the Makefile in the directory.
+For instance, to recompile ``passwd'',
+all one has to do is:
+.DS
+\fB#\fP \fIwhereis passwd\fP
+\fB/usr/bin/passwd\fP
+\fB#\fP \fIcd /usr/src/usr.bin/passwd\fP
+\fB#\fP \fImake\fP
+\fB#\fP \fImake install\fP
+.DE
+this will compile and install the
+.Xr passwd
+utility.
+.PP
+If you wish to recompile and install all programs into a particular
+target area you can override the default path prefix by doing:
+.DS
+\fB#\fP \fImake\fP
+\fB#\fP \fImake DESTDIR=\fPpathname \fIinstall\fP
+.DE
+Similarly, the mode, owner, group, and other characteristics of
+the installed object can be modified by changing other default
+make variables.
+See
+.Xr make (1),
+.Pn /usr/src/share/mk/bsd.README ,
+and the ``.mk'' scripts in the
+.Pn /usr/share/mk
+directory for more information.
+.PP
+If you modify the C library or system include files, to change a
+system call for example, and want to rebuild and install everything,
+you have to be a little careful.
+You must ensure that the include files are installed before anything
+is compiled, and that the libraries are installed before the remainder
+of the source, otherwise the loaded images will not contain the new
+routine from the library.
+If include files have been modified, the following commands should
+be done first:
+.DS
+\fB#\fP \fIcd /usr/src/include\fP
+\fB#\fP \fImake install\fP
+.DE
+Then, if, for example, C library files have been modified, the
+following commands should be executed:
+.DS
+\fB#\fP \fIcd /usr/src/lib/libc\fP
+\fB#\fP \fImake depend\fP
+\fB#\fP \fImake\fP
+\fB#\fP \fImake install\fP
+\fB#\fP \fIcd /usr/src\fP
+\fB#\fP \fImake depend\fP
+\fB#\fP \fImake\fP
+\fB#\fP \fImake install\fP
+.DE
+Alternatively, the \fImake build\fP command described above will
+accomplish the same tasks.
+This takes several hours on a reasonably configured machine.
+.Sh 2 "Making local modifications"
+.PP
+The source for locally written commands is normally stored in
+.Pn /usr/src/local ,
+and their binaries are kept in
+.Pn /usr/local/bin .
+This isolation of local binaries allows
+.Pn /usr/bin ,
+and
+.Pn /bin
+to correspond to the distribution tape (and to the manuals that
+people can buy).
+People using local commands should be made aware that they are not
+in the base manual.
+Manual pages for local commands should be installed in
+.Pn /usr/local/man/cat[1-8].
+The
+.Xr man (1)
+command automatically finds manual pages placed in
+/usr/local/man/cat[1-8] to encourage this practice (see
+.Xr man.conf (5)).
+.Sh 2 "Accounting"
+.PP
+UNIX optionally records two kinds of accounting information:
+connect time accounting and process resource accounting.  The connect
+time accounting information is stored in the file
+.Pn /var/log/wtmp ,
+which is summarized by the program
+.Xr ac (8).
+The process time accounting information is stored in the file
+.Pn /var/account/acct
+after it is enabled by
+.Xr accton (8),
+and is analyzed and summarized by the program
+.Xr sa (8).
+.PP
+If you need to recharge for computing time, you can develop
+procedures based on the information provided by these commands.
+A convenient way to do this is to give commands to the clock daemon
+.Pn /usr/sbin/cron
+to be executed every day at a specified time.
+This is done by adding lines to
+.Pn /etc/crontab.local ;
+see
+.Xr cron (8)
+for details.
+.Sh 2 "Resource control"
+.PP
+Resource control in the current version of UNIX is more
+elaborate than in most UNIX systems.  The disk quota
+facilities developed at the University of Melbourne have
+been incorporated in the system and allow control over the
+number of files and amount of disk space each user and/or group may use
+on each filesystem.  In addition, the resources consumed
+by any single process can be limited by the mechanisms of
+.Xr setrlimit (2).
+As distributed, the latter mechanism
+is voluntary, though sites may choose to modify the login
+mechanism to impose limits not covered with disk quotas.
+.PP
+To use the disk quota facilities, the system must be
+configured with ``options QUOTA''.  Filesystems may then
+be placed under the quota mechanism by creating a null file
+.Pn quota.user
+and/or
+.Pn quota.group
+at the root of the filesystem, running
+.Xr quotacheck (8),
+and modifying
+.Pn /etc/fstab
+to show that the filesystem is to run
+with disk quotas (options userquota and/or groupquota).
+The
+.Xr quotaon (8)
+program may then be run to enable quotas.
+.PP
+Individual quotas are applied by using the quota editor
+.Xr edquota (8).
+Users may view their quotas (but not those of other users) with the
+.Xr quota (1)
+program. The
+.Xr repquota (8)
+program may be used to summarize the quotas and current
+space usage on a particular filesystem or filesystems.
+.PP
+Quotas are enforced with \fIsoft\fP and \fIhard\fP limits.
+When a user and/or group first reaches a soft limit on a resource, a
+message is generated on their terminal.  If the user and/or group fails to
+lower the resource usage below the soft limit
+for longer than the time limit established for that filesystem
+(default seven days) the system then treats the soft limit as a
+\fIhard\fP limit and disallows any allocations until enough space is
+reclaimed to bring the user and/or group back below the soft limit.
+Hard limits are enforced strictly resulting in errors when a user
+and/or group tries to create or write a file.  Each time a hard limit is
+exceeded the system will generate a message on the user's terminal.
+.PP
+Consult the auxiliary document, ``Disc Quotas in a UNIX Environment'' (SMM:4)
+and the appropriate manual entries for more information.
+.Sh 2 "Network troubleshooting"
+.PP
+If you have anything more than a trivial network configuration,
+from time to time you are bound to run into problems.  Before
+blaming the software, first check your network connections.  On
+networks such as the Ethernet a
+loose cable tap or misplaced power cable can result in severely
+deteriorated service.  The
+.Xr netstat (1)
+program may be of aid in tracking down hardware malfunctions.
+In particular, look at the \fB\-i\fP and \fB\-s\fP options in the manual page.
+.PP
+Should you believe a communication protocol problem exists,
+consult the protocol specifications and attempt to isolate the
+problem in a packet trace.  The SO_DEBUG option may be supplied
+before establishing a connection on a socket, in which case the
+system will trace all traffic and internal actions (such as timers
+expiring) in a circular trace buffer.
+This buffer may then be printed out with the
+.Xr trpt (8)
+program.
+Most of the servers distributed with the system
+accept a \fB\-d\fP option forcing
+all sockets to be created with debugging turned on.
+Consult the appropriate manual pages for more information.
+.Sh 2 "Files that need periodic attention"
+.PP
+We conclude the discussion of system operations by listing
+the files that require periodic attention or are system specific:
+.TS
+center;
+lfC l.
+/etc/fstab	how disk partitions are used
+/etc/disktab	default disk partition sizes/labels
+/etc/printcap	printer database
+/etc/gettytab	terminal type definitions
+/etc/remote	names and phone numbers of remote machines for \fItip\fP(1)
+/etc/group	group memberships
+/etc/motd	message of the day
+/etc/master.passwd	password file; each account has a line
+/etc/rc.local	local system restart script; runs reboot; starts daemons
+/etc/inetd.conf	local internet servers
+/etc/hosts	local host name database
+/etc/networks	network name database
+/etc/services	network services database
+/etc/hosts.equiv	hosts under same administrative control
+/etc/syslog.conf	error log configuration for \fIsyslogd\fP\|(8)
+/etc/ttys	enables/disables ports
+/etc/crontab	commands that are run periodically
+/etc/crontab.local	local commands that are run periodically
+/etc/aliases	mail forwarding and distribution groups
+/var/account/acct	raw process account data
+/var/log/messages	system error log
+/var/log/wtmp	login session accounting
+.TE
+.pn 2
+.bp
+.PX
diff --git a/share/doc/smm/01.setup/Makefile b/share/doc/smm/01.setup/Makefile
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ce68a5c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/share/doc/smm/01.setup/Makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,15 @@
+#	@(#)Makefile	8.1 (Berkeley) 7/27/93
+
+DIR=	smm/01.setup
+SRCS=	0.t 1.t 2.t 3.t 4.t 5.t 6.t
+FILES=	${SRCS}
+MACROS=	-ms
+
+paper.ps: ${SRCS}
+	${TBL} ${SRCS} | ${ROFF} > ${.TARGET}
+
+install: ${SRCS}
+	install -c -o ${BINOWN} -g ${BINGRP} -m 444 \
+	    Makefile ${FILES} ${EXTRA} ${DESTDIR}${BINDIR}/${DIR}
+
+.include <bsd.doc.mk>
diff --git a/share/doc/smm/01.setup/spell.ok b/share/doc/smm/01.setup/spell.ok
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c4f58a2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/share/doc/smm/01.setup/spell.ok
@@ -0,0 +1,618 @@
+A1096A
+AA
+ACU
+AMD
+Automounter
+BA
+BLOCKSIZE
+BSD
+Bb
+Bostic
+Bourne
+Bs
+Bz
+CCI
+CCITT
+CLNP
+CLTP
+COMPAT
+CPU's
+CS80
+CSRG
+CW
+Catseye
+Cyl
+DAT
+DECstation
+DESTDIR
+DISK's
+DISKTYPE
+DMA
+DN11
+DV
+DaVinci
+Dk
+Dn
+Dy
+EBCDIC
+EEPROM's
+EINTR
+EISA
+EOT
+ERESTART
+ESIS
+Emulex
+Exabyte
+FDDI
+FIPS
+FPU
+FTAM
+Filesystem
+Filesystems
+GCC
+GENERIC.hp300
+GX
+Gatorbox
+HDLC
+HIL
+HP
+HP's
+HP300
+HP300s
+HP433
+HP9000
+HPBSD
+HPUXCOMPAT
+Hibler
+IB
+ICMP
+IDP
+IDs
+IFLNK
+IP
+IPC
+IPSENDREDIRECTS
+IPX
+ISA
+ISO
+ISVTX
+Intel
+Jul
+Karels
+Kerberos
+L.aliases
+L.cmds
+L.sys
+LAN
+LAPB
+LFS
+LH
+LK201
+LOGFILE
+Leffler
+Luna
+MAKEDEV.local
+MB
+MC68040
+MFS
+MIB
+MIPS
+MISC
+MMU
+MT02
+Macklem
+Makefile
+Makefiles
+Maxtor
+McKusick
+NFS
+NIC.ARPA
+NPSECT
+NTP
+OHPUX
+OS
+OSI
+OSes
+Omron
+PCATCH
+PDT
+PMAD
+PMAG
+PMAX
+PMAZ
+POSIX
+POSIX.1
+POSIX.2
+PSD:5
+PVRX
+Pathnames
+Pendry
+Postel
+README
+RFC
+RH
+RISC
+ROM
+RS232
+RZ23
+RZ55
+RZ57
+SCSI
+SEQF
+SIOCGIFCONF
+SLC
+SMM:1
+SMM:10
+SMM:13
+SMM:14
+SMM:2
+SMM:3
+SMM:4
+SMM:6
+SMM:7
+SMM:8
+SMM:9
+SMTP
+SPARC
+SPARCstation
+SPP
+SRC
+SUNOS
+Sbus
+Solaris
+Standalone
+Std1003.1
+Std1003.2
+SunOS
+TAI
+TAPE's
+TBOOT
+TCP
+TIOCSCTTY
+TK50
+TM
+TP4
+TURBOchannel
+TVRX
+TZ
+Tcpmux
+Topcat
+Tue
+UCB
+UDP
+UFS
+ULTRIX
+ULTRIXCOMPAT
+UNIX''SMM:1
+USERFILE
+USL
+UTC
+UUAIDS
+UX
+Ux
+VAX
+VFS
+VME
+X11R5
+XX
+Xinu
+a,c,u,p
+a.out
+adaptor
+adaptors
+addrlen
+adiron
+adm
+aka
+aliases.db
+amd
+autochanger
+autoconf
+autoconfiguration
+autoconfigures
+bdes
+bootblock
+bootimage
+bootp
+bootpath
+bootrom
+bootsd
+bootstrapped
+bs
+bsd
+bsd.README
+btree
+bwtwo
+c.f
+callback
+cbosg
+cbosgd
+centronics
+cfb0
+cgsix
+cgthree
+changelist
+chflags
+chico
+chpass
+cksum
+cleandir
+cleanerd
+clnp
+cltp
+conf
+conformant
+contrib
+cpio
+crontab
+crontab.local
+cs
+csh.cshrc
+csh.login
+csh.logout
+cshrc
+ct
+cul0
+db
+dbopen
+dc7085
+deadfs
+dev
+dgram
+dialcode
+dialcodes
+dict
+disk3
+diskful
+disklabel
+disklabels
+disktab
+dm
+dm.conf
+dm.config
+dma
+doc
+endian
+es
+esis
+ext
+fd
+fdesc
+fifofs
+files.HOST
+fileservers
+filesystem
+filesystems
+foo
+frags
+friend.host.inet.number
+fsf
+fstab
+fstype
+ftpusers
+ftpwelcome
+fts
+funopen
+gcc
+genvmunix
+getcap
+gettytab
+gid
+gid's
+gids
+groff
+groupquota
+hangup
+hanoi
+heapsort
+hexdump
+hier
+host.inet.number
+hostmaster
+hosts.equiv
+hosts.lpd
+hp
+hp300
+hpib0
+inetd.conf
+inline
+inode
+int
+intr
+iob
+iso
+kbyte
+kbytes
+kdb
+kdump
+kerberos
+kerberosIV
+kernfs
+kmem
+krb.conf
+ksh
+ktrace
+kvm
+labelling
+lastlog
+ld.so.cache
+le
+le0
+lfs
+lib
+libc
+libdata
+libedit
+libexec
+libkern
+libkvm
+libutil
+localhost
+lofs
+logname
+loopback
+lq
+lun
+luna68k
+magtape
+mail.local
+mail.rc
+maillog
+maillog.0
+maillog.1
+maillog.2
+maillog.3
+maillog.4
+maillog.5
+maillog.6
+maillog.7
+makefiles
+man.conf
+man0
+manl
+master.passwd
+maxine
+mckusick
+mdec
+mediainit
+mem
+mergesort
+mfb0
+mfs
+misc
+miscfs
+mk
+mkdb
+mkdep
+mkfifo
+mmap
+mnt
+mono
+motd
+mountd
+mqueue
+msgbuf
+mtree
+my.domain
+myfriend
+myfriend.my.domain
+myname
+myname.my.domain
+mysitename
+namelen
+net.inet.ip.redirect
+netgroup
+netinet
+netiso
+netmask
+netns
+netstart
+netx25
+newdev
+newlfs
+news3400
+newvmunix
+nfs
+nfsd
+nfsiod
+nfsstat
+nfssvc
+nodump
+nowait
+npsect
+nr
+nrmt0
+nrst0
+nsect
+nullfs
+nvi
+obj
+ogin
+ok
+okeeffe.CS.Berkeley.EDU
+olddev
+oldroot
+opr
+osockaddr
+out0123456789
+out2010123456
+pageable
+pathname
+pathnames
+pcc
+picasso.CS.Berkeley.EDU
+pid
+pm0
+pmake
+pmap
+pmax
+posix
+printcap
+pt0
+pty
+pty.c
+pty0
+pty1
+pty2
+pty3
+ptyp
+pwd.db
+quota.group
+quota.user
+quotas.user
+radixsort
+rc.local
+rct
+rd
+rd0
+rdsk
+recno
+rew
+rf
+rhosts
+rmt0
+rmt12
+ro
+roff
+root.dump
+root.image
+routedflags
+rq
+rrd0d
+rrz?a
+rrz?c
+rsd0d
+rsd3a
+rsf
+rst0
+rw
+rxx0
+rz
+rz0
+rz1c
+rz?a
+sbin
+sc14
+sc7
+scsi0
+scsiformat
+sd
+sd0
+sd2b
+sd3
+sd3a
+sd660
+secretmail
+securelevel
+securettys
+sendmail.cf
+setsid
+setup.tblms
+shar
+shareable
+sizeof
+skel
+sockaddr
+sparc
+specfs
+spwd.db
+sr
+src
+srvtab
+st
+st.st
+standalone
+std
+std.9600
+stderr
+stdin
+stdout
+subr
+sunos
+sw
+sy
+sysctl
+sysctl.c
+syslog.0
+syslog.1
+syslog.2
+syslog.3
+syslog.4
+syslog.5
+syslog.6
+syslog.7
+syslog.conf
+tahoe
+tapehost
+tcp
+termios
+tmac
+tmp
+toor
+tps
+tput
+tsleep
+tty.c
+tty00
+ttya
+ttyb
+ttyd
+ttyp
+ttyp0
+ttytype
+types.h
+tz
+tz6
+ucb
+ufs
+uid
+uid's
+uids
+uipc
+umap
+umapfs
+un.h
+unaddr.sun
+uname
+unistd.h
+userid
+username
+userquota
+usr.bin
+usr.sbin
+utmp
+uucp.daemon
+uucppublic
+uw
+vangogh.CS.Berkeley.EDU
+var
+vax
+ventel
+vfs
+vm
+vmunix
+vmunix.net
+vmunix.tape
+vnode
+vnodes
+vol
+vt100
+wildcard
+wr
+wsrc
+wtmp
+xargs
+xbpf
+xcfb0
+xf
+xp
+xpbf
+xpf
+xsf
+xx
+xx0
+xxx
+your.host.inet.number
+yymmddhhmm
+zA
+zoneinfo
diff --git a/share/doc/smm/04.quotas/Makefile b/share/doc/smm/04.quotas/Makefile
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f55290d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/share/doc/smm/04.quotas/Makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
+#	@(#)Makefile	8.1 (Berkeley) 6/8/93
+
+DIR=	smm/04.quotas
+SRCS=	quotas.ms
+MACROS=	-ms
+
+.include <bsd.doc.mk>
diff --git a/share/doc/smm/04.quotas/quotas.ms b/share/doc/smm/04.quotas/quotas.ms
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3691830
--- /dev/null
+++ b/share/doc/smm/04.quotas/quotas.ms
@@ -0,0 +1,318 @@
+.\" Copyright (c) 1983, 1993
+.\"	The Regents of the University of California.  All rights reserved.
+.\"
+.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+.\" are met:
+.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+.\"    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+.\" 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
+.\"    must display the following acknowledgement:
+.\"	This product includes software developed by the University of
+.\"	California, Berkeley and its contributors.
+.\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
+.\"    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+.\"    without specific prior written permission.
+.\"
+.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+.\" ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
+.\"
+.\"	@(#)quotas.ms	8.1 (Berkeley) 6/8/93
+.\"
+.EH 'SMM:4-%''Disc Quotas in a \s-2UNIX\s+2 Environment'
+.OH 'Disc Quotas in a \s-2UNIX\s+2 Environment''SMM:4-%'
+.ND 5th July, 1983
+.TL
+Disc Quotas in a \s-2UNIX\s+2\s-3\u*\d\s0 Environment
+.FS
+* UNIX is a trademark of Bell Laboratories.
+.FE
+.AU
+Robert Elz
+.AI
+Department of Computer Science
+University of Melbourne,
+Parkville,
+Victoria,
+Australia.
+.AB
+.PP
+In most computing environments, disc space is not
+infinite.
+The disc quota system provides a mechanism
+to control usage of disc space, on an
+individual basis.
+.PP
+Quotas may be set for each individual user, on any, or
+all filesystems.
+.PP
+The quota system will warn users when they
+exceed their allotted limit, but allow some
+extra space for current work.
+Repeatedly remaining over quota at logout,
+will cause a fatal over quota condition eventually.
+.PP
+The quota system is an optional part of
+\s-2VMUNIX\s0 that may be included when the
+system is configured.
+.AE
+.NH 1
+Users' view of disc quotas
+.PP
+To most users, disc quotas will either be of no concern,
+or a fact of life that cannot be avoided.
+The
+\fIquota\fP\|(1)
+command will provide information on any disc quotas
+that may have been imposed upon a user.
+.PP
+There are two individual possible quotas that may be
+imposed, usually if one is, both will be.
+A limit can be set on the amount of space a user
+can occupy, and there may be a limit on the number
+of files (inodes) he can own.
+.PP
+.I Quota
+provides information on the quotas that have
+been set by the system administrators, in each
+of these areas, and current usage.
+.PP
+There are four numbers for each limit, the current
+usage, soft limit (quota), hard limit, and number
+of remaining login warnings.
+The soft limit is the number of 1K blocks (or files)
+that the user is expected to remain below.
+Each time the user's usage goes past this limit,
+he will be warned.
+The hard limit cannot be exceeded.
+If a user's usage reaches this number, further
+requests for space (or attempts to create a file)
+will fail with an EDQUOT error, and the first time
+this occurs, a message will be written to the user's
+terminal.
+Only one message will be output, until space occupied
+is reduced below the limit, and reaches it again,
+in order to avoid continual noise from those
+programs that ignore write errors.
+.PP
+Whenever a user logs in with a usage greater than
+his soft limit, he will be warned, and his login
+warning count decremented.
+When he logs in under quota, the counter is reset
+to its maximum value (which is a system configuration
+parameter, that is typically 3).
+If the warning count should ever reach zero (caused
+by three successive logins over quota), the
+particular limit that has been exceeded will be treated
+as if the hard limit has been reached, and no
+more resources will be allocated to the user.
+The \fBonly\fP way to reset this condition is
+to reduce usage below quota, then log in again.
+.NH 2 
+Surviving when quota limit is reached
+.PP
+In most cases, the only way to recover from over
+quota conditions, is to abort whatever activity was in progress
+on the filesystem that has reached its limit, remove
+sufficient files to bring the limit back below quota,
+and retry the failed program.
+.PP
+However, if you are in the editor and a write fails
+because of an over quota situation, that is not
+a suitable course of action, as it is most likely
+that initially attempting to write the file
+will have truncated its previous contents, so should
+the editor be aborted without correctly writing the
+file not only will the recent changes be lost, but
+possibly much, or even all, of the data
+that previously existed.
+.PP
+There are several possible safe exits for a user
+caught in this situation.
+He may use the editor \fB!\fP shell escape command to
+examine his file space, and remove surplus files.
+Alternatively, using \fIcsh\fP, he may suspend the
+editor, remove some files, then resume it.
+A third possibility, is to write the file to
+some other filesystem (perhaps to a file on /tmp)
+where the user's quota has not been exceeded.
+Then after rectifying the quota situation,
+the file can be moved back to the filesystem
+it belongs on.
+.NH 1
+Administering the quota system
+.PP
+To set up and establish the disc quota system,
+there are several steps necessary to be performed
+by the system administrator.
+.PP
+First, the system must be configured to include
+the disc quota sub-system.
+This is done by including the line:
+.DS
+options   QUOTA
+.DE
+in the system configuration file, then running
+\fIconfig\fP\|(8)
+followed by a system configuration\s-3\u*\d\s0.
+.FS
+* See also the document ``Building 4.2BSD UNIX Systems with Config''.
+.FE
+.PP
+Second, a decision as to what filesystems need to have
+quotas applied needs to be made.
+Usually, only filesystems that house users' home directories,
+or other user files, will need to be subjected to
+the quota system, though it may also prove useful to
+also include \fB/usr\fR.
+If possible, \fB/tmp\fP should usually be free of quotas.
+.PP
+Having decided on which filesystems quotas need to be
+set upon, the administrator should then allocate the
+available space amongst the competing needs. How this
+should be done is (way) beyond the scope of this document.
+.PP
+Then, the
+\fIedquota\fP\|(8)
+command can be used to actually set the limits desired upon
+each user. Where a number of users are to be given the
+same quotas (a common occurrence) the \fB\-p\fP switch
+to edquota will allow this to be easily accomplished.
+.PP
+Once the quotas are set, ready to operate, the system
+must be informed to enforce quotas on the desired filesystems.
+This is accomplished with the
+\fIquotaon\fP\|(8)
+command.
+.I Quotaon
+will either enable quotas for a particular filesystem, or
+with the \fB\-a\fP switch, will enable quotas for each
+filesystem indicated in \fB/etc/fstab\fP as using quotas.
+See
+\fIfstab\fP\|(5)
+for details.
+Most sites using the quota system, will include the
+line
+.DS C
+/etc/quotaon -a
+.DE
+in \fB/etc/rc.local\fP.
+.PP
+Should quotas need to be disabled, the
+\fIquotaoff\fP(8)
+command will do that, however, should the filesystem be
+about to be dismounted, the
+\fIumount\fP\|(8)
+command will disable quotas immediately before the
+filesystem is unmounted.
+This is actually an effect of the
+\fIumount\fP\|(2)
+system call, and it guarantees that the quota system
+will not be disabled if the umount would fail
+because the filesystem is not idle.
+.PP
+Periodically (certainly after each reboot, and when quotas
+are first enabled for a filesystem), the records retained
+in the quota file should be checked for consistency with
+the actual number of blocks and files allocated to
+the user.
+The
+\fIquotacheck\fP\|(8)
+command can be used to accomplish this.
+It is not necessary to dismount the filesystem, or disable
+the quota system to run this command, though on
+active filesystems inaccurate results may occur.
+This does no real harm in most cases, another run of
+.I quotacheck
+when the filesystem is idle will certainly correct any inaccuracy.
+.PP
+The super-user may use the
+\fIquota\fP\|(1)
+command to examine the usage and quotas of any user, and
+the
+\fIrepquota\fP\|(8)
+command may be used to check the usages and limits for
+all users on a filesystem.
+.NH 1
+Some implementation detail.
+.PP
+Disc quota usage and information is stored in a file on the
+filesystem that the quotas are to be applied to.
+Conventionally, this file is \fBquotas\fR in the root of
+the filesystem.
+While this name is not known to the system in any way,
+several of the user level utilities "know" it, and
+choosing any other name would not be wise.
+.PP
+The data in the file comprises an array of structures, indexed
+by uid, one structure for each user on the system (whether
+the user has a quota on this filesystem or not).
+If the uid space is sparse, then the file may have holes
+in it, which would be lost by copying, so it is best to
+avoid this.
+.PP
+The system is informed of the existence of the quota
+file by the
+\fIsetquota\fP\|(2)
+system call.
+It then reads the quota entries for each user currently
+active, then for any files open owned by users who
+are not currently active.
+Each subsequent open of a file on the filesystem, will
+be accompanied by a pairing with its quota information.
+In most cases this information will be retained in core,
+either because the user who owns the file is running some
+process, because other files are open owned by the same
+user, or because some file (perhaps this one) was recently
+accessed.
+In memory, the quota information is kept hashed by user-id
+and filesystem, and retained in an LRU chain so recently
+released data can be easily reclaimed.
+Information about those users whose last process has
+recently terminated is also retained in this way.
+.PP
+Each time a block is accessed or released, and each time an inode
+is allocated or freed, the quota system gets told
+about it, and in the case of allocations, gets the
+opportunity to object.
+.PP
+Measurements have shown
+that the quota code uses a very small percentage of the system
+cpu time consumed in writing a new block to disc.
+.NH 1
+Acknowledgments
+.PP
+The current disc quota system is loosely based upon a very
+early scheme implemented at the University of New South
+Wales, and Sydney University in the mid 70's. That system
+implemented a single combined limit for both files and blocks
+on all filesystems.
+.PP
+A later system was implemented at the University of Melbourne
+by the author, but was not kept highly accurately, eg:
+chown's (etc) did not affect quotas, nor did i/o to a file
+other than one owned by the instigator.
+.PP
+The current system has been running (with only minor modifications)
+since January 82 at Melbourne.
+It is actually just a small part of a much broader resource
+control scheme, which is capable of controlling almost
+anything that is usually uncontrolled in unix. The rest
+of this is, as yet, still in a state where it is far too
+subject to change to be considered for distribution.
+.PP
+For the 4.2BSD release, much work has been done to clean
+up and sanely incorporate the quota code by Sam Leffler and
+Kirk McKusick at The University of California at Berkeley.
diff --git a/share/doc/smm/05.fastfs/0.t b/share/doc/smm/05.fastfs/0.t
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9cc759b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/share/doc/smm/05.fastfs/0.t
@@ -0,0 +1,159 @@
+.\" Copyright (c) 1986, 1993
+.\"	The Regents of the University of California.  All rights reserved.
+.\"
+.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+.\" are met:
+.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+.\"    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+.\" 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
+.\"    must display the following acknowledgement:
+.\"	This product includes software developed by the University of
+.\"	California, Berkeley and its contributors.
+.\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
+.\"    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+.\"    without specific prior written permission.
+.\"
+.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+.\" ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
+.\"
+.\"	@(#)0.t	8.1 (Berkeley) 6/8/93
+.\"
+.EQ
+delim $$
+.EN
+.if n .ND
+.TL
+A Fast File System for UNIX*
+.EH 'SMM:05-%''A Fast File System for \s-2UNIX\s+2'
+.OH 'A Fast File System for \s-2UNIX\s+2''SMM:05-%'
+.AU
+Marshall Kirk McKusick, William N. Joy\(dg,
+Samuel J. Leffler\(dd, Robert S. Fabry
+.AI
+Computer Systems Research Group
+Computer Science Division
+Department of Electrical Engineering and Computer Science
+University of California, Berkeley
+Berkeley, CA  94720
+.AB
+.FS
+* UNIX is a trademark of Bell Laboratories.
+.FE
+.FS
+\(dg William N. Joy is currently employed by:
+Sun Microsystems, Inc, 2550 Garcia Avenue, Mountain View, CA 94043
+.FE
+.FS
+\(dd Samuel J. Leffler is currently employed by:
+Lucasfilm Ltd., PO Box 2009, San Rafael, CA 94912
+.FE
+.FS
+This work was done under grants from
+the National Science Foundation under grant MCS80-05144,
+and the Defense Advance Research Projects Agency (DoD) under
+ARPA Order No. 4031 monitored by Naval Electronic System Command under
+Contract No. N00039-82-C-0235.
+.FE
+A reimplementation of the UNIX file system is described.
+The reimplementation provides substantially higher throughput
+rates by using more flexible allocation policies
+that allow better locality of reference and can
+be adapted to a wide range of peripheral and processor characteristics.
+The new file system clusters data that is sequentially accessed
+and provides two block sizes to allow fast access to large files
+while not wasting large amounts of space for small files.
+File access rates of up to ten times faster than the traditional
+UNIX file system are experienced.
+Long needed enhancements to the programmers'
+interface are discussed.
+These include a mechanism to place advisory locks on files, 
+extensions of the name space across file systems,
+the ability to use long file names,
+and provisions for administrative control of resource usage.
+.sp
+.LP
+Revised February 18, 1984
+.AE
+.LP
+.sp 2
+CR Categories and Subject Descriptors:
+D.4.3
+.B "[Operating Systems]":
+File Systems Management \-
+.I "file organization, directory structures, access methods";
+D.4.2
+.B "[Operating Systems]":
+Storage Management \-
+.I "allocation/deallocation strategies, secondary storage devices";
+D.4.8
+.B "[Operating Systems]":
+Performance \-
+.I "measurements, operational analysis";
+H.3.2
+.B "[Information Systems]":
+Information Storage \-
+.I "file organization"
+.sp
+Additional Keywords and Phrases:
+UNIX,
+file system organization,
+file system performance,
+file system design,
+application program interface.
+.sp
+General Terms:
+file system,
+measurement,
+performance.
+.bp 
+.ce
+.B "TABLE OF CONTENTS"
+.LP
+.sp 1
+.nf
+.B "1.  Introduction"
+.LP
+.sp .5v
+.nf
+.B "2.  Old file system
+.LP
+.sp .5v
+.nf
+.B "3.  New file system organization
+3.1.    Optimizing storage utilization
+3.2.    File system parameterization
+3.3.    Layout policies
+.LP
+.sp .5v
+.nf
+.B "4.  Performance
+.LP
+.sp .5v
+.nf
+.B "5.  File system functional enhancements
+5.1.     Long file names
+5.2.     File locking
+5.3.     Symbolic links
+5.4.     Rename
+5.5.     Quotas
+.LP
+.sp .5v
+.nf
+.B Acknowledgements
+.LP
+.sp .5v
+.nf
+.B References
diff --git a/share/doc/smm/05.fastfs/1.t b/share/doc/smm/05.fastfs/1.t
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..dbdafc4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/share/doc/smm/05.fastfs/1.t
@@ -0,0 +1,112 @@
+.\" Copyright (c) 1986, 1993
+.\"	The Regents of the University of California.  All rights reserved.
+.\"
+.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+.\" are met:
+.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+.\"    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+.\" 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
+.\"    must display the following acknowledgement:
+.\"	This product includes software developed by the University of
+.\"	California, Berkeley and its contributors.
+.\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
+.\"    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+.\"    without specific prior written permission.
+.\"
+.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+.\" ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
+.\"
+.\"	@(#)1.t	8.1 (Berkeley) 6/8/93
+.\"
+.ds RH Introduction
+.NH
+Introduction
+.PP
+This paper describes the changes from the original 512 byte UNIX file
+system to the new one released with the 4.2 Berkeley Software Distribution.
+It presents the motivations for the changes,
+the methods used to effect these changes,
+the rationale behind the design decisions,
+and a description of the new implementation.
+This discussion is followed by a summary of
+the results that have been obtained,
+directions for future work,
+and the additions and changes
+that have been made to the facilities that are
+available to programmers.
+.PP
+The original UNIX system that runs on the PDP-11\(dg
+.FS
+\(dg DEC, PDP, VAX, MASSBUS, and UNIBUS are
+trademarks of Digital Equipment Corporation.
+.FE
+has simple and elegant file system facilities.  File system input/output
+is buffered by the kernel;
+there are no alignment constraints on
+data transfers and all operations are made to appear synchronous.
+All transfers to the disk are in 512 byte blocks, which can be placed
+arbitrarily within the data area of the file system.  Virtually
+no constraints other than available disk space are placed on file growth
+[Ritchie74], [Thompson78].*
+.FS
+* In practice, a file's size is constrained to be less than about
+one gigabyte.
+.FE
+.PP
+When used on the VAX-11 together with other UNIX enhancements,
+the original 512 byte UNIX file
+system is incapable of providing the data throughput rates
+that many applications require.
+For example, 
+applications
+such as VLSI design and image processing
+do a small amount of processing
+on a large quantities of data and
+need to have a high throughput from the file system.
+High throughput rates are also needed by programs
+that map files from the file system into large virtual
+address spaces.
+Paging data in and out of the file system is likely
+to occur frequently [Ferrin82b].
+This requires a file system providing
+higher bandwidth than the original 512 byte UNIX
+one that provides only about
+two percent of the maximum disk bandwidth or about
+20 kilobytes per second per arm [White80], [Smith81b].
+.PP
+Modifications have been made to the UNIX file system to improve
+its performance.
+Since the UNIX file system interface
+is well understood and not inherently slow,
+this development retained the abstraction and simply changed
+the underlying implementation to increase its throughput.
+Consequently, users of the system have not been faced with
+massive software conversion.
+.PP
+Problems with file system performance have been dealt with
+extensively in the literature; see [Smith81a] for a survey.
+Previous work to improve the UNIX file system performance has been
+done by [Ferrin82a].
+The UNIX operating system drew many of its ideas from Multics,
+a large, high performance operating system [Feiertag71].
+Other work includes Hydra [Almes78],
+Spice [Thompson80],
+and a file system for a LISP environment [Symbolics81].
+A good introduction to the physical latencies of disks is
+described in [Pechura83].
+.ds RH Old file system
+.sp 2
+.ne 1i
diff --git a/share/doc/smm/05.fastfs/2.t b/share/doc/smm/05.fastfs/2.t
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..33d9ade
--- /dev/null
+++ b/share/doc/smm/05.fastfs/2.t
@@ -0,0 +1,143 @@
+.\" Copyright (c) 1986, 1993
+.\"	The Regents of the University of California.  All rights reserved.
+.\"
+.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+.\" are met:
+.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+.\"    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+.\" 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
+.\"    must display the following acknowledgement:
+.\"	This product includes software developed by the University of
+.\"	California, Berkeley and its contributors.
+.\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
+.\"    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+.\"    without specific prior written permission.
+.\"
+.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+.\" ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
+.\"
+.\"	@(#)2.t	8.1 (Berkeley) 6/8/93
+.\"
+.ds RH Old file system
+.NH
+Old File System
+.PP
+In the file system developed at Bell Laboratories
+(the ``traditional'' file system),
+each disk drive is divided into one or more
+partitions.  Each of these disk partitions may contain
+one file system.  A file system never spans multiple
+partitions.\(dg
+.FS
+\(dg By ``partition'' here we refer to the subdivision of
+physical space on a disk drive.  In the traditional file
+system, as in the new file system, file systems are really
+located in logical disk partitions that may overlap.  This
+overlapping is made available, for example,
+to allow programs to copy entire disk drives containing multiple
+file systems.
+.FE
+A file system is described by its super-block,
+which contains the basic parameters of the file system.
+These include the number of data blocks in the file system,
+a count of the maximum number of files,
+and a pointer to the \fIfree list\fP, a linked
+list of all the free blocks in the file system.
+.PP
+Within the file system are files.
+Certain files are distinguished as directories and contain
+pointers to files that may themselves be directories.
+Every file has a descriptor associated with it called an
+.I "inode".
+An inode contains information describing ownership of the file,
+time stamps marking last modification and access times for the file,
+and an array of indices that point to the data blocks for the file.
+For the purposes of this section, we assume that the first 8 blocks
+of the file are directly referenced by values stored
+in an inode itself*.
+.FS
+* The actual number may vary from system to system, but is usually in
+the range 5-13.
+.FE
+An inode may also contain references to indirect blocks
+containing further data block indices.
+In a file system with a 512 byte block size, a singly indirect
+block contains 128 further block addresses,
+a doubly indirect block contains 128 addresses of further singly indirect
+blocks,
+and a triply indirect block contains 128 addresses of further doubly indirect
+blocks.
+.PP
+A 150 megabyte traditional UNIX file system consists
+of 4 megabytes of inodes followed by 146 megabytes of data.
+This organization segregates the inode information from the data;
+thus accessing a file normally incurs a long seek from the
+file's inode to its data.
+Files in a single directory are not typically allocated
+consecutive slots in the 4 megabytes of inodes,
+causing many non-consecutive blocks of inodes
+to be accessed when executing
+operations on the inodes of several files in a directory.
+.PP
+The allocation of data blocks to files is also suboptimum.
+The traditional
+file system never transfers more than 512 bytes per disk transaction
+and often finds that the next sequential data block is not on the same
+cylinder, forcing seeks between 512 byte transfers.
+The combination of the small block size,
+limited read-ahead in the system,
+and many seeks severely limits file system throughput.
+.PP
+The first work at Berkeley on the UNIX file system attempted to improve both
+reliability and throughput.
+The reliability was improved by staging modifications
+to critical file system information so that they could
+either be completed or repaired cleanly by a program
+after a crash [Kowalski78].
+The file system performance was improved by a factor of more than two by
+changing the basic block size from 512 to 1024 bytes.
+The increase was because of two factors:
+each disk transfer accessed twice as much data, 
+and most files could be described without need to access
+indirect blocks since the direct blocks contained twice as much data.
+The file system with these changes will henceforth be referred to as the
+.I "old file system."
+.PP
+This performance improvement gave a strong indication that
+increasing the block size was a good method for improving
+throughput.
+Although the throughput had doubled, 
+the old file system was still using only about
+four percent of the disk bandwidth.
+The main problem was that although the free list was initially
+ordered for optimal access,
+it quickly became scrambled as files were created and removed.
+Eventually the free list became entirely random,
+causing files to have their blocks allocated randomly over the disk.
+This forced a seek before every block access.
+Although old file systems provided transfer rates of up
+to 175 kilobytes per second when they were first created,
+this rate deteriorated to 30 kilobytes per second after a
+few weeks of moderate use because of this
+randomization of data block placement.
+There was no way of restoring the performance of an old file system
+except to dump, rebuild, and restore the file system.
+Another possibility, as suggested by [Maruyama76],
+would be to have a process that periodically
+reorganized the data on the disk to restore locality.
+.ds RH New file system
+.sp 2
+.ne 1i
diff --git a/share/doc/smm/05.fastfs/3.t b/share/doc/smm/05.fastfs/3.t
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0ab1196
--- /dev/null
+++ b/share/doc/smm/05.fastfs/3.t
@@ -0,0 +1,594 @@
+.\" Copyright (c) 1986, 1993
+.\"	The Regents of the University of California.  All rights reserved.
+.\"
+.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+.\" are met:
+.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+.\"    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+.\" 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
+.\"    must display the following acknowledgement:
+.\"	This product includes software developed by the University of
+.\"	California, Berkeley and its contributors.
+.\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
+.\"    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+.\"    without specific prior written permission.
+.\"
+.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+.\" ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
+.\"
+.\"	@(#)3.t	8.1 (Berkeley) 6/8/93
+.\"
+.ds RH New file system
+.NH
+New file system organization
+.PP
+In the new file system organization (as in the
+old file system organization),
+each disk drive contains one or more file systems.
+A file system is described by its super-block,
+located at the beginning of the file system's disk partition.
+Because the super-block contains critical data,
+it is replicated to protect against catastrophic loss.
+This is done when the file system is created;
+since the super-block data does not change,
+the copies need not be referenced unless a head crash
+or other hard disk error causes the default super-block
+to be unusable.
+.PP
+To insure that it is possible to create files as large as
+$2 sup 32$ bytes with only two levels of indirection,
+the minimum size of a file system block is 4096 bytes.
+The size of file system blocks can be any power of two
+greater than or equal to 4096.
+The block size of a file system is recorded in the 
+file system's super-block
+so it is possible for file systems with different block sizes
+to be simultaneously accessible on the same system.
+The block size must be decided at the time that
+the file system is created;
+it cannot be subsequently changed without rebuilding the file system.
+.PP
+The new file system organization divides a disk partition
+into one or more areas called
+.I "cylinder groups".
+A cylinder group is comprised of one or more consecutive
+cylinders on a disk.
+Associated with each cylinder group is some bookkeeping information
+that includes a redundant copy of the super-block,
+space for inodes,
+a bit map describing available blocks in the cylinder group,
+and summary information describing the usage of data blocks
+within the cylinder group.
+The bit map of available blocks in the cylinder group replaces
+the traditional file system's free list.
+For each cylinder group a static number of inodes
+is allocated at file system creation time.
+The default policy is to allocate one inode for each 2048
+bytes of space in the cylinder group, expecting this
+to be far more than will ever be needed. 
+.PP
+All the cylinder group bookkeeping information could be
+placed at the beginning of each cylinder group.
+However if this approach were used,
+all the redundant information would be on the top platter.
+A single hardware failure that destroyed the top platter
+could cause the loss of all redundant copies of the super-block.
+Thus the cylinder group bookkeeping information
+begins at a varying offset from the beginning of the cylinder group.
+The offset for each successive cylinder group is calculated to be
+about one track further from the beginning of the cylinder group
+than the preceding cylinder group.
+In this way the redundant
+information spirals down into the pack so that any single track, cylinder,
+or platter can be lost without losing all copies of the super-block.
+Except for the first cylinder group,
+the space between the beginning of the cylinder group
+and the beginning of the cylinder group information
+is used for data blocks.\(dg
+.FS
+\(dg While it appears that the first cylinder group could be laid
+out with its super-block at the ``known'' location,
+this would not work for file systems
+with blocks sizes of 16 kilobytes or greater.
+This is because of a requirement that the first 8 kilobytes of the disk
+be reserved for a bootstrap program and a separate requirement that
+the cylinder group information begin on a file system block boundary.
+To start the cylinder group on a file system block boundary,
+file systems with block sizes larger than 8 kilobytes 
+would have to leave an empty space between the end of
+the boot block and the beginning of the cylinder group.
+Without knowing the size of the file system blocks,
+the system would not know what roundup function to use
+to find the beginning of the first cylinder group.
+.FE
+.NH 2
+Optimizing storage utilization
+.PP
+Data is laid out so that larger blocks can be transferred
+in a single disk transaction, greatly increasing file system throughput.
+As an example, consider a file in the new file system
+composed of 4096 byte data blocks.
+In the old file system this file would be composed of 1024 byte blocks.
+By increasing the block size, disk accesses in the new file
+system may transfer up to four times as much information per
+disk transaction.
+In large files, several
+4096 byte blocks may be allocated from the same cylinder so that
+even larger data transfers are possible before requiring a seek.
+.PP
+The main problem with 
+larger blocks is that most UNIX
+file systems are composed of many small files.
+A uniformly large block size wastes space.
+Table 1 shows the effect of file system
+block size on the amount of wasted space in the file system.
+The files measured to obtain these figures reside on
+one of our time sharing
+systems that has roughly 1.2 gigabytes of on-line storage.
+The measurements are based on the active user file systems containing
+about 920 megabytes of formatted space.
+.KF
+.DS B
+.TS
+box;
+l|l|l
+a|n|l.
+Space used	% waste	Organization
+_
+775.2 Mb	0.0	Data only, no separation between files
+807.8 Mb	4.2	Data only, each file starts on 512 byte boundary
+828.7 Mb	6.9	Data + inodes, 512 byte block UNIX file system
+866.5 Mb	11.8	Data + inodes, 1024 byte block UNIX file system
+948.5 Mb	22.4	Data + inodes, 2048 byte block UNIX file system
+1128.3 Mb	45.6	Data + inodes, 4096 byte block UNIX file system
+.TE
+Table 1 \- Amount of wasted space as a function of block size.
+.DE
+.KE
+The space wasted is calculated to be the percentage of space
+on the disk not containing user data.
+As the block size on the disk
+increases, the waste rises quickly, to an intolerable
+45.6% waste with 4096 byte file system blocks.
+.PP
+To be able to use large blocks without undue waste,
+small files must be stored in a more efficient way.
+The new file system accomplishes this goal by allowing the division
+of a single file system block into one or more
+.I "fragments".
+The file system fragment size is specified
+at the time that the file system is created;
+each file system block can optionally be broken into
+2, 4, or 8 fragments, each of which is addressable.
+The lower bound on the size of these fragments is constrained
+by the disk sector size,
+typically 512 bytes.
+The block map associated with each cylinder group
+records the space available in a cylinder group
+at the fragment level;
+to determine if a block is available, aligned fragments are examined.
+Figure 1 shows a piece of a map from a 4096/1024 file system.
+.KF
+.DS B
+.TS
+box;
+l|c c c c.
+Bits in map	XXXX	XXOO	OOXX	OOOO
+Fragment numbers	0-3	4-7	8-11	12-15
+Block numbers	0	1	2	3
+.TE
+Figure 1 \- Example layout of blocks and fragments in a 4096/1024 file system.
+.DE
+.KE
+Each bit in the map records the status of a fragment;
+an ``X'' shows that the fragment is in use,
+while a ``O'' shows that the fragment is available for allocation.
+In this example,
+fragments 0\-5, 10, and 11 are in use,
+while fragments 6\-9, and 12\-15 are free.
+Fragments of adjoining blocks cannot be used as a full block,
+even if they are large enough.
+In this example,
+fragments 6\-9 cannot be allocated as a full block;
+only fragments 12\-15 can be coalesced into a full block.
+.PP
+On a file system with a block size of 4096 bytes
+and a fragment size of 1024 bytes,
+a file is represented by zero or more 4096 byte blocks of data,
+and possibly a single fragmented block.
+If a file system block must be fragmented to obtain
+space for a small amount of data,
+the remaining fragments of the block are made
+available for allocation to other files.
+As an example consider an 11000 byte file stored on
+a 4096/1024 byte file system.
+This file would uses two full size blocks and one
+three fragment portion of another block.
+If no block with three aligned fragments is
+available at the time the file is created,
+a full size block is split yielding the necessary
+fragments and a single unused fragment.
+This remaining fragment can be allocated to another file as needed.
+.PP
+Space is allocated to a file when a program does a \fIwrite\fP
+system call.
+Each time data is written to a file, the system checks to see if
+the size of the file has increased*.
+.FS
+* A program may be overwriting data in the middle of an existing file
+in which case space would already have been allocated.
+.FE
+If the file needs to be expanded to hold the new data,
+one of three conditions exists:
+.IP 1)
+There is enough space left in an already allocated
+block or fragment to hold the new data.
+The new data is written into the available space.
+.IP 2)
+The file contains no fragmented blocks (and the last
+block in the file
+contains insufficient space to hold the new data).
+If space exists in a block already allocated,
+the space is filled with new data.
+If the remainder of the new data contains more than
+a full block of data, a full block is allocated and
+the first full block of new data is written there.
+This process is repeated until less than a full block
+of new data remains.
+If the remaining new data to be written will
+fit in less than a full block,
+a block with the necessary fragments is located,
+otherwise a full block is located.
+The remaining new data is written into the located space.
+.IP 3)
+The file contains one or more fragments (and the 
+fragments contain insufficient space to hold the new data).
+If the size of the new data plus the size of the data
+already in the fragments exceeds the size of a full block,
+a new block is allocated.
+The contents of the fragments are copied
+to the beginning of the block
+and the remainder of the block is filled with new data.
+The process then continues as in (2) above.
+Otherwise, if the new data to be written will
+fit in less than a full block,
+a block with the necessary fragments is located,
+otherwise a full block is located.
+The contents of the existing fragments
+appended with the new data
+are written into the allocated space.
+.PP
+The problem with expanding a file one fragment at a
+a time is that data may be copied many times as a 
+fragmented block expands to a full block.
+Fragment reallocation can be minimized
+if the user program writes a full block at a time,
+except for a partial block at the end of the file.
+Since file systems with different block sizes may reside on
+the same system,
+the file system interface has been extended to provide
+application programs the optimal size for a read or write.
+For files the optimal size is the block size of the file system
+on which the file is being accessed.
+For other objects, such as pipes and sockets,
+the optimal size is the underlying buffer size.
+This feature is used by the Standard
+Input/Output Library,
+a package used by most user programs.
+This feature is also used by
+certain system utilities such as archivers and loaders
+that do their own input and output management
+and need the highest possible file system bandwidth.
+.PP
+The amount of wasted space in the 4096/1024 byte new file system
+organization is empirically observed to be about the same as in the
+1024 byte old file system organization.
+A file system with 4096 byte blocks and 512 byte fragments
+has about the same amount of wasted space as the 512 byte
+block UNIX file system.
+The new file system uses less space
+than the 512 byte or 1024 byte
+file systems for indexing information for
+large files and the same amount of space
+for small files.
+These savings are offset by the need to use
+more space for keeping track of available free blocks.
+The net result is about the same disk utilization
+when a new file system's fragment size
+equals an old file system's block size.
+.PP
+In order for the layout policies to be effective,
+a file system cannot be kept completely full.
+For each file system there is a parameter, termed
+the free space reserve, that
+gives the minimum acceptable percentage of file system
+blocks that should be free.
+If the number of free blocks drops below this level
+only the system administrator can continue to allocate blocks.
+The value of this parameter may be changed at any time,
+even when the file system is mounted and active.
+The transfer rates that appear in section 4 were measured on file
+systems kept less than 90% full (a reserve of 10%).
+If the number of free blocks falls to zero,
+the file system throughput tends to be cut in half,
+because of the inability of the file system to localize
+blocks in a file.
+If a file system's performance degrades because
+of overfilling, it may be restored by removing
+files until the amount of free space once again
+reaches the minimum acceptable level.
+Access rates for files created during periods of little
+free space may be restored by moving their data once enough
+space is available.
+The free space reserve must be added to the
+percentage of waste when comparing the organizations given
+in Table 1.
+Thus, the percentage of waste in
+an old 1024 byte UNIX file system is roughly
+comparable to a new 4096/512 byte file system
+with the free space reserve set at 5%.
+(Compare 11.8% wasted with the old file system
+to 6.9% waste + 5% reserved space in the
+new file system.)
+.NH 2 
+File system parameterization
+.PP
+Except for the initial creation of the free list,
+the old file system ignores the parameters of the underlying hardware.
+It has no information about either the physical characteristics
+of the mass storage device,
+or the hardware that interacts with it.
+A goal of the new file system is to parameterize the 
+processor capabilities and
+mass storage characteristics
+so that blocks can be allocated in an
+optimum configuration-dependent way. 
+Parameters used include the speed of the processor,
+the hardware support for mass storage transfers,
+and the characteristics of the mass storage devices.
+Disk technology is constantly improving and
+a given installation can have several different disk technologies
+running on a single processor.
+Each file system is parameterized so that it can be
+adapted to the characteristics of the disk on which
+it is placed.
+.PP
+For mass storage devices such as disks,
+the new file system tries to allocate new blocks
+on the same cylinder as the previous block in the same file. 
+Optimally, these new blocks will also be 
+rotationally well positioned.
+The distance between ``rotationally optimal'' blocks varies greatly;
+it can be a consecutive block
+or a rotationally delayed block
+depending on system characteristics.
+On a processor with an input/output channel that does not require
+any processor intervention between mass storage transfer requests,
+two consecutive disk blocks can often be accessed
+without suffering lost time because of an intervening disk revolution.
+For processors without input/output channels,
+the main processor must field an interrupt and
+prepare for a new disk transfer.
+The expected time to service this interrupt and
+schedule a new disk transfer depends on the
+speed of the main processor.
+.PP
+The physical characteristics of each disk include
+the number of blocks per track and the rate at which
+the disk spins.
+The allocation routines use this information to calculate
+the number of milliseconds required to skip over a block.
+The characteristics of the processor include
+the expected time to service an interrupt and schedule a
+new disk transfer.
+Given a block allocated to a file,
+the allocation routines calculate the number of blocks to
+skip over so that the next block in the file will
+come into position under the disk head in the expected
+amount of time that it takes to start a new
+disk transfer operation.
+For programs that sequentially access large amounts of data,
+this strategy minimizes the amount of time spent waiting for
+the disk to position itself.
+.PP
+To ease the calculation of finding rotationally optimal blocks,
+the cylinder group summary information includes
+a count of the available blocks in a cylinder
+group at different rotational positions.
+Eight rotational positions are distinguished,
+so the resolution of the
+summary information is 2 milliseconds for a typical 3600
+revolution per minute drive.
+The super-block contains a vector of lists called
+.I "rotational layout tables".
+The vector is indexed by rotational position.
+Each component of the vector
+lists the index into the block map for every data block contained
+in its rotational position.
+When looking for an allocatable block,
+the system first looks through the summary counts for a rotational
+position with a non-zero block count.
+It then uses the index of the rotational position to find the appropriate
+list to use to index through
+only the relevant parts of the block map to find a free block.
+.PP
+The parameter that defines the
+minimum number of milliseconds between the completion of a data
+transfer and the initiation of
+another data transfer on the same cylinder
+can be changed at any time,
+even when the file system is mounted and active.
+If a file system is parameterized to lay out blocks with
+a rotational separation of 2 milliseconds,
+and the disk pack is then moved to a system that has a
+processor requiring 4 milliseconds to schedule a disk operation,
+the throughput will drop precipitously because of lost disk revolutions
+on nearly every block.
+If the eventual target machine is known, 
+the file system can be parameterized for it
+even though it is initially created on a different processor.
+Even if the move is not known in advance,
+the rotational layout delay can be reconfigured after the disk is moved
+so that all further allocation is done based on the
+characteristics of the new host.
+.NH 2
+Layout policies
+.PP
+The file system layout policies are divided into two distinct parts.
+At the top level are global policies that use file system
+wide summary information to make decisions regarding
+the placement of new inodes and data blocks.
+These routines are responsible for deciding the
+placement of new directories and files.
+They also calculate rotationally optimal block layouts,
+and decide when to force a long seek to a new cylinder group
+because there are insufficient blocks left
+in the current cylinder group to do reasonable layouts.
+Below the global policy routines are
+the local allocation routines that use a locally optimal scheme to
+lay out data blocks.
+.PP
+Two methods for improving file system performance are to increase
+the locality of reference to minimize seek latency 
+as described by [Trivedi80], and
+to improve the layout of data to make larger transfers possible
+as described by [Nevalainen77].
+The global layout policies try to improve performance
+by clustering related information.
+They cannot attempt to localize all data references,
+but must also try to spread unrelated data
+among different cylinder groups.
+If too much localization is attempted,
+the local cylinder group may run out of space
+forcing the data to be scattered to non-local cylinder groups.
+Taken to an extreme,
+total localization can result in a single huge cluster of data
+resembling the old file system.
+The global policies try to balance the two conflicting
+goals of localizing data that is concurrently accessed
+while spreading out unrelated data.
+.PP
+One allocatable resource is inodes.
+Inodes are used to describe both files and directories.
+Inodes of files in the same directory are frequently accessed together.
+For example, the ``list directory'' command often accesses 
+the inode for each file in a directory.
+The layout policy tries to place all the inodes of
+files in a directory in the same cylinder group.
+To ensure that files are distributed throughout the disk,
+a different policy is used for directory allocation.
+A new directory is placed in a cylinder group that has a greater
+than average number of free inodes,
+and the smallest number of directories already in it.
+The intent of this policy is to allow the inode clustering policy
+to succeed most of the time.
+The allocation of inodes within a cylinder group is done using a
+next free strategy.
+Although this allocates the inodes randomly within a cylinder group,
+all the inodes for a particular cylinder group can be read with
+8 to 16 disk transfers.
+(At most 16 disk transfers are required because a cylinder
+group may have no more than 2048 inodes.)
+This puts a small and constant upper bound on the number of
+disk transfers required to access the inodes
+for all the files in a directory.
+In contrast, the old file system typically requires
+one disk transfer to fetch the inode for each file in a directory.
+.PP
+The other major resource is data blocks.
+Since data blocks for a file are typically accessed together,
+the policy routines try to place all data
+blocks for a file in the same cylinder group,
+preferably at rotationally optimal positions in the same cylinder.
+The problem with allocating all the data blocks
+in the same cylinder group is that large files will
+quickly use up available space in the cylinder group,
+forcing a spill over to other areas.
+Further, using all the space in a cylinder group
+causes future allocations for any file in the cylinder group
+to also spill to other areas.
+Ideally none of the cylinder groups should ever become completely full.
+The heuristic solution chosen is to
+redirect block allocation
+to a different cylinder group
+when a file exceeds 48 kilobytes,
+and at every megabyte thereafter.*
+.FS
+* The first spill over point at 48 kilobytes is the point
+at which a file on a 4096 byte block file system first
+requires a single indirect block.  This appears to be
+a natural first point at which to redirect block allocation.
+The other spillover points are chosen with the intent of
+forcing block allocation to be redirected when a
+file has used about 25% of the data blocks in a cylinder group.
+In observing the new file system in day to day use, the heuristics appear
+to work well in minimizing the number of completely filled
+cylinder groups.
+.FE
+The newly chosen cylinder group is selected from those cylinder
+groups that have a greater than average number of free blocks left.
+Although big files tend to be spread out over the disk,
+a megabyte of data is typically accessible before
+a long seek must be performed,
+and the cost of one long seek per megabyte is small.
+.PP
+The global policy routines call local allocation routines with 
+requests for specific blocks.
+The local allocation routines will
+always allocate the requested block 
+if it is free, otherwise it
+allocates a free block of the requested size that is
+rotationally closest to the requested block.
+If the global layout policies had complete information,
+they could always request unused blocks and
+the allocation routines would be reduced to simple bookkeeping.
+However, maintaining complete information is costly;
+thus the implementation of the global layout policy 
+uses heuristics that employ only partial information.
+.PP
+If a requested block is not available, the local allocator uses
+a four level allocation strategy:
+.IP 1)
+Use the next available block rotationally closest
+to the requested block on the same cylinder.  It is assumed
+here that head switching time is zero.  On disk 
+controllers where this is not the case, it may be possible
+to incorporate the time required to switch between disk platters
+when constructing the rotational layout tables.  This, however,
+has not yet been tried.
+.IP 2)
+If there are no blocks available on the same cylinder,
+use a block within the same cylinder group.
+.IP 3)
+If that cylinder group is entirely full, 
+quadratically hash the cylinder group number to choose
+another cylinder group to look for a free block.
+.IP 4)
+Finally if the hash fails, apply an exhaustive search
+to all cylinder groups.
+.PP
+Quadratic hash is used because of its speed in finding
+unused slots in nearly full hash tables [Knuth75].
+File systems that are parameterized to maintain at least
+10% free space rarely use this strategy.
+File systems that are run without maintaining any free
+space typically have so few free blocks that almost any
+allocation is random;
+the most important characteristic of
+the strategy used under such conditions is that the strategy be fast.
+.ds RH Performance
+.sp 2
+.ne 1i
diff --git a/share/doc/smm/05.fastfs/4.t b/share/doc/smm/05.fastfs/4.t
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..15e3923
--- /dev/null
+++ b/share/doc/smm/05.fastfs/4.t
@@ -0,0 +1,252 @@
+.\" Copyright (c) 1986, 1993
+.\"	The Regents of the University of California.  All rights reserved.
+.\"
+.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+.\" are met:
+.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+.\"    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+.\" 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
+.\"    must display the following acknowledgement:
+.\"	This product includes software developed by the University of
+.\"	California, Berkeley and its contributors.
+.\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
+.\"    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+.\"    without specific prior written permission.
+.\"
+.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+.\" ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
+.\"
+.\"	@(#)4.t	8.1 (Berkeley) 6/8/93
+.\"
+.ds RH Performance
+.NH 
+Performance
+.PP
+Ultimately, the proof of the effectiveness of the
+algorithms described in the previous section
+is the long term performance of the new file system.
+.PP
+Our empirical studies have shown that the inode layout policy has
+been effective.
+When running the ``list directory'' command on a large directory
+that itself contains many directories (to force the system
+to access inodes in multiple cylinder groups),
+the number of disk accesses for inodes is cut by a factor of two.
+The improvements are even more dramatic for large directories
+containing only files,
+disk accesses for inodes being cut by a factor of eight.
+This is most encouraging for programs such as spooling daemons that
+access many small files,
+since these programs tend to flood the
+disk request queue on the old file system.
+.PP
+Table 2 summarizes the measured throughput of the new file system.
+Several comments need to be made about the conditions under which these
+tests were run.
+The test programs measure the rate at which user programs can transfer
+data to or from a file without performing any processing on it.
+These programs must read and write enough data to
+insure that buffering in the
+operating system does not affect the results.
+They are also run at least three times in succession;
+the first to get the system into a known state
+and the second two to insure that the 
+experiment has stabilized and is repeatable.
+The tests used and their results are
+discussed in detail in [Kridle83]\(dg.
+.FS
+\(dg A UNIX command that is similar to the reading test that we used is
+``cp file /dev/null'', where ``file'' is eight megabytes long.
+.FE
+The systems were running multi-user but were otherwise quiescent.
+There was no contention for either the CPU or the disk arm.
+The only difference between the UNIBUS and MASSBUS tests
+was the controller.
+All tests used an AMPEX Capricorn 330 megabyte Winchester disk.
+As Table 2 shows, all file system test runs were on a VAX 11/750.
+All file systems had been in production use for at least
+a month before being measured.
+The same number of system calls were performed in all tests;
+the basic system call overhead was a negligible portion of
+the total running time of the tests.
+.KF
+.DS B
+.TS
+box;
+c c|c s s
+c c|c c c.
+Type of	Processor and	Read
+File System	Bus Measured	Speed	Bandwidth	% CPU
+_
+old 1024	750/UNIBUS	29 Kbytes/sec	29/983 3%	11%
+new 4096/1024	750/UNIBUS	221 Kbytes/sec	221/983 22%	43%
+new 8192/1024	750/UNIBUS	233 Kbytes/sec	233/983 24%	29%
+new 4096/1024	750/MASSBUS	466 Kbytes/sec	466/983 47%	73%
+new 8192/1024	750/MASSBUS	466 Kbytes/sec	466/983 47%	54%
+.TE
+.ce 1
+Table 2a \- Reading rates of the old and new UNIX file systems.
+.TS
+box;
+c c|c s s
+c c|c c c.
+Type of	Processor and	Write
+File System	Bus Measured	Speed	Bandwidth	% CPU
+_
+old 1024	750/UNIBUS	48 Kbytes/sec	48/983 5%	29%
+new 4096/1024	750/UNIBUS	142 Kbytes/sec	142/983 14%	43%
+new 8192/1024	750/UNIBUS	215 Kbytes/sec	215/983 22%	46%
+new 4096/1024	750/MASSBUS	323 Kbytes/sec	323/983 33%	94%
+new 8192/1024	750/MASSBUS	466 Kbytes/sec	466/983 47%	95%
+.TE
+.ce 1
+Table 2b \- Writing rates of the old and new UNIX file systems.
+.DE
+.KE
+.PP
+Unlike the old file system,
+the transfer rates for the new file system do not
+appear to change over time.
+The throughput rate is tied much more strongly to the
+amount of free space that is maintained.
+The measurements in Table 2 were based on a file system
+with a 10% free space reserve.
+Synthetic work loads suggest that throughput deteriorates
+to about half the rates given in Table 2 when the file
+systems are full.
+.PP
+The percentage of bandwidth given in Table 2 is a measure
+of the effective utilization of the disk by the file system.
+An upper bound on the transfer rate from the disk is calculated 
+by multiplying the number of bytes on a track by the number
+of revolutions of the disk per second.
+The bandwidth is calculated by comparing the data rates
+the file system is able to achieve as a percentage of this rate.
+Using this metric, the old file system is only
+able to use about 3\-5% of the disk bandwidth,
+while the new file system uses up to 47%
+of the bandwidth.
+.PP
+Both reads and writes are faster in the new system than in the old system.
+The biggest factor in this speedup is because of the larger
+block size used by the new file system.
+The overhead of allocating blocks in the new system is greater
+than the overhead of allocating blocks in the old system,
+however fewer blocks need to be allocated in the new system
+because they are bigger.
+The net effect is that the cost per byte allocated is about
+the same for both systems.
+.PP
+In the new file system, the reading rate is always at least
+as fast as the writing rate.
+This is to be expected since the kernel must do more work when
+allocating blocks than when simply reading them.
+Note that the write rates are about the same 
+as the read rates in the 8192 byte block file system;
+the write rates are slower than the read rates in the 4096 byte block
+file system.
+The slower write rates occur because
+the kernel has to do twice as many disk allocations per second,
+making the processor unable to keep up with the disk transfer rate.
+.PP
+In contrast the old file system is about 50%
+faster at writing files than reading them.
+This is because the write system call is asynchronous and
+the kernel can generate disk transfer
+requests much faster than they can be serviced,
+hence disk transfers queue up in the disk buffer cache.
+Because the disk buffer cache is sorted by minimum seek distance,
+the average seek between the scheduled disk writes is much
+less than it would be if the data blocks were written out
+in the random disk order in which they are generated.
+However when the file is read,
+the read system call is processed synchronously so
+the disk blocks must be retrieved from the disk in the
+non-optimal seek order in which they are requested.
+This forces the disk scheduler to do long
+seeks resulting in a lower throughput rate.
+.PP
+In the new system the blocks of a file are more optimally
+ordered on the disk.
+Even though reads are still synchronous, 
+the requests are presented to the disk in a much better order.
+Even though the writes are still asynchronous,
+they are already presented to the disk in minimum seek
+order so there is no gain to be had by reordering them.
+Hence the disk seek latencies that limited the old file system
+have little effect in the new file system.
+The cost of allocation is the factor in the new system that 
+causes writes to be slower than reads.
+.PP
+The performance of the new file system is currently
+limited by memory to memory copy operations
+required to move data from disk buffers in the
+system's address space to data buffers in the user's
+address space.  These copy operations account for
+about 40% of the time spent performing an input/output operation.
+If the buffers in both address spaces were properly aligned, 
+this transfer could be performed without copying by
+using the VAX virtual memory management hardware.
+This would be especially desirable when transferring
+large amounts of data.
+We did not implement this because it would change the
+user interface to the file system in two major ways:
+user programs would be required to allocate buffers on page boundaries, 
+and data would disappear from buffers after being written.
+.PP
+Greater disk throughput could be achieved by rewriting the disk drivers
+to chain together kernel buffers.
+This would allow contiguous disk blocks to be read
+in a single disk transaction.
+Many disks used with UNIX systems contain either
+32 or 48 512 byte sectors per track.
+Each track holds exactly two or three 8192 byte file system blocks,
+or four or six 4096 byte file system blocks.
+The inability to use contiguous disk blocks
+effectively limits the performance
+on these disks to less than 50% of the available bandwidth.
+If the next block for a file cannot be laid out contiguously,
+then the minimum spacing to the next allocatable
+block on any platter is between a sixth and a half a revolution.
+The implication of this is that the best possible layout without
+contiguous blocks uses only half of the bandwidth of any given track.
+If each track contains an odd number of sectors, 
+then it is possible to resolve the rotational delay to any number of sectors
+by finding a block that begins at the desired 
+rotational position on another track.
+The reason that block chaining has not been implemented is because it
+would require rewriting all the disk drivers in the system,
+and the current throughput rates are already limited by the
+speed of the available processors.
+.PP
+Currently only one block is allocated to a file at a time.
+A technique used by the DEMOS file system
+when it finds that a file is growing rapidly,
+is to preallocate several blocks at once,
+releasing them when the file is closed if they remain unused.
+By batching up allocations, the system can reduce the
+overhead of allocating at each write,
+and it can cut down on the number of disk writes needed to
+keep the block pointers on the disk
+synchronized with the block allocation [Powell79].
+This technique was not included because block allocation 
+currently accounts for less than 10% of the time spent in
+a write system call and, once again, the
+current throughput rates are already limited by the speed
+of the available processors.
+.ds RH Functional enhancements
+.sp 2
+.ne 1i
diff --git a/share/doc/smm/05.fastfs/5.t b/share/doc/smm/05.fastfs/5.t
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..96d721a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/share/doc/smm/05.fastfs/5.t
@@ -0,0 +1,293 @@
+.\" Copyright (c) 1986, 1993
+.\"	The Regents of the University of California.  All rights reserved.
+.\"
+.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+.\" are met:
+.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+.\"    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+.\" 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
+.\"    must display the following acknowledgement:
+.\"	This product includes software developed by the University of
+.\"	California, Berkeley and its contributors.
+.\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
+.\"    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+.\"    without specific prior written permission.
+.\"
+.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+.\" ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
+.\"
+.\"	@(#)5.t	8.1 (Berkeley) 6/8/93
+.\"
+.ds RH Functional enhancements
+.NH 
+File system functional enhancements
+.PP
+The performance enhancements to the
+UNIX file system did not require
+any changes to the semantics or
+data structures visible to application programs.
+However, several changes had been generally desired for some 
+time but had not been introduced because they would require users to 
+dump and restore all their file systems.
+Since the new file system already
+required all existing file systems to
+be dumped and restored, 
+these functional enhancements were introduced at this time.
+.NH 2
+Long file names
+.PP
+File names can now be of nearly arbitrary length.
+Only programs that read directories are affected by this change.
+To promote portability to UNIX systems that
+are not running the new file system, a set of directory
+access routines have been introduced to provide a consistent
+interface to directories on both old and new systems.
+.PP
+Directories are allocated in 512 byte units called chunks.
+This size is chosen so that each allocation can be transferred
+to disk in a single operation.
+Chunks are broken up into variable length records termed
+directory entries.  A directory entry
+contains the information necessary to map the name of a
+file to its associated inode.
+No directory entry is allowed to span multiple chunks.
+The first three fields of a directory entry are fixed length
+and contain: an inode number, the size of the entry, and the length
+of the file name contained in the entry.
+The remainder of an entry is variable length and contains
+a null terminated file name, padded to a 4 byte boundary.
+The maximum length of a file name in a directory is
+currently 255 characters.
+.PP
+Available space in a directory is recorded by having
+one or more entries accumulate the free space in their
+entry size fields.  This results in directory entries
+that are larger than required to hold the
+entry name plus fixed length fields.  Space allocated
+to a directory should always be completely accounted for
+by totaling up the sizes of its entries.
+When an entry is deleted from a directory,
+its space is returned to a previous entry
+in the same directory chunk by increasing the size of the
+previous entry by the size of the deleted entry.
+If the first entry of a directory chunk is free, then 
+the entry's inode number is set to zero to indicate
+that it is unallocated.
+.NH 2
+File locking
+.PP
+The old file system had no provision for locking files.
+Processes that needed to synchronize the updates of a
+file had to use a separate ``lock'' file.
+A process would try to create a ``lock'' file. 
+If the creation succeeded, then the process
+could proceed with its update;
+if the creation failed, then the process would wait and try again.
+This mechanism had three drawbacks.
+Processes consumed CPU time by looping over attempts to create locks.
+Locks left lying around because of system crashes had
+to be manually removed (normally in a system startup command script).
+Finally, processes running as system administrator
+are always permitted to create files,
+so were forced to use a different mechanism.
+While it is possible to get around all these problems,
+the solutions are not straight forward,
+so a mechanism for locking files has been added.
+.PP
+The most general schemes allow multiple processes
+to concurrently update a file.
+Several of these techniques are discussed in [Peterson83].
+A simpler technique is to serialize access to a file with locks.
+To attain reasonable efficiency,
+certain applications require the ability to lock pieces of a file.
+Locking down to the byte level has been implemented in the
+Onyx file system by [Bass81].
+However, for the standard system applications,
+a mechanism that locks at the granularity of a file is sufficient.
+.PP
+Locking schemes fall into two classes,
+those using hard locks and those using advisory locks.
+The primary difference between advisory locks and hard locks is the
+extent of enforcement.
+A hard lock is always enforced when a program tries to
+access a file;
+an advisory lock is only applied when it is requested by a program.
+Thus advisory locks are only effective when all programs accessing
+a file use the locking scheme.
+With hard locks there must be some override
+policy implemented in the kernel.
+With advisory locks the policy is left to the user programs.
+In the UNIX system, programs with system administrator
+privilege are allowed override any protection scheme.
+Because many of the programs that need to use locks must
+also run as the system administrator,
+we chose to implement advisory locks rather than 
+create an additional protection scheme that was inconsistent
+with the UNIX philosophy or could
+not be used by system administration programs.
+.PP
+The file locking facilities allow cooperating programs to apply
+advisory
+.I shared
+or
+.I exclusive
+locks on files.
+Only one process may have an exclusive
+lock on a file while multiple shared locks may be present.
+Both shared and exclusive locks cannot be present on
+a file at the same time.
+If any lock is requested when
+another process holds an exclusive lock,
+or an exclusive lock is requested when another process holds any lock,
+the lock request will block until the lock can be obtained.
+Because shared and exclusive locks are advisory only,
+even if a process has obtained a lock on a file,
+another process may access the file.
+.PP
+Locks are applied or removed only on open files.
+This means that locks can be manipulated without
+needing to close and reopen a file.
+This is useful, for example, when a process wishes
+to apply a shared lock, read some information
+and determine whether an update is required, then
+apply an exclusive lock and update the file.
+.PP
+A request for a lock will cause a process to block if the lock
+can not be immediately obtained.
+In certain instances this is unsatisfactory.
+For example, a process that
+wants only to check if a lock is present would require a separate
+mechanism to find out this information.
+Consequently, a process may specify that its locking
+request should return with an error if a lock can not be immediately
+obtained.
+Being able to conditionally request a lock
+is useful to ``daemon'' processes
+that wish to service a spooling area.
+If the first instance of the
+daemon locks the directory where spooling takes place,
+later daemon processes can
+easily check to see if an active daemon exists.
+Since locks exist only while the locking processes exist,
+lock files can never be left active after
+the processes exit or if the system crashes.
+.PP
+Almost no deadlock detection is attempted.
+The only deadlock detection done by the system is that the file
+to which a lock is applied must not already have a
+lock of the same type (i.e. the second of two successive calls
+to apply a lock of the same type will fail).
+.NH 2
+Symbolic links
+.PP
+The traditional UNIX file system allows multiple
+directory entries in the same file system
+to reference a single file.  Each directory entry
+``links'' a file's name to an inode and its contents.
+The link concept is fundamental;
+inodes do not reside in directories, but exist separately and
+are referenced by links.
+When all the links to an inode are removed,
+the inode is deallocated.
+This style of referencing an inode does
+not allow references across physical file
+systems, nor does it support inter-machine linkage. 
+To avoid these limitations
+.I "symbolic links"
+similar to the scheme used by Multics [Feiertag71] have been added.
+.PP
+A symbolic link is implemented as a file that contains a pathname.
+When the system encounters a symbolic link while
+interpreting a component of a pathname,
+the contents of the symbolic link is prepended to the rest
+of the pathname, and this name is interpreted to yield the
+resulting pathname.
+In UNIX, pathnames are specified relative to the root
+of the file system hierarchy, or relative to a process's
+current working directory.  Pathnames specified relative
+to the root are called absolute pathnames.  Pathnames
+specified relative to the current working directory are
+termed relative pathnames.
+If a symbolic link contains an absolute pathname,
+the absolute pathname is used,
+otherwise the contents of the symbolic link is evaluated
+relative to the location of the link in the file hierarchy.
+.PP
+Normally programs do not want to be aware that there is a
+symbolic link in a pathname that they are using.
+However certain system utilities
+must be able to detect and manipulate symbolic links.
+Three new system calls provide the ability to detect, read, and write
+symbolic links; seven system utilities required changes
+to use these calls.
+.PP
+In future Berkeley software distributions
+it may be possible to reference file systems located on
+remote machines using pathnames.  When this occurs,
+it will be possible to create symbolic links that span machines.
+.NH 2
+Rename
+.PP
+Programs that create a new version of an existing
+file typically create the
+new version as a temporary file and then rename the temporary file
+with the name of the target file.
+In the old UNIX file system renaming required three calls to the system.
+If a program were interrupted or the system crashed between these calls,
+the target file could be left with only its temporary name.
+To eliminate this possibility the \fIrename\fP system call
+has been added.  The rename call does the rename operation
+in a fashion that guarantees the existence of the target name.
+.PP
+Rename works both on data files and directories.
+When renaming directories,
+the system must do special validation checks to insure
+that the directory tree structure is not corrupted by the creation
+of loops or inaccessible directories.
+Such corruption would occur if a parent directory were moved
+into one of its descendants.
+The validation check requires tracing the descendents of the target
+directory to insure that it does not include the directory being moved.
+.NH 2
+Quotas
+.PP
+The UNIX system has traditionally attempted to share all available
+resources to the greatest extent possible.
+Thus any single user can allocate all the available space
+in the file system.
+In certain environments this is unacceptable.
+Consequently, a quota mechanism has been added for restricting the
+amount of file system resources that a user can obtain.
+The quota mechanism sets limits on both the number of inodes
+and the number of disk blocks that a user may allocate.
+A separate quota can be set for each user on each file system.
+Resources are given both a hard and a soft limit.
+When a program exceeds a soft limit,
+a warning is printed on the users terminal;
+the offending program is not terminated
+unless it exceeds its hard limit.
+The idea is that users should stay below their soft limit between
+login sessions,
+but they may use more resources while they are actively working.
+To encourage this behavior,
+users are warned when logging in if they are over
+any of their soft limits.
+If users fails to correct the problem for too many login sessions,
+they are eventually reprimanded by having their soft limit
+enforced as their hard limit.
+.ds RH Acknowledgements
+.sp 2
+.ne 1i
diff --git a/share/doc/smm/05.fastfs/6.t b/share/doc/smm/05.fastfs/6.t
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..40be6aa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/share/doc/smm/05.fastfs/6.t
@@ -0,0 +1,159 @@
+.\" Copyright (c) 1986, 1993
+.\"	The Regents of the University of California.  All rights reserved.
+.\"
+.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+.\" are met:
+.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+.\"    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+.\" 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
+.\"    must display the following acknowledgement:
+.\"	This product includes software developed by the University of
+.\"	California, Berkeley and its contributors.
+.\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
+.\"    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+.\"    without specific prior written permission.
+.\"
+.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+.\" ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
+.\"
+.\"	@(#)6.t	8.1 (Berkeley) 6/8/93
+.\"
+.nr H2 1
+.ds RH Acknowledgements
+.SH
+\s+2Acknowledgements\s0
+.PP
+We thank Robert Elz for his ongoing interest in the new file system,
+and for adding disk quotas in a rational and efficient manner.
+We also acknowledge Dennis Ritchie for his suggestions
+on the appropriate modifications to the user interface.
+We appreciate Michael Powell's explanations on how
+the DEMOS file system worked;
+many of his ideas were used in this implementation.
+Special commendation goes to Peter Kessler and Robert Henry for acting
+like real users during the early debugging stage when file systems were
+less stable than they should have been.
+The criticisms and suggestions by the reviews contributed significantly
+to the coherence of the paper.
+Finally we thank our sponsors,
+the National Science Foundation under grant MCS80-05144,
+and the Defense Advance Research Projects Agency (DoD) under
+ARPA Order No. 4031 monitored by Naval Electronic System Command under
+Contract No. N00039-82-C-0235.
+.ds RH References
+.nr H2 1
+.sp 2
+.SH
+\s+2References\s0
+.LP
+.IP [Almes78] 20
+Almes, G., and Robertson, G.
+"An Extensible File System for Hydra"
+Proceedings of the Third International Conference on Software Engineering,
+IEEE, May 1978.
+.IP [Bass81] 20
+Bass, J.
+"Implementation Description for File Locking",
+Onyx Systems Inc, 73 E. Trimble Rd, San Jose, CA 95131
+Jan 1981.
+.IP [Feiertag71] 20
+Feiertag, R. J. and Organick, E. I., 
+"The Multics Input-Output System",
+Proceedings of the Third Symposium on Operating Systems Principles,
+ACM, Oct 1971. pp 35-41
+.IP [Ferrin82a] 20
+Ferrin, T.E.,
+"Performance and Robustness Improvements in Version 7 UNIX",
+Computer Graphics Laboratory Technical Report 2,
+School of Pharmacy, University of California,
+San Francisco, January 1982.
+Presented at the 1982 Winter Usenix Conference, Santa Monica, California.
+.IP [Ferrin82b] 20
+Ferrin, T.E.,
+"Performance Issuses of VMUNIX Revisited",
+;login: (The Usenix Association Newsletter), Vol 7, #5, November 1982. pp 3-6
+.IP [Kridle83] 20
+Kridle, R., and McKusick, M.,
+"Performance Effects of Disk Subsystem Choices for
+VAX Systems Running 4.2BSD UNIX",
+Computer Systems Research Group, Dept of EECS, Berkeley, CA 94720,
+Technical Report #8.
+.IP [Kowalski78] 20
+Kowalski, T.
+"FSCK - The UNIX System Check Program",
+Bell Laboratory, Murray Hill, NJ 07974. March 1978
+.IP [Knuth75] 20
+Kunth, D.
+"The Art of Computer Programming",
+Volume 3 - Sorting and Searching,
+Addison-Wesley Publishing Company Inc, Reading, Mass, 1975. pp 506-549
+.IP [Maruyama76]
+Maruyama, K., and Smith, S.
+"Optimal reorganization of Distributed Space Disk Files",
+CACM, 19, 11. Nov 1976. pp 634-642
+.IP [Nevalainen77] 20
+Nevalainen, O., Vesterinen, M.
+"Determining Blocking Factors for Sequential Files by Heuristic Methods",
+The Computer Journal, 20, 3. Aug 1977. pp 245-247
+.IP [Pechura83] 20
+Pechura, M., and Schoeffler, J.
+"Estimating File Access Time of Floppy Disks",
+CACM, 26, 10. Oct 1983. pp 754-763
+.IP [Peterson83] 20
+Peterson, G.
+"Concurrent Reading While Writing",
+ACM Transactions on Programming Languages and Systems,
+ACM, 5, 1. Jan 1983. pp 46-55
+.IP [Powell79] 20
+Powell, M.
+"The DEMOS File System",
+Proceedings of the Sixth Symposium on Operating Systems Principles,
+ACM, Nov 1977. pp 33-42
+.IP [Ritchie74] 20
+Ritchie, D. M. and Thompson, K.,
+"The UNIX Time-Sharing System",
+CACM 17, 7. July 1974. pp 365-375
+.IP [Smith81a] 20
+Smith, A.
+"Input/Output Optimization and Disk Architectures: A Survey",
+Performance and Evaluation 1. Jan 1981. pp 104-117
+.IP [Smith81b] 20
+Smith, A.
+"Bibliography on File and I/O System Optimization and Related Topics",
+Operating Systems Review, 15, 4. Oct 1981. pp 39-54
+.IP [Symbolics81] 20
+"Symbolics File System",
+Symbolics Inc, 9600 DeSoto Ave, Chatsworth, CA 91311
+Aug 1981.
+.IP [Thompson78] 20
+Thompson, K.
+"UNIX Implementation",
+Bell System Technical Journal, 57, 6, part 2. pp 1931-1946
+July-August 1978.
+.IP [Thompson80] 20
+Thompson, M.
+"Spice File System",
+Carnegie-Mellon University,
+Department of Computer Science, Pittsburg, PA 15213
+#CMU-CS-80, Sept 1980.
+.IP [Trivedi80] 20
+Trivedi, K.
+"Optimal Selection of CPU Speed, Device Capabilities, and File Assignments",
+Journal of the ACM, 27, 3. July 1980. pp 457-473
+.IP [White80] 20
+White, R. M.
+"Disk Storage Technology",
+Scientific American, 243(2), August 1980.
diff --git a/share/doc/smm/05.fastfs/Makefile b/share/doc/smm/05.fastfs/Makefile
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..059887e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/share/doc/smm/05.fastfs/Makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,10 @@
+#	@(#)Makefile	8.1 (Berkeley) 6/8/93
+
+DIR=	smm/05.fastfs
+SRCS=	0.t 1.t 2.t 3.t 4.t 5.t 6.t
+MACROS=	-ms
+
+paper.ps: ${SRCS}
+	${TBL} ${SRCS} | ${EQN} | ${ROFF} > ${.TARGET}
+
+.include <bsd.doc.mk>
diff --git a/share/doc/smm/06.nfs/0.t b/share/doc/smm/06.nfs/0.t
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4d77f56
--- /dev/null
+++ b/share/doc/smm/06.nfs/0.t
@@ -0,0 +1,75 @@
+.\" Copyright (c) 1993
+.\"	The Regents of the University of California.  All rights reserved.
+.\"
+.\" This document is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by
+.\" Rick Macklem at The University of Guelph.
+.\"
+.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+.\" are met:
+.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+.\"    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+.\" 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
+.\"    must display the following acknowledgement:
+.\"	This product includes software developed by the University of
+.\"	California, Berkeley and its contributors.
+.\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
+.\"    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+.\"    without specific prior written permission.
+.\"
+.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+.\" ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
+.\"
+.\"	@(#)0.t	8.1 (Berkeley) 6/8/93
+.\"
+.(l C
+.sz 14
+.b "The 4.4BSD NFS Implementation"
+.sp
+.sz 10
+Rick Macklem
+.i "University of Guelph"
+.)l
+.sp 2
+.ce 1
+.sz 12
+.b "ABSTRACT"
+.eh 'SMM:06-%''The 4.4BSD NFS Implementation'
+.oh 'The 4.4BSD NFS Implementation''SMM:06-%'
+.pp
+The 4.4BSD implementation of the Network File System (NFS)\** is
+intended to interoperate with
+.(f
+\**Network File System (NFS) is believed to be a registered trademark of
+Sun Microsystems Inc.
+.)f
+other NFS Version 2 Protocol (RFC1094) implementations but also
+allows use of an alternate protocol that is hoped to provide better
+performance in certain environments.
+This paper will informally discuss these various protocol features and
+their use.
+There is a brief overview of the implementation followed
+by several sections on various problem areas related to NFS
+and some hints on how to deal with them.
+.pp
+Not Quite NFS (NQNFS) is an NFS like protocol designed to maintain full cache
+consistency between clients in a crash tolerant manner. It is an adaptation
+of the NFS protocol such that the server supports both NFS
+and NQNFS clients while maintaining full consistency between the server and
+NQNFS clients.
+It borrows heavily from work done on Spritely-NFS [Srinivasan89], but uses
+Leases [Gray89] to avoid the need to recover server state information
+after a crash.
+.sp
diff --git a/share/doc/smm/06.nfs/1.t b/share/doc/smm/06.nfs/1.t
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6804ed1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/share/doc/smm/06.nfs/1.t
@@ -0,0 +1,588 @@
+.\" Copyright (c) 1993
+.\"	The Regents of the University of California.  All rights reserved.
+.\"
+.\" This document is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by
+.\" Rick Macklem at The University of Guelph.
+.\"
+.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+.\" are met:
+.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+.\"    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+.\" 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
+.\"    must display the following acknowledgement:
+.\"	This product includes software developed by the University of
+.\"	California, Berkeley and its contributors.
+.\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
+.\"    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+.\"    without specific prior written permission.
+.\"
+.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+.\" ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
+.\"
+.\"	@(#)1.t	8.1 (Berkeley) 6/8/93
+.\"
+.sh 1 "NFS Implementation"
+.pp
+The 4.4BSD implementation of NFS and the alternate protocol nicknamed
+Not Quite NFS (NQNFS) are kernel resident, but make use of a few system
+daemons.
+The kernel implementation does not use an RPC library, handling the RPC
+request and reply messages directly in \fImbuf\fR data areas. NFS
+interfaces to the network using
+sockets via. the kernel interface available in
+\fIsys/kern/uipc_syscalls.c\fR as \fIsosend(), soreceive(),\fR...
+There are connection management routines for support of sockets for connection
+oriented protocols and timeout/retransmit support for datagram sockets on
+the client side.
+For connection oriented transport protocols,
+such as TCP/IP, there is one connection
+for each client to server mount point that is maintained until an umount.
+If the connection breaks, the client will attempt a reconnect with a new
+socket.
+The client side can operate without any daemons running, but performance
+will be improved by running nfsiod daemons that perform read-aheads
+and write-behinds.
+For the server side to function, the daemons portmap, mountd and
+nfsd must be running.
+The mountd daemon performs two important functions.
+.ip 1)
+Upon startup and after a hangup signal, mountd reads the exports
+file and pushes the export information for each local file system down
+into the kernel via. the mount system call.
+.ip 2)
+Mountd handles remote mount protocol (RFC1094, Appendix A) requests.
+.lp
+The nfsd master daemon forks off children that enter the kernel
+via. the nfssvc system call. The children normally remain kernel
+resident, providing a process context for the NFS RPC servers. The only
+exception to this is when a Kerberos [Steiner88]
+ticket is received and at that time
+the nfsd exits the kernel temporarily to verify the ticket via. the
+Kerberos libraries and then returns to the kernel with the results.
+(This only happens for Kerberos mount points as described further under
+Security.)
+Meanwhile, the master nfsd waits to accept new connections from clients
+using connection oriented transport protocols and passes the new sockets down
+into the kernel.
+The client side mount_nfs along with portmap and
+mountd are the only parts of the NFS subsystem that make any
+use of the Sun RPC library.
+.sh 1 "Mount Problems"
+.pp
+There are several problems that can be encountered at the time of an NFS
+mount, ranging from a unresponsive NFS server (crashed, network partitioned
+from client, etc.) to various interoperability problems between different
+NFS implementations.
+.pp
+On the server side,
+if the 4.4BSD NFS server will be handling any PC clients, mountd will
+require the \fB-n\fR option to enable non-root mount request servicing.
+Running of a pcnfsd\** daemon will also be necessary.
+.(f
+\** Pcnfsd is available in source form from Sun Microsystems and many
+anonymous ftp sites.
+.)f
+The server side requires that the daemons
+mountd and nfsd be running and that
+they be registered with portmap properly.
+If problems are encountered,
+the safest fix is to kill all the daemons and then restart them in
+the order portmap, mountd and nfsd.
+Other server side problems are normally caused by problems with the format
+of the exports file, which is covered under
+Security and in the exports man page.
+.pp
+On the client side, there are several mount options useful for dealing
+with server problems.
+In cases where a file system is not critical for system operation, the
+\fB-b\fR
+mount option may be specified so that mount_nfs will go into the
+background for a mount attempt on an unresponsive server.
+This is useful for mounts specified in
+\fIfstab(5)\fR,
+so that the system will not get hung while booting doing
+\fBmount -a\fR
+because a file server is not responsive.
+On the other hand, if the file system is critical to system operation, this
+option should not be used so that the client will wait for the server to
+come up before completing bootstrapping.
+There are also three mount options to help deal with interoperability issues
+with various non-BSD NFS servers. The
+\fB-P\fR
+option specifies that the NFS
+client use a reserved IP port number to satisfy some servers' security
+requirements.\**
+.(f
+\**Any security benefit of this is highly questionable and as
+such the BSD server does not require a client to use a reserved port number.
+.)f
+The
+\fB-c\fR
+option stops the NFS client from doing a \fIconnect\fR on the UDP
+socket, so that the mount works with servers that send NFS replies from
+port numbers other than the standard 2049.\**
+.(f
+\**The Encore Multimax is known
+to require this.
+.)f
+Finally, the
+\fB-g=\fInum\fR
+option sets the maximum size of the group list in the credentials passed
+to an NFS server in every RPC request. Although RFC1057 specifies a maximum
+size of 16 for the group list, some servers can't handle that many.
+If a user, particularly root doing a mount,
+keeps getting access denied from a file server, try temporarily
+reducing the number of groups that user is in to less than 5
+by editing /etc/group. If the user can then access the file system, slowly
+increase the number of groups for that user until the limit is found and
+then peg the limit there with the
+\fB-g=\fInum\fR
+option.
+This implies that the server will only see the first \fInum\fR
+groups that the user is in, which can cause some accessibility problems.
+.pp
+For sites that have many NFS servers, amd [Pendry93]
+is a useful administration tool.
+It also reduces the number of actual NFS mount points, alleviating problems
+with commands such as df(1) that hang when any of the NFS servers is
+unreachable.
+.sh 1 "Dealing with Hung Servers"
+.pp
+There are several mount options available to help a client deal with
+being hung waiting for response from a crashed or unreachable\** server.
+.(f
+\**Due to a network partitioning or similar.
+.)f
+By default, a hard mount will continue to try to contact the server
+``forever'' to complete the system call. This type of mount is appropriate
+when processes on the client that access files in the file system do not
+tolerate file I/O systems calls that return -1 with \fIerrno == EINTR\fR
+and/or access to the file system is critical for normal system operation.
+.lp
+There are two other alternatives:
+.ip 1)
+A soft mount (\fB-s\fR option) retries an RPC \fIn\fR
+times and then the corresponding
+system call returns -1 with errno set to EINTR.
+For TCP transport, the actual RPC request is not retransmitted, but the
+timeout intervals waiting for a reply from the server are done
+in the same manner as UDP for this purpose.
+The problem with this type of mount is that most applications do not
+expect an EINTR error return from file I/O system calls (since it never
+occurs for a local file system) and get confused by the error return
+from the I/O system call.
+The option
+\fB-x=\fInum\fR
+is used to set the RPC retry limit and if set too low, the error returns
+will start occurring whenever the NFS server is slow due to heavy load.
+Alternately, a large retry limit can result in a process hung for a long
+time, due to a crashed server or network partitioning.
+.ip 2)
+An interruptible mount (\fB-i\fR option) checks to see if a termination signal
+is pending for the process when waiting for server response and if it is,
+the I/O system call posts an EINTR. Normally this results in the process
+being terminated by the signal when returning from the system call.
+This feature allows you to ``^C'' out of processes that are hung
+due to unresponsive servers.
+The problem with this approach is that signals that are caught by
+a process are not recognized as termination signals
+and the process will remain hung.\**
+.(f
+\**Unfortunately, there are also some resource allocation situations in the
+BSD kernel where the termination signal will be ignored and the process
+will not terminate.
+.)f
+.sh 1 "RPC Transport Issues"
+.pp
+The NFS Version 2 protocol runs over UDP/IP transport by
+sending each Sun Remote Procedure Call (RFC1057)
+request/reply message in a single UDP
+datagram. Since UDP does not guarantee datagram delivery, the
+Remote Procedure Call (RPC) layer
+times out and retransmits an RPC request if
+no RPC reply has been received. Since this round trip timeout (RTO) value 
+is for the entire RPC operation, including RPC message transmission to the
+server, queuing at the server for an nfsd, performing the RPC and
+sending the RPC reply message back to the client, it can be highly variable
+for even a moderately loaded NFS server.
+As a result, the RTO interval must be a conservation (large) estimate, in
+order to avoid extraneous RPC request retransmits.\**
+.(f
+\**At best, an extraneous RPC request retransmit increases
+the load on the server and at worst can result in damaged files
+on the server when non-idempotent RPCs are redone [Juszczak89].
+.)f
+Also, with an 8Kbyte read/write data size
+(the default), the read/write reply/request will be an 8+Kbyte UDP datagram
+that must normally be fragmented at the IP layer for transmission.\**
+.(f
+\**6 IP fragments for an Ethernet,
+which has an maximum transmission unit of 1500bytes.
+.)f
+For IP fragments to be successfully reassembled into
+the IP datagram at the receive end, all
+fragments must be received within a fairly short ``time to live''.
+If one fragment is lost/damaged in transit,
+the entire RPC must be retransmitted and redone.
+This problem can be exaggerated by a network interface on the receiver that
+cannot handle the reception of back to back network packets. [Kent87a]
+.pp
+There are several tuning mount
+options on the client side that can prove useful when trying to
+alleviate performance problems related to UDP RPC transport.
+The options
+\fB-r=\fInum\fR
+and
+\fB-w=\fInum\fR
+specify the maximum read or write data size respectively.
+The size \fInum\fR
+should be a power of 2 (4K, 2K, 1K) and adjusted downward from the
+maximum of 8Kbytes
+whenever IP fragmentation is causing problems. The best indicator of
+IP fragmentation problems is a significant number of
+\fIfragments dropped after timeout\fR
+reported by the \fIip:\fR section of a \fBnetstat -s\fR
+command on either the client or server.
+Of course, if the fragments are being dropped at the server, it can be
+fun figuring out which client(s) are involved.
+The most likely candidates are clients that are not
+on the same local area network as the
+server or have network interfaces that do not receive several
+back to back network packets properly.
+.pp
+By default, the 4.4BSD NFS client dynamically estimates the retransmit
+timeout interval for the RPC and this appears to work reasonably well for
+many environments. However, the
+\fB-d\fR
+flag can be specified to turn off
+the dynamic estimation of retransmit timeout, so that the client will
+use a static initial timeout interval.\**
+.(f
+\**After the first retransmit timeout, the initial interval is backed off
+exponentially.
+.)f
+The
+\fB-t=\fInum\fR
+option can be used with
+\fB-d\fR
+to set the initial timeout interval to other than the default of 2 seconds.
+The best indicator that dynamic estimation should be turned off would
+be a significant number\** in the \fIX Replies\fR field and a
+.(f
+\**Even 0.1% of the total RPCs is probably significant.
+.)f
+large number in the \fIRetries\fR field
+in the \fIRpc Info:\fR section as reported
+by the \fBnfsstat\fR command.
+On the server, there would be significant numbers of \fIInprog\fR recent
+request cache hits in the \fIServer Cache Stats:\fR section as reported
+by the \fBnfsstat\fR command, when run on the server.
+.pp
+The tradeoff is that a smaller timeout interval results in a better
+average RPC response time, but increases the risk of extraneous retries
+that in turn increase server load and the possibility of damaged files
+on the server. It is probably best to err on the safe side and use a large
+(>= 2sec) fixed timeout if the dynamic retransmit timeout estimation
+seems to be causing problems.
+.pp
+An alternative to all this fiddling is to run NFS over TCP transport instead
+of UDP.
+Since the 4.4BSD TCP implementation provides reliable
+delivery with congestion control, it avoids all of the above problems.
+It also permits the use of read and write data sizes greater than the 8Kbyte
+limit for UDP transport.\**
+.(f
+\**Read/write data sizes greater than 8Kbytes will not normally improve
+performance unless the kernel constant MAXBSIZE is increased and the
+file system on the server has a block size greater than 8Kbytes.
+.)f
+NFS over TCP usually delivers comparable to significantly better performance
+than NFS over UDP
+unless the client or server processor runs at less than 5-10MIPS. For a
+slow processor, the extra CPU overhead of using TCP transport will become
+significant and TCP transport may only be useful when the client
+to server interconnect traverses congested gateways.
+The main problem with using TCP transport is that it is only supported
+between BSD clients and servers.\**
+.(f
+\**There are rumors of commercial NFS over TCP implementations on the horizon
+and these may well be worth exploring.
+.)f
+.sh 1 "Other Tuning Tricks"
+.pp
+Another mount option that may improve performance over
+certain network interconnects is \fB-a=\fInum\fR
+which sets the number of blocks that the system will
+attempt to read-ahead during sequential reading of a file. The default value
+of 1 seems to be appropriate for most situations, but a larger value might
+achieve better performance for some environments, such as a mount to a server
+across a ``high bandwidth * round trip delay'' interconnect.
+.pp
+For the adventurous, playing with the size of the buffer cache
+can also improve performance for some environments that use NFS heavily.
+Under some workloads, a buffer cache of 4-6Mbytes can result in significant
+performance improvements over 1-2Mbytes, both in client side system call
+response time and reduced server RPC load.
+The buffer cache size defaults to 10% of physical memory,
+but this can be overridden by specifying the BUFPAGES option
+in the machine's config file.\**
+.(f
+BUFPAGES is the number of physical machine pages allocated to the buffer cache.
+ie. BUFPAGES * NBPG = buffer cache size in bytes
+.)f
+When increasing the size of BUFPAGES, it is also advisable to increase the
+number of buffers NBUF by a corresponding amount.
+Note that there is a tradeoff of memory allocated to the buffer cache versus
+available for paging, which implies that making the buffer cache larger
+will increase paging rate, with possibly disastrous results.
+.sh 1 "Security Issues"
+.pp
+When a machine is running an NFS server it opens up a great big security hole.
+For ordinary NFS, the server receives client credentials
+in the RPC request as a user id
+and a list of group ids and trusts them to be authentic!
+The only tool available to restrict remote access to
+file systems with is the exports(5) file,
+so file systems should be exported with great care.
+The exports file is read by mountd upon startup and after a hangup signal
+is posted for it and then as much of the access specifications as possible are
+pushed down into the kernel for use by the nfsd(s).
+The trick here is that the kernel information is stored on a per
+local file system mount point and client host address basis and cannot refer to
+individual directories within the local server file system.
+It is best to think of the exports file as referring to the various local
+file systems and not just directory paths as mount points.
+A local file system may be exported to a specific host, all hosts that
+match a subnet mask or all other hosts (the world). The latter is very
+dangerous and should only be used for public information. It is also
+strongly recommended that file systems exported to ``the world'' be exported
+read-only.
+For each host or group of hosts, the file system can be exported read-only or
+read/write.
+You can also define one of three client user id to server credential
+mappings to help control access.
+Root (user id == 0) can be mapped to some default credentials while all other
+user ids are accepted as given.
+If the default credentials for user id equal zero
+are root, then there is essentially no remapping.
+Most NFS file systems are exported this way, most commonly mapping
+user id == 0 to the credentials for the user nobody.
+Since the client user id and group id list is used unchanged on the server
+(except for root), this also implies that
+the user id and group id space must be common between the client and server.
+(ie. user id N on the client must refer to the same user on the server)
+All user ids can be mapped to a default set of credentials, typically that of
+the user nobody. This essentially gives world access to all
+users on the corresponding hosts.
+.pp
+There is also a non-standard BSD
+\fB-kerb\fR export option that requires the client provide
+a KerberosIV rcmd service ticket to authenticate the user on the server.
+If successful, the Kerberos principal is looked up in the server's password
+and group databases to get a set of credentials and a map of client userid to
+these credentials is then cached.
+The use of TCP transport is strongly recommended,
+since the scheme depends on the TCP connection to avert replay attempts.
+Unfortunately, this option is only usable
+between BSD clients and servers since it is
+not compatible with other known ``kerberized'' NFS systems.
+To enable use of this Kerberos option, both mount_nfs on the client and
+nfsd on the server must be rebuilt with the -DKERBEROS option and
+linked to KerberosIV libraries.
+The file system is then exported to the client(s) with the \fB-kerb\fR option
+in the exports file on the server
+and the client mount specifies the
+\fB-K\fR
+and
+\fB-T\fR
+options.
+The
+\fB-m=\fIrealm\fR
+mount option may be used to specify a Kerberos Realm for the ticket
+(it must be the Kerberos Realm of the server) that is other than
+the client's local Realm.
+To access files in a \fB-kerb\fR mount point, the user must have a valid
+TGT for the server's Realm, as provided by kinit or similar.
+.pp
+As well as the standard NFS Version 2 protocol (RFC1094) implementation, BSD
+systems can use a variant of the protocol called Not Quite NFS (NQNFS) that
+supports a variety of protocol extensions.
+This protocol uses 64bit file offsets
+and sizes, an \fIaccess rpc\fR, an \fIappend\fR option on the write rpc
+and extended file attributes to support 4.4BSD file system functionality
+more fully.
+It also makes use of a variant of short term
+\fIleases\fR [Gray89] with delayed write client caching,
+in an effort to provide full cache consistency and better performance.
+This protocol is available between 4.4BSD systems only and is used when
+the \fB-q\fR mount option is specified.
+It can be used with any of the aforementioned options for NFS, such as TCP
+transport (\fB-T\fR) and KerberosIV authentication (\fB-K\fR).
+Although this protocol is experimental, it is recommended over NFS for
+mounts between 4.4BSD systems.\**
+.(f
+\**I would appreciate email from anyone who can provide
+NFS vs. NQNFS performance measurements,
+particularly fast clients, many clients or over an internetwork
+connection with a large ``bandwidth * RTT'' product.
+.)f
+.sh 1 "Monitoring NFS Activity"
+.pp
+The basic command for monitoring NFS activity on clients and servers is
+nfsstat. It reports cumulative statistics of various NFS activities,
+such as counts of the various different RPCs and cache hit rates on the client
+and server. Of particular interest on the server are the fields in the
+\fIServer Cache Stats:\fR section, which gives numbers for RPC retries received
+in the first three fields and total RPCs in the fourth. The first three fields
+should remain a very small percentage of the total. If not, it
+would indicate one or more clients doing retries too aggressively and the fix
+would be to isolate these clients,
+disable the dynamic RTO estimation on them and
+make their initial timeout interval a conservative (ie. large) value.
+.pp
+On the client side, the fields in the \fIRpc Info:\fR section are of particular
+interest, as they give an overall picture of NFS activity.
+The \fITimedOut\fR field is the number of I/O system calls that returned -1
+for ``soft'' mounts and can be reduced
+by increasing the retry limit or changing
+the mount type to ``intr'' or ``hard''.
+The \fIInvalid\fR field is a count of trashed RPC replies that are received
+and should remain zero.\**
+.(f
+\**Some NFS implementations run with UDP checksums disabled, so garbage RPC
+messages can be received.
+.)f
+The \fIX Replies\fR field counts the number of repeated RPC replies received
+from the server and is a clear indication of a too aggressive RTO estimate.
+Unfortunately, a good NFS server implementation will use a ``recent request
+cache'' [Juszczak89] that will suppress the extraneous replies.
+A large value for \fIRetries\fR indicates a problem, but
+it could be any of:
+.ip \(bu
+a too aggressive RTO estimate
+.ip \(bu
+an overloaded NFS server
+.ip \(bu
+IP fragments being dropped (gateway, client or server)
+.lp
+and requires further investigation.
+The \fIRequests\fR field is the total count of RPCs done on all servers.
+.pp
+The \fBnetstat -s\fR comes in useful during investigation of RPC transport
+problems.
+The field \fIfragments dropped after timeout\fR in
+the \fIip:\fR section indicates IP fragments are
+being lost and a significant number of these occurring indicates that the
+use of TCP transport or a smaller read/write data size is in order.
+A significant number of \fIbad checksums\fR reported in the \fIudp:\fR
+section would suggest network problems of a more generic sort.
+(cabling, transceiver or network hardware interface problems or similar)
+.pp
+There is a RPC activity logging facility for both the client and
+server side in the kernel.
+When logging is enabled by setting the kernel variable nfsrtton to
+one, the logs in the kernel structures nfsrtt (for the client side)
+and nfsdrt (for the server side) are updated upon the completion
+of each RPC in a circular manner.
+The pos element of the structure is the index of the next element
+of the log array to be updated.
+In other words, elements of the log array from \fIlog\fR[pos] to
+\fIlog\fR[pos - 1] are in chronological order.
+The include file <sys/nfsrtt.h> should be consulted for details on the
+fields in the two log structures.\**
+.(f
+\**Unfortunately, a monitoring tool that uses these logs is still in the
+planning (dreaming) stage.
+.)f
+.sh 1 "Diskless Client Support"
+.pp
+The NFS client does include kernel support for diskless/dataless operation
+where the root file system and optionally the swap area is remote NFS mounted.
+A diskless/dataless client is configured using a version of the
+``swapvmunix.c'' file as provided in the directory \fIcontrib/diskless.nfs\fR.
+If the swap device == NODEV, it specifies an NFS mounted swap area and should
+be configured the same size as set up by diskless_setup when run on the server.
+This file must be put in the \fIsys/compile/<machine_name>\fR kernel build
+directory after the config command has been run, since config does
+not know about specifying NFS root and swap areas.
+The kernel variable mountroot must be set to nfs_mountroot instead of
+ffs_mountroot and the kernel structure nfs_diskless must be filled in
+properly.
+There are some primitive system administration tools in the \fIcontrib/diskless.nfs\fR directory to assist in filling in
+the nfs_diskless structure and in setting up an NFS server for
+diskless/dataless clients.
+The tools were designed to provide a bare bones capability, to allow maximum
+flexibility when setting up different servers.
+.lp
+The tools are as follows:
+.ip \(bu
+diskless_offset.c - This little program reads a ``vmunix'' object file and
+writes the file byte offset of the nfs_diskless structure in it to
+standard out. It was kept separate because it sometimes has to
+be compiled/linked in funny ways depending on the client architecture.
+(See the comment at the beginning of it.)
+.ip \(bu
+diskless_setup.c - This program is run on the server and sets up files for a
+given client. It mostly just fills in an nfs_diskless structure and
+writes it out to either the "vmunix" file or a separate file called
+/var/diskless/setup.<official-hostname>
+.ip \(bu
+diskless_boot.c - There are two functions in here that may be used
+by a bootstrap server such as tftpd to permit sharing of the ``vmunix''
+object file for similar clients. This saves disk space on the bootstrap
+server and simplify organization, but are not critical for correct operation.
+They read the ``vmunix''
+file, but optionally fill in the nfs_diskless structure from a
+separate "setup.<official-hostname>" file so that there is only
+one copy of "vmunix" for all similar (same arch etc.) clients.
+These functions use a text file called
+/var/diskless/boot.<official-hostname> to control the netboot.
+.lp
+The basic setup steps are:
+.ip \(bu
+make a "vmunix" for the client(s) with mountroot() == nfs_mountroot()
+and swdevt[0].sw_dev == NODEV if it is to do nfs swapping as well
+(See the same swapvmunix.c file)
+.ip \(bu
+run diskless_offset on the vmunix file to find out the byte offset
+of the nfs_diskless structure
+.ip \(bu
+Run diskless_setup on the server to set up the server and fill in the
+nfs_diskless structure for that client.
+The nfs_diskless structure can either be written into the
+vmunix file (the -x option) or
+saved in /var/diskless/setup.<official-hostname>.
+.ip \(bu
+Set up the bootstrap server. If the nfs_diskless structure was written into
+the ``vmunix'' file, any vanilla bootstrap protocol such as bootp/tftp can
+be used. If the bootstrap server has been modified to use the functions in
+diskless_boot.c, then a
+file called /var/diskless/boot.<official-hostname>
+must be created.
+It is simply a two line text file, where the first line is the pathname
+of the correct ``vmunix'' file and the second line has the pathname of
+the nfs_diskless structure file and its byte offset in it.
+For example:
+.br
+	/var/diskless/vmunix.pmax
+.br
+	/var/diskless/setup.rickers.cis.uoguelph.ca 642308
+.br
+.ip \(bu
+Create a /var subtree for each client in an appropriate place on the server,
+such as /var/diskless/var/<client-hostname>/...
+By using the <client-hostname> to differentiate /var for each host,
+/etc/rc can be modified to mount the correct /var from the server.
diff --git a/share/doc/smm/06.nfs/2.t b/share/doc/smm/06.nfs/2.t
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..841dd5f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/share/doc/smm/06.nfs/2.t
@@ -0,0 +1,530 @@
+.\" Copyright (c) 1993
+.\"	The Regents of the University of California.  All rights reserved.
+.\"
+.\" This document is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by
+.\" Rick Macklem at The University of Guelph.
+.\"
+.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+.\" are met:
+.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+.\"    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+.\" 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
+.\"    must display the following acknowledgement:
+.\"	This product includes software developed by the University of
+.\"	California, Berkeley and its contributors.
+.\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
+.\"    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+.\"    without specific prior written permission.
+.\"
+.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+.\" ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
+.\"
+.\"	@(#)2.t	8.1 (Berkeley) 6/8/93
+.\"
+.sh 1 "Not Quite NFS, Crash Tolerant Cache Consistency for NFS"
+.pp
+Not Quite NFS (NQNFS) is an NFS like protocol designed to maintain full cache
+consistency between clients in a crash tolerant manner.
+It is an adaptation of the NFS protocol such that the server supports both NFS
+and NQNFS clients while maintaining full consistency between the server and
+NQNFS clients.
+This section borrows heavily from work done on Spritely-NFS [Srinivasan89],
+but uses Leases [Gray89] to avoid the need to recover server state information
+after a crash.
+The reader is strongly encouraged to read these references before
+trying to grasp the material presented here.
+.sh 2 "Overview"
+.pp
+The protocol maintains cache consistency by using a somewhat
+Sprite [Nelson88] like protocol,
+but is based on short term leases\** instead of hard state information
+about open files.
+.(f
+\** A lease is a ticket permitting an activity that is
+valid until some expiry time.
+.)f
+The basic principal is that the protocol will disable client caching of a
+file whenever that file is write shared\**.
+.(f
+\** Write sharing occurs when at least one client is modifying a file while
+other client(s) are reading the file.
+.)f
+Whenever a client wishes to cache data for a file it must hold a valid lease.
+There are three types of leases: read caching, write caching and non-caching.
+The latter type requires that all file operations be done synchronously with
+the server via. RPCs.
+A read caching lease allows for client data caching, but no file modifications
+may be done.
+A write caching lease allows for client caching of writes,
+but requires that all writes be pushed to the server when the lease expires.
+If a client has dirty buffers\**
+.(f
+\** Cached write data is not yet pushed (written) to the server.
+.)f
+when a write cache lease has almost expired, it will attempt to
+extend the lease but is required to push the dirty buffers if extension fails.
+A client gets leases by either doing a \fBGetLease RPC\fR or by piggybacking
+a \fBGetLease Request\fR onto another RPC. Piggybacking is supported for the
+frequent RPCs Getattr, Setattr, Lookup, Readlink, Read, Write and Readdir
+in an effort to minimize the number of \fBGetLease RPCs\fR required.
+All leases are at the granularity of a file, since all NFS RPCs operate on
+individual files and NFS has no intrinsic notion of a file hierarchy.
+Directories, symbolic links and file attributes may be read cached but
+are not write cached.
+The exception here is the attribute file_size, which is updated during cached
+writing on the client to reflect a growing file.
+.pp
+It is the server's responsibility to ensure that consistency is maintained
+among the NQNFS clients by disabling client caching whenever a server file
+operation would cause inconsistencies.
+The possibility of inconsistencies occurs whenever a client has
+a write caching lease and any other client,
+or local operations on the server,
+tries to access the file or when
+a modify operation is attempted on a file being read cached by client(s).
+At this time, the server sends an \fBeviction notice\fR to all clients holding
+the lease and then waits for lease termination.
+Lease termination occurs when a \fBvacated the premises\fR message has been
+received from all the clients that have signed the lease or when the lease
+expires via. timeout.
+The message pair \fBeviction notice\fR and \fBvacated the premises\fR roughly
+correspond to a Sprite server\(->client callback, but are not implemented as an
+actual RPC, to avoid the server waiting indefinitely for a reply from a dead
+client.
+.pp
+Server consistency checking can be viewed as issuing intrinsic leases for a
+file operation for the duration of the operation only. For example, the
+\fBCreate RPC\fR will get an intrinsic write lease on the directory in which
+the file is being created, disabling client read caches for that directory.
+.pp
+By relegating this responsibility to the server, consistency between the
+server and NQNFS clients is maintained when NFS clients are modifying the
+file system as well.\**
+.(f
+\** The NFS clients will continue to be \fIapproximately\fR consistent with
+the server.
+.)f
+.pp
+The leases are issued as time intervals to avoid the requirement of time of day
+clock synchronization. There are three important time constants known to
+the server. The \fBmaximum_lease_term\fR sets an upper bound on lease duration.
+The \fBclock_skew\fR is added to all lease terms on the server to correct for
+differing clock speeds between the client and server and \fBwrite_slack\fR is
+the number of seconds the server is willing to wait for a client with
+an expired write caching lease to push dirty writes.
+.pp
+The server maintains a \fBmodify_revision\fR number for each file. It is
+defined as a unsigned quadword integer that is never zero and that must
+increase whenever the corresponding file is modified on the server.
+It is used
+by the client to determine whether or not cached data for the file is
+stale.
+Generating this value is easier said than done. The current implementation
+uses the following technique, which is believed to be adequate.
+The high order longword is stored in the ufs inode and is initialized to one
+when an inode is first allocated.
+The low order longword is stored in main memory only and is initialized to
+zero when an inode is read in from disk.
+When the file is modified for the first time within a given second of
+wall clock time, the high order longword is incremented by one and
+the low order longword reset to zero.
+For subsequent modifications within the same second of wall clock
+time, the low order longword is incremented. If the low order longword wraps
+around to zero, the high order longword is incremented again.
+Since the high order longword only increments once per second and the inode
+is pushed to disk frequently during file modification, this implies
+0 \(<= Current\(miDisk \(<= 5.
+When the inode is read in from disk, 10
+is added to the high order longword, which ensures that the quadword
+is greater than any value it could have had before a crash.
+This introduces apparent modifications every time the inode falls out of
+the LRU inode cache, but this should only reduce the client caching performance
+by a (hopefully) small margin.
+.sh 2 "Crash Recovery and other Failure Scenarios"
+.pp
+The server must maintain the state of all the current leases held by clients.
+The nice thing about short term leases is that maximum_lease_term seconds
+after the server stops issuing leases, there are no current leases left.
+As such, server crash recovery does not require any state recovery. After
+rebooting, the server refuses to service any RPCs except for writes until
+write_slack seconds after the last lease would have expired\**.
+.(f
+\** The last lease expiry time may be safely estimated as
+"boottime+maximum_lease_term+clock_skew" for machines that cannot store
+it in nonvolatile RAM.
+.)f
+By then, the server would not have any outstanding leases to recover the
+state of and the clients have had at least write_slack seconds to push dirty
+writes to the server and get the server sync'd up to date. After this, the
+server simply services requests in a manner similar to NFS.
+In an effort to minimize the effect of "recovery storms" [Baker91],
+the server replies \fBtry_again_later\fR to the RPCs it is not
+yet ready to service.
+.pp
+After a client crashes, the server may have to wait for a lease to timeout
+before servicing a request if write sharing of a file with a cachable lease
+on the client is about to occur.
+As for the client, it simply starts up getting any leases it now needs. Any
+outstanding leases for that client on the server prior to the crash will either be renewed or expire
+via timeout.
+.pp
+Certain network partitioning failures are more problematic. If a client to
+server network connection is severed just before a write caching lease expires,
+the client cannot push the dirty writes to the server. After the lease expires
+on the server, the server permits other clients to access the file with the
+potential of getting stale data. Unfortunately I believe this failure scenario
+is intrinsic in any delay write caching scheme unless the server is required to
+wait \fBforever\fR for a client to regain contact\**.
+.(f
+\** Gray and Cheriton avoid this problem by using a \fBwrite through\fR policy.
+.)f
+Since the write caching lease has expired on the client,
+it will sync up with the
+server as soon as the network connection has been re-established.
+.pp
+There is another failure condition that can occur when the server is congested.
+The worst case scenario would have the client pushing dirty writes to the server
+but a large request queue on the server delays these writes for more than
+\fBwrite_slack\fR seconds. It is hoped that a congestion control scheme using
+the \fBtry_again_later\fR RPC reply after booting combined with
+the following lease termination rule for write caching leases
+can minimize the risk of this occurrence.
+A write caching lease is only terminated on the server when there are have
+been no writes to the file and the server has not been overloaded during
+the previous write_slack seconds. The server has not been overloaded
+is approximated by a test for sleeping nfsd(s) at the end of the write_slack
+period.
+.sh 2 "Server Disk Full"
+.pp
+There is a serious unresolved problem for delayed write caching with respect to
+server disk space allocation.
+When the disk on the file server is full, delayed write RPCs can fail
+due to "out of space".
+For NFS, this occurrence results in an error return from the close system
+call on the file, since the dirty blocks are pushed on close.
+Processes writing important files can check for this error return
+to ensure that the file was written successfully.
+For NQNFS, the dirty blocks are not pushed on close and as such the client
+may not attempt the write RPC until after the process has done the close
+which implies no error return from the close.
+For the current prototype,
+the only solution is to modify programs writing important
+file(s) to call fsync and check for an error return from it instead of close.
+.sh 2 "Protocol Details"
+.pp
+The protocol specification is identical to that of NFS [Sun89] except for
+the following changes.
+.ip \(bu
+RPC Information
+.(l
+        Program Number 300105
+        Version Number 1
+.)l
+.ip \(bu
+Readdir_and_Lookup RPC
+.(l
+        struct readdirlookargs {
+                fhandle file;
+                nfscookie cookie;
+                unsigned count;
+                unsigned duration;
+        };
+
+        struct entry {
+                unsigned cachable;
+                unsigned duration;
+                modifyrev rev;
+                fhandle entry_fh;
+                nqnfs_fattr entry_attrib;
+                unsigned fileid;
+                filename name;
+                nfscookie cookie;
+                entry *nextentry;
+        };
+
+        union readdirlookres switch (stat status) {
+        case NFS_OK:
+                struct {
+                        entry *entries;
+                        bool eof;
+                } readdirlookok;
+        default:
+                void;
+        };
+
+        readdirlookres
+        NQNFSPROC_READDIRLOOK(readdirlookargs) = 18;
+.)l
+Reads entries in a directory in a manner analogous to the NFSPROC_READDIR RPC
+in NFS, but returns the file handle and attributes of each entry as well.
+This allows the attribute and lookup caches to be primed.
+.ip \(bu
+Get Lease RPC
+.(l
+        struct getleaseargs {
+                fhandle file;
+                cachetype readwrite;
+                unsigned duration;
+        };
+
+        union getleaseres switch (stat status) {
+        case NFS_OK:
+                bool cachable;
+                unsigned duration;
+                modifyrev rev;
+                nqnfs_fattr attributes;
+        default:
+                void;
+        };
+
+        getleaseres
+        NQNFSPROC_GETLEASE(getleaseargs) = 19;
+.)l
+Gets a lease for "file" valid for "duration" seconds from when the lease
+was issued on the server\**.
+.(f
+\** To be safe, the client may only assume that the lease is valid
+for ``duration'' seconds from when the RPC request was sent to the server.
+.)f
+The lease permits client caching if "cachable" is true.
+The modify revision level and attributes for the file are also returned.
+.ip \(bu
+Eviction Message
+.(l
+        void
+        NQNFSPROC_EVICTED (fhandle) = 21;
+.)l
+This message is sent from the server to the client. When the client receives
+the message, it should flush data associated with the file represented by
+"fhandle" from its caches and then send the \fBVacated Message\fR back to
+the server. Flushing includes pushing any dirty writes via. write RPCs.
+.ip \(bu
+Vacated Message
+.(l
+        void
+        NQNFSPROC_VACATED (fhandle) = 20;
+.)l
+This message is sent from the client to the server in response to the
+\fBEviction Message\fR. See above.
+.ip \(bu
+Access RPC
+.(l
+        struct accessargs {
+                fhandle file;
+                bool read_access;
+                bool write_access;
+                bool exec_access;
+        };
+
+        stat
+        NQNFSPROC_ACCESS(accessargs) = 22;
+.)l
+The access RPC does permission checking on the server for the given type
+of access required by the client for the file.
+Use of this RPC avoids accessibility problems caused by client->server uid
+mapping.
+.ip \(bu
+Piggybacked Get Lease Request
+.pp
+The piggybacked get lease request is functionally equivalent to the Get Lease
+RPC except that is attached to one of the other NQNFS RPC requests as follows.
+A getleaserequest is prepended to all of the request arguments for NQNFS
+and a getleaserequestres is inserted in all NFS result structures just after
+the "stat" field only if "stat == NFS_OK".
+.(l
+        union getleaserequest switch (cachetype type) {
+        case NQLREAD:
+        case NQLWRITE:
+                unsigned duration;
+        default:
+                void;
+        };
+
+        union getleaserequestres switch (cachetype type) {
+        case NQLREAD:
+        case NQLWRITE:
+                bool cachable;
+                unsigned duration;
+                modifyrev rev;
+        default:
+                void;
+        };
+.)l
+The get lease request applies to the file that the attached RPC operates on
+and the file attributes remain in the same location as for the NFS RPC reply
+structure.
+.ip \(bu
+Three additional "stat" values
+.pp
+Three additional values have been added to the enumerated type "stat".
+.(l
+        NQNFS_EXPIRED=500
+        NQNFS_TRYLATER=501
+        NQNFS_AUTHERR=502
+.)l
+The "expired" value indicates that a lease has expired.
+The "try later"
+value is returned by the server when it wishes the client to retry the
+RPC request after a short delay. It is used during crash recovery (Section 2)
+and may also be useful for server congestion control.
+The "authetication error" value is returned for kerberized mount points to
+indicate that there is no cached authentication mapping and a Kerberos ticket
+for the principal is required.
+.sh 2 "Data Types"
+.ip \(bu
+cachetype
+.(l
+        enum cachetype {
+                NQLNONE = 0,
+                NQLREAD = 1,
+                NQLWRITE = 2
+        };
+.)l
+Type of lease requested. NQLNONE is used to indicate no piggybacked lease
+request.
+.ip \(bu
+modifyrev
+.(l
+        typedef unsigned hyper modifyrev;
+.)l
+The "modifyrev" is a unsigned quadword integer value that is never zero
+and increases every time the corresponding file is modified on the server.
+.ip \(bu
+nqnfs_time
+.(l
+        struct nqnfs_time {
+                unsigned seconds;
+                unsigned nano_seconds;
+        };
+.)l
+For NQNFS times are handled at nano second resolution instead of micro second
+resolution for NFS.
+.ip \(bu
+nqnfs_fattr
+.(l
+        struct nqnfs_fattr {
+                ftype type;
+                unsigned mode;
+                unsigned nlink;
+                unsigned uid;
+                unsigned gid;
+                unsigned hyper size;
+                unsigned blocksize;
+                unsigned rdev;
+                unsigned hyper bytes;
+                unsigned fsid;
+                unsigned fileid;
+                nqnfs_time atime;
+                nqnfs_time mtime;
+                nqnfs_time ctime;
+                unsigned flags;
+                unsigned generation;
+                modifyrev rev;
+        };
+.)l
+The nqnfs_fattr structure is modified from the NFS fattr so that it stores
+the file size as a 64bit quantity and the storage occupied as a 64bit number
+of bytes. It also has fields added for the 4.4BSD va_flags and va_gen fields
+as well as the file's modify rev level.
+.ip \(bu
+nqnfs_sattr
+.(l
+        struct nqnfs_sattr {
+                unsigned mode;
+                unsigned uid;
+                unsigned gid;
+                unsigned hyper size;
+                nqnfs_time atime;
+                nqnfs_time mtime;
+                unsigned flags;
+                unsigned rdev;
+        };
+.)l
+The nqnfs_sattr structure is modified from the NFS sattr structure in the
+same manner as fattr.
+.lp
+The arguments to several of the NFS RPCs have been modified as well. Mostly,
+these are minor changes to use 64bit file offsets or similar. The modified
+argument structures follow.
+.ip \(bu
+Lookup RPC
+.(l
+        struct lookup_diropargs {
+                unsigned duration;
+                fhandle dir;
+                filename name;
+        };
+
+        union lookup_diropres switch (stat status) {
+        case NFS_OK:
+                struct {
+                        union getleaserequestres lookup_lease;
+                        fhandle file;
+                        nqnfs_fattr attributes;
+                } lookup_diropok;
+        default:
+                void;
+        };
+
+.)l
+The additional "duration" argument tells the server to get a lease for the
+name being looked up if it is non-zero and the lease is specified
+in "lookup_lease".
+.ip \(bu
+Read RPC
+.(l
+        struct nqnfs_readargs {
+                fhandle file;
+                unsigned hyper offset;
+                unsigned count;
+        };
+.)l
+.ip \(bu
+Write RPC
+.(l
+        struct nqnfs_writeargs {
+                fhandle file;
+                unsigned hyper offset;
+                bool append;
+                nfsdata data;
+        };
+.)l
+The "append" argument is true for apeend only write operations.
+.ip \(bu
+Get Filesystem Attributes RPC
+.(l
+        union nqnfs_statfsres (stat status) {
+        case NFS_OK:
+                struct {
+                        unsigned tsize;
+                        unsigned bsize;
+                        unsigned blocks;
+                        unsigned bfree;
+                        unsigned bavail;
+                        unsigned files;
+                        unsigned files_free;
+                } info;
+        default:
+                void;
+        };
+.)l
+The "files" field is the number of files in the file system and the "files_free"
+is the number of additional files that can be created.
+.sh 1 "Summary"
+.pp
+The configuration and tuning of an NFS environment tends to be a bit of a
+mystic art, but hopefully this paper along with the man pages and other
+reading will be helpful. Good Luck.
diff --git a/share/doc/smm/06.nfs/Makefile b/share/doc/smm/06.nfs/Makefile
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e36a0a6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/share/doc/smm/06.nfs/Makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
+#	@(#)Makefile	8.1 (Berkeley) 6/8/93
+
+DIR=	smm/06.nfs
+SRCS=	0.t 1.t 2.t ref.t
+MACROS=	-me
+
+.include <bsd.doc.mk>
diff --git a/share/doc/smm/06.nfs/ref.t b/share/doc/smm/06.nfs/ref.t
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..039363b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/share/doc/smm/06.nfs/ref.t
@@ -0,0 +1,123 @@
+.\" Copyright (c) 1993
+.\"	The Regents of the University of California.  All rights reserved.
+.\"
+.\" This document is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by
+.\" Rick Macklem at The University of Guelph.
+.\"
+.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+.\" are met:
+.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+.\"    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+.\" 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
+.\"    must display the following acknowledgement:
+.\"	This product includes software developed by the University of
+.\"	California, Berkeley and its contributors.
+.\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
+.\"    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+.\"    without specific prior written permission.
+.\"
+.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+.\" ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
+.\"
+.\"	@(#)ref.t	8.1 (Berkeley) 6/8/93
+.\"
+.sh 1 "Bibliography"
+.ip [Baker91] 16
+Mary Baker and John Ousterhout, Availability in the Sprite Distributed
+File System, In \fIOperating System Review\fR, (25)2, pg. 95-98,
+April 1991.
+.ip [Baker91a] 16
+Mary Baker, Private Email Communication, May 1991.
+.ip [Burrows88] 16
+Michael Burrows, Efficient Data Sharing, Technical Report #153,
+Computer Laboratory, University of Cambridge, Dec. 1988.
+.ip [Gray89] 16
+Cary G. Gray and David R. Cheriton, Leases: An Efficient Fault-Tolerant
+Mechanism for Distributed File Cache Consistency, In \fIProc. of the
+Twelfth ACM Symposium on Operating Systems Principals\fR, Litchfield Park,
+AZ, Dec. 1989.
+.ip [Howard88] 16
+John H. Howard, Michael L. Kazar, Sherri G. Menees, David A. Nichols,
+M. Satyanarayanan, Robert N. Sidebotham and Michael J. West,
+Scale and Performance in a Distributed File System, \fIACM Trans. on
+Computer Systems\fR, (6)1, pg 51-81, Feb. 1988.
+.ip [Juszczak89] 16
+Chet Juszczak, Improving the Performance and Correctness of an NFS Server,
+In \fIProc. Winter 1989 USENIX Conference,\fR pg. 53-63, San Diego, CA, January 1989.
+.ip [Keith90] 16
+Bruce E. Keith, Perspectives on NFS File Server Performance Characterization,
+In \fIProc. Summer 1990 USENIX Conference\fR, pg. 267-277, Anaheim, CA,
+June 1990.
+.ip [Kent87] 16
+Christopher. A. Kent, \fICache Coherence in Distributed Systems\fR,
+Research Report 87/4,
+Digital Equipment Corporation Western Research Laboratory, April 1987.
+.ip [Kent87a] 16
+Christopher. A. Kent and Jeffrey C. Mogul,
+\fIFragmentation Considered Harmful\fR, Research Report 87/3,
+Digital Equipment Corporation Western Research Laboratory, Dec. 1987.
+.ip [Macklem91] 16
+Rick Macklem, Lessons Learned Tuning the 4.3BSD Reno Implementation of the
+NFS Protocol, In \fIProc. Winter USENIX Conference\fR, pg. 53-64,
+Dallas, TX, January 1991.
+.ip [Nelson88] 16
+Michael N. Nelson, Brent B. Welch, and John K. Ousterhout, Caching in the
+Sprite Network File System, \fIACM Transactions on Computer Systems\fR (6)1
+pg. 134-154, February 1988.
+.ip [Nowicki89] 16
+Bill Nowicki, Transport Issues in the Network File System, In
+\fIComputer Communication Review\fR, pg. 16-20, Vol. 19, Number 2, April 1989.
+.ip [Ousterhout90] 16
+John K. Ousterhout, Why Aren't Operating Systems Getting Faster As Fast as
+Hardware? In \fIProc. Summer 1990 USENIX Conference\fR, pg. 247-256, Anaheim,
+CA, June 1990.
+.ip [Pendry93] 16
+Jan-Simon Pendry, 4.4 BSD Automounter Reference Manual, In
+\fIsrc/usr.sbin/amd/doc directory of 4.4 BSD distribution tape\fR.
+.ip [Reid90] 16
+Jim Reid, N(e)FS: the Protocol is the Problem, In
+\fIProc. Summer 1990 UKUUG Conference\fR,
+London, England, July 1990.
+.ip [Sandberg85] 16
+Russel Sandberg, David Goldberg, Steve Kleiman, Dan Walsh, and Bob Lyon,
+Design and Implementation of the Sun Network filesystem, In \fIProc. Summer
+1985 USENIX Conference\fR, pages 119-130, Portland, OR, June 1985.
+.ip [Schroeder85] 16
+Michael D. Schroeder, David K. Gifford and Roger M. Needham, A Caching
+File System For A Programmer's Workstation, In \fIProc. of the Tenth
+ACM Symposium on Operating Systems Principals\fR, pg. 25-34, Orcas Island,
+WA, Dec. 1985.
+.ip [Srinivasan89] 16
+V. Srinivasan and Jeffrey. C. Mogul, \fISpritely NFS: Implementation and
+Performance of Cache-Consistency Protocols\fR, Research Report 89/5,
+Digital Equipment Corporation Western Research Laboratory, May 1989.
+.ip [Steiner88] 16
+Jennifer G. Steiner, Clifford Neuman and Jeffrey I. Schiller,
+Kerberos: An Authentication Service for Open Network Systems, In
+\fIProc. Winter 1988 USENIX Conference\fR, Dallas, TX, February 1988.
+.ip [Stern] 16
+Hal Stern, \fIManaging NFS and NIS\fR, O'Reilly and Associates,
+ISBN 0-937175-75-7.
+.ip [Sun87] 16
+Sun Microsystems Inc., \fIXDR: External Data Representation Standard\fR,
+RFC1014, Network Information Center, SRI International, June 1987.
+.ip [Sun88] 16
+Sun Microsystems Inc., \fIRPC: Remote Procedure Call Protocol Specification Version 2\fR,
+RFC1057, Network Information Center, SRI International, June 1988.
+.ip [Sun89] 16
+Sun Microsystems Inc., \fINFS: Network File System Protocol Specification\fR,
+ARPANET Working Group Requests for Comment, DDN Network Information Center,
+SRI International, Menlo Park, CA, March 1989, RFC-1094.
diff --git a/share/doc/smm/18.net/0.t b/share/doc/smm/18.net/0.t
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d16e56f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/share/doc/smm/18.net/0.t
@@ -0,0 +1,184 @@
+.\" Copyright (c) 1983, 1986, 1993
+.\"	The Regents of the University of California.  All rights reserved.
+.\"
+.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+.\" are met:
+.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+.\"    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+.\" 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
+.\"    must display the following acknowledgement:
+.\"	This product includes software developed by the University of
+.\"	California, Berkeley and its contributors.
+.\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
+.\"    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+.\"    without specific prior written permission.
+.\"
+.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+.\" ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
+.\"
+.\"	@(#)0.t	8.1 (Berkeley) 6/10/93
+.\"
+.de IR
+\fI\\$1\fP\\$2
+..
+.if n .ND
+.TL
+Networking Implementation Notes
+.br
+4.4BSD Edition
+.AU
+Samuel J. Leffler, William N. Joy, Robert S. Fabry, and Michael J. Karels
+.AI
+Computer Systems Research Group
+Computer Science Division
+Department of Electrical Engineering and Computer Science
+University of California, Berkeley
+Berkeley, CA  94720
+.AB
+.FS
+* UNIX is a trademark of Bell Laboratories.
+.FE
+This report describes the internal structure of the
+networking facilities developed for the 4.4BSD version
+of the UNIX* operating system
+for the VAX\(dg.  These facilities
+.FS
+\(dg DEC, VAX, DECnet, and UNIBUS are trademarks of
+Digital Equipment Corporation.
+.FE
+are based on several central abstractions which
+structure the external (user) view of network communication
+as well as the internal (system) implementation.
+.PP
+The report documents the internal structure of the networking system.
+The ``Berkeley Software Architecture Manual, 4.4BSD Edition'' (PSD:5)
+provides a description of the user interface to the networking facilities.
+.sp
+.LP
+Revised June 10, 1993
+.AE
+.LP
+.\".de PT
+.\".lt \\n(LLu
+.\".pc %
+.\".nr PN \\n%
+.\".tl '\\*(LH'\\*(CH'\\*(RH'
+.\".lt \\n(.lu
+.\"..
+.\".ds RH Contents
+.OH 'Networking Implementation Notes''SMM:18-%'
+.EH 'SMM:18-%''Networking Implementation Notes'
+.bp
+.ce
+.B "TABLE OF CONTENTS"
+.LP
+.sp 1
+.nf
+.B "1.  Introduction"
+.LP
+.sp .5v
+.nf
+.B "2.  Overview"
+.LP
+.sp .5v
+.nf
+.B "3.  Goals
+.LP
+.sp .5v
+.nf
+.B "4.  Internal address representation"
+.LP
+.sp .5v
+.nf
+.B "5.  Memory management"
+.LP
+.sp .5v
+.nf
+.B "6.  Internal layering
+6.1.    Socket layer
+6.1.1.    Socket state
+6.1.2.    Socket data queues
+6.1.3.    Socket connection queuing
+6.2.    Protocol layer(s)
+6.3.    Network-interface layer
+6.3.1.    UNIBUS interfaces
+.LP
+.sp .5v
+.nf
+.B "7.  Socket/protocol interface"
+.LP
+.sp .5v
+.nf
+.B "8.  Protocol/protocol interface"
+8.1.     pr_output
+8.2.     pr_input
+8.3.     pr_ctlinput
+8.4.     pr_ctloutput
+.LP
+.sp .5v
+.nf
+.B "9.  Protocol/network-interface interface"
+9.1.     Packet transmission
+9.2.     Packet reception
+.LP
+.sp .5v
+.nf
+.B "10. Gateways and routing issues
+10.1.     Routing tables
+10.2.     Routing table interface
+10.3.     User level routing policies
+.LP
+.sp .5v
+.nf
+.B "11. Raw sockets"
+11.1.     Control blocks
+11.2.     Input processing
+11.3.     Output processing
+.LP
+.sp .5v
+.nf
+.B "12. Buffering and congestion control"
+12.1.     Memory management
+12.2.     Protocol buffering policies
+12.3.     Queue limiting
+12.4.     Packet forwarding
+.LP
+.sp .5v
+.nf
+.B "13. Out of band data"
+.LP
+.sp .5v
+.nf
+.B "14. Trailer protocols"
+.LP
+.sp .5v
+.nf
+.B Acknowledgements
+.LP
+.sp .5v
+.nf
+.B References
+.bp
+.de _d
+.if t .ta .6i 2.1i 2.6i
+.\" 2.94 went to 2.6, 3.64 to 3.30
+.if n .ta .84i 2.6i 3.30i
+..
+.de _f
+.if t .ta .5i 1.25i 2.5i
+.\" 3.5i went to 3.8i
+.if n .ta .7i 1.75i 3.8i
+..
diff --git a/share/doc/smm/18.net/1.t b/share/doc/smm/18.net/1.t
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ba5adb5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/share/doc/smm/18.net/1.t
@@ -0,0 +1,66 @@
+.\" Copyright (c) 1983, 1986, 1993
+.\"	The Regents of the University of California.  All rights reserved.
+.\"
+.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+.\" are met:
+.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+.\"    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+.\" 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
+.\"    must display the following acknowledgement:
+.\"	This product includes software developed by the University of
+.\"	California, Berkeley and its contributors.
+.\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
+.\"    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+.\"    without specific prior written permission.
+.\"
+.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+.\" ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
+.\"
+.\"	@(#)1.t	8.1 (Berkeley) 6/8/93
+.\"
+.\".ds RH Introduction
+.br
+.ne 2i
+.NH
+\s+2Introduction\s0
+.PP
+This report describes the internal structure of
+facilities added to the
+4.2BSD version of the UNIX operating system for
+the VAX,
+as modified in the 4.4BSD release.
+The system facilities provide
+a uniform user interface to networking
+within UNIX.  In addition, the implementation 
+introduces a structure for network communications which may be
+used by system implementors in adding new networking
+facilities.  The internal structure is not visible
+to the user, rather it is intended to aid implementors
+of communication protocols and network services by
+providing a framework which
+promotes code sharing and minimizes implementation effort.
+.PP
+The reader is expected to be familiar with the C programming
+language and system interface, as described in the
+\fIBerkeley Software Architecture Manual, 4.4BSD Edition\fP [Joy86].
+Basic understanding of network
+communication concepts is assumed; where required
+any additional ideas are introduced.
+.PP
+The remainder of this document
+provides a description of the system internals,
+avoiding, when possible, those portions which are utilized only
+by the interprocess communication facilities.
diff --git a/share/doc/smm/18.net/2.t b/share/doc/smm/18.net/2.t
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f504889
--- /dev/null
+++ b/share/doc/smm/18.net/2.t
@@ -0,0 +1,85 @@
+.\" Copyright (c) 1983, 1986, 1993
+.\"	The Regents of the University of California.  All rights reserved.
+.\"
+.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+.\" are met:
+.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+.\"    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+.\" 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
+.\"    must display the following acknowledgement:
+.\"	This product includes software developed by the University of
+.\"	California, Berkeley and its contributors.
+.\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
+.\"    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+.\"    without specific prior written permission.
+.\"
+.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+.\" ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
+.\"
+.\"	@(#)2.t	8.1 (Berkeley) 6/8/93
+.\"
+.nr H2 1
+.\".ds RH Overview
+.br
+.ne 2i
+.NH
+\s+2Overview\s0
+.PP
+If we consider
+the International Standards Organization's (ISO)
+Open System Interconnection (OSI) model of
+network communication [ISO81] [Zimmermann80],
+the networking facilities
+described here correspond to a portion of the
+session layer (layer 3) and all of the transport and
+network layers (layers 2 and 1, respectively).
+.PP
+The network layer provides possibly imperfect
+data transport services with minimal addressing
+structure.
+Addressing at this level is normally host to host,
+with implicit or explicit routing optionally supported
+by the communicating agents. 
+.PP
+At the transport
+layer the notions of reliable transfer, data sequencing,
+flow control, and service addressing are normally
+included.  Reliability is usually managed by 
+explicit acknowledgement of data delivered.  Failure
+to acknowledge a transfer results in retransmission of
+the data.  Sequencing may be handled by tagging
+each message handed to the network layer by a
+\fIsequence number\fP and maintaining
+state at the endpoints of communication to utilize
+received sequence numbers in reordering data which
+arrives out of order.
+.PP
+The session layer facilities may provide forms of
+addressing which are mapped into formats required
+by the transport layer, service authentication
+and client authentication, etc.  Various systems
+also provide services such as data encryption and
+address and protocol translation.
+.PP
+The following sections begin by describing some of the common
+data structures and utility routines, then examine
+the internal layering.  The contents of each layer
+and its interface are considered.  Certain of the
+interfaces are protocol implementation specific.  For
+these cases examples have been drawn from the Internet [Cerf78]
+protocol family.  Later sections cover routing issues,
+the design of the raw socket interface and other
+miscellaneous topics.
diff --git a/share/doc/smm/18.net/3.t b/share/doc/smm/18.net/3.t
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1d1fddd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/share/doc/smm/18.net/3.t
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
+.\" Copyright (c) 1983, 1986, 1993
+.\"	The Regents of the University of California.  All rights reserved.
+.\"
+.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+.\" are met:
+.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+.\"    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+.\" 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
+.\"    must display the following acknowledgement:
+.\"	This product includes software developed by the University of
+.\"	California, Berkeley and its contributors.
+.\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
+.\"    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+.\"    without specific prior written permission.
+.\"
+.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+.\" ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
+.\"
+.\"	@(#)3.t	8.1 (Berkeley) 6/8/93
+.\"
+.nr H2 1
+.\".ds RH Goals
+.br
+.ne 2i
+.NH
+\s+2Goals\s0
+.PP
+The networking system was designed with the goal of supporting
+multiple \fIprotocol families\fP and addressing styles.  This required
+information to be ``hidden'' in common data structures which
+could be manipulated by all the pieces of the system, but which
+required interpretation only by the protocols which ``controlled''
+it.  The system described here attempts to minimize
+the use of shared data structures to those kept by a suite of
+protocols (a \fIprotocol family\fP), and those used for rendezvous
+between ``synchronous'' and ``asynchronous'' portions of the
+system (e.g. queues of data packets are filled at interrupt
+time and emptied based on user requests).
+.PP
+A major goal of the system was to provide a framework within
+which new protocols and hardware could be easily be supported.
+To this end, a great deal of effort has been extended to
+create utility routines which hide many of the more
+complex and/or hardware dependent chores of networking.
+Later sections describe the utility routines and the underlying
+data structures they manipulate.
diff --git a/share/doc/smm/18.net/4.t b/share/doc/smm/18.net/4.t
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..afa6913
--- /dev/null
+++ b/share/doc/smm/18.net/4.t
@@ -0,0 +1,67 @@
+.\" Copyright (c) 1983, 1986, 1993
+.\"	The Regents of the University of California.  All rights reserved.
+.\"
+.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+.\" are met:
+.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+.\"    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+.\" 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
+.\"    must display the following acknowledgement:
+.\"	This product includes software developed by the University of
+.\"	California, Berkeley and its contributors.
+.\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
+.\"    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+.\"    without specific prior written permission.
+.\"
+.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+.\" ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
+.\"
+.\"	@(#)4.t	8.1 (Berkeley) 6/8/93
+.\"
+.nr H2 1
+.\".ds RH "Address representation
+.br
+.ne 2i
+.NH
+\s+2Internal address representation\s0
+.PP
+Common to all portions of the system are two data structures.
+These structures are used to represent
+addresses and various data objects.
+Addresses, internally are described by the \fIsockaddr\fP structure,
+.DS
+._f
+struct sockaddr {
+	short	sa_family;	/* data format identifier */
+	char	sa_data[14];	/* address */
+};
+.DE
+All addresses belong to one or more \fIaddress families\fP
+which define their format and interpretation.
+The \fIsa_family\fP field indicates the address family to which the address
+belongs, and the \fIsa_data\fP field contains the actual data value.
+The size of the data field, 14 bytes, was selected based on a study
+of current address formats.*
+Specific address formats use private structure definitions
+that define the format of the data field.
+The system interface supports larger address structures,
+although address-family-independent support facilities, for example routing
+and raw socket interfaces, provide only 14 bytes for address storage.
+Protocols that do not use those facilities (e.g, the current Unix domain)
+may use larger data areas.
+.FS
+* Later versions of the system may support variable length addresses.
+.FE
diff --git a/share/doc/smm/18.net/5.t b/share/doc/smm/18.net/5.t
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d4fb8e3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/share/doc/smm/18.net/5.t
@@ -0,0 +1,184 @@
+.\" Copyright (c) 1983, 1986, 1993
+.\"	The Regents of the University of California.  All rights reserved.
+.\"
+.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+.\" are met:
+.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+.\"    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+.\" 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
+.\"    must display the following acknowledgement:
+.\"	This product includes software developed by the University of
+.\"	California, Berkeley and its contributors.
+.\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
+.\"    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+.\"    without specific prior written permission.
+.\"
+.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+.\" ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
+.\"
+.\"	@(#)5.t	8.1 (Berkeley) 6/8/93
+.\"
+.nr H2 1
+.\".ds RH "Memory management
+.br
+.ne 2i
+.NH
+\s+2Memory management\s0
+.PP
+A single mechanism is used for data storage: memory buffers, or
+\fImbuf\fP's.  An mbuf is a structure of the form:
+.DS
+._f
+struct mbuf {
+	struct	mbuf *m_next;		/* next buffer in chain */
+	u_long	m_off;			/* offset of data */
+	short	m_len;			/* amount of data in this mbuf */
+	short	m_type;			/* mbuf type (accounting) */
+	u_char	m_dat[MLEN];		/* data storage */
+	struct	mbuf *m_act;		/* link in higher-level mbuf list */
+};
+.DE
+The \fIm_next\fP field is used to chain mbufs together on linked
+lists, while the \fIm_act\fP field allows lists of mbuf chains to be
+accumulated.  By convention, the mbufs common to a single object
+(for example, a packet) are chained together with the \fIm_next\fP
+field, while groups of objects are linked via the \fIm_act\fP
+field (possibly when in a queue).
+.PP
+Each mbuf has a small data area for storing information, \fIm_dat\fP.
+The \fIm_len\fP field indicates the amount of data, while the \fIm_off\fP
+field is an offset to the beginning of the data from the base of the
+mbuf.  Thus, for example, the macro \fImtod\fP, which converts a pointer
+to an mbuf to a pointer to the data stored in the mbuf, has the form
+.DS
+._d
+#define	mtod(\fIx\fP,\fIt\fP)	((\fIt\fP)((int)(\fIx\fP) + (\fIx\fP)->m_off))
+.DE
+(note the \fIt\fP parameter, a C type cast, which is used to cast
+the resultant pointer for proper assignment).
+.PP
+In addition to storing data directly in the mbuf's data area, data
+of page size may be also be stored in a separate area of memory.
+The mbuf utility routines maintain
+a pool of pages for this purpose and manipulate a private page map
+for such pages.
+An mbuf with an external data area may be recognized by the larger
+offset to the data area;
+this is formalized by the macro M_HASCL(\fIm\fP), which is true
+if the mbuf whose address is \fIm\fP has an external page cluster.
+An array of reference counts on pages is also maintained
+so that copies of pages may be made without core to core
+copying  (copies are created simply by duplicating the reference to the data
+and incrementing the associated reference counts for the pages).
+Separate data pages are currently used only
+when copying data from a user process into the kernel,
+and when bringing data in at the hardware level.  Routines which
+manipulate mbufs are not normally aware whether data is stored directly in 
+the mbuf data array, or if it is kept in separate pages.
+.PP
+The following may be used to allocate and free mbufs:
+.LP
+m = m_get(wait, type);
+.br
+MGET(m, wait, type);
+.IP
+The subroutine \fIm_get\fP and the macro \fIMGET\fP
+each allocate an mbuf, placing its address in \fIm\fP.
+The argument \fIwait\fP is either M_WAIT or M_DONTWAIT according
+to whether allocation should block or fail if no mbuf is available.
+The \fItype\fP is one of the predefined mbuf types for use in accounting
+of mbuf allocation.
+.IP "MCLGET(m);"
+This macro attempts to allocate an mbuf page cluster
+to associate with the mbuf \fIm\fP.
+If successful, the length of the mbuf is set to CLSIZE,
+the size of the page cluster.
+.LP
+n = m_free(m);
+.br
+MFREE(m,n);
+.IP
+The routine \fIm_free\fP and the macro \fIMFREE\fP
+each free a single mbuf, \fIm\fP, and any associated external storage area,
+placing a pointer to its successor in the chain it heads, if any, in \fIn\fP.
+.IP "m_freem(m);"
+This routine frees an mbuf chain headed by \fIm\fP.
+.PP
+The following utility routines are available for manipulating mbuf
+chains:
+.IP "m = m_copy(m0, off, len);"
+.br
+The \fIm_copy\fP routine create a copy of all, or part, of a
+list of the mbufs in \fIm0\fP.  \fILen\fP bytes of data, starting 
+\fIoff\fP bytes from the front of the chain, are copied. 
+Where possible, reference counts on pages are used instead
+of core to core copies.  The original mbuf chain must have at
+least \fIoff\fP + \fIlen\fP bytes of data.  If \fIlen\fP is
+specified as M_COPYALL, all the data present, offset
+as before, is copied.  
+.IP "m_cat(m, n);"
+.br
+The mbuf chain, \fIn\fP, is appended to the end of \fIm\fP.
+Where possible, compaction is performed.
+.IP "m_adj(m, diff);"
+.br
+The mbuf chain, \fIm\fP is adjusted in size by \fIdiff\fP
+bytes.  If \fIdiff\fP is non-negative, \fIdiff\fP bytes
+are shaved off the front of the mbuf chain.  If \fIdiff\fP
+is negative, the alteration is performed from back to front.
+No space is reclaimed in this operation; alterations are
+accomplished by changing the \fIm_len\fP and \fIm_off\fP
+fields of mbufs.
+.IP "m = m_pullup(m0, size);"
+.br
+After a successful call to \fIm_pullup\fP, the mbuf at
+the head of the returned list, \fIm\fP, is guaranteed
+to have at least \fIsize\fP
+bytes of data in contiguous memory within the data area of the mbuf
+(allowing access via a pointer, obtained using the \fImtod\fP macro,
+and allowing the mbuf to be located from a pointer to the data area
+using \fIdtom\fP, defined below).
+If the original data was less than \fIsize\fP bytes long,
+\fIlen\fP was greater than the size of an mbuf data
+area (112 bytes), or required resources were unavailable,
+\fIm\fP is 0 and the original mbuf chain is deallocated.
+.IP
+This routine is particularly useful when verifying packet
+header lengths on reception.  For example, if a packet is
+received and only 8 of the necessary 16 bytes required
+for a valid packet header are present at the head of the list
+of mbufs representing the packet, the remaining 8 bytes
+may be ``pulled up'' with a single \fIm_pullup\fP call.
+If the call fails the invalid packet will have been discarded.
+.PP
+By insuring that mbufs always reside on 128 byte boundaries,
+it is always possible to locate the mbuf associated with a data
+area by masking off the low bits of the virtual address.
+This allows modules to store data structures in mbufs and
+pass them around without concern for locating the original
+mbuf when it comes time to free the structure.
+Note that this works only with objects stored in the internal data
+buffer of the mbuf.
+The \fIdtom\fP macro is used to convert a pointer into an mbuf's
+data area to a pointer to the mbuf,
+.DS
+#define	dtom(x)	((struct mbuf *)((int)x & ~(MSIZE-1)))
+.DE
+.PP
+Mbufs are used for dynamically allocated data structures such as
+sockets as well as memory allocated for packets and headers.  Statistics are
+maintained on mbuf usage and can be viewed by users using the
+\fInetstat\fP\|(1) program.
diff --git a/share/doc/smm/18.net/6.t b/share/doc/smm/18.net/6.t
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..601988c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/share/doc/smm/18.net/6.t
@@ -0,0 +1,664 @@
+.\" Copyright (c) 1983, 1986, 1993
+.\"	The Regents of the University of California.  All rights reserved.
+.\"
+.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+.\" are met:
+.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+.\"    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+.\" 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
+.\"    must display the following acknowledgement:
+.\"	This product includes software developed by the University of
+.\"	California, Berkeley and its contributors.
+.\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
+.\"    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+.\"    without specific prior written permission.
+.\"
+.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+.\" ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
+.\"
+.\"	@(#)6.t	8.1 (Berkeley) 6/8/93
+.\"
+.nr H2 1
+.\".ds RH "Internal layering
+.br
+.ne 2i
+.NH
+\s+2Internal layering\s0
+.PP
+The internal structure of the network system is divided into
+three layers.  These
+layers correspond to the services provided by the socket
+abstraction, those provided by the communication protocols,
+and those provided by the hardware interfaces.  The communication
+protocols are normally layered into two or more individual
+cooperating layers, though they are collectively viewed
+in the system as one layer providing services supportive
+of the appropriate socket abstraction.
+.PP
+The following sections describe the properties of each layer
+in the system and the interfaces to which each must conform.
+.NH 2
+Socket layer
+.PP
+The socket layer deals with the interprocess communication
+facilities provided by the system.  A socket is a bidirectional
+endpoint of communication which is ``typed'' by the semantics
+of communication it supports.  The system calls described in
+the \fIBerkeley Software Architecture Manual\fP [Joy86]
+are used to manipulate sockets.
+.PP
+A socket consists of the following data structure:
+.DS
+._f
+struct socket {
+	short	so_type;		/* generic type */
+	short	so_options;		/* from socket call */
+	short	so_linger;		/* time to linger while closing */
+	short	so_state;		/* internal state flags */
+	caddr_t	so_pcb;			/* protocol control block */
+	struct	protosw *so_proto;	/* protocol handle */
+	struct	socket *so_head;	/* back pointer to accept socket */
+	struct	socket *so_q0;		/* queue of partial connections */
+	short	so_q0len;		/* partials on so_q0 */
+	struct	socket *so_q;		/* queue of incoming connections */
+	short	so_qlen;		/* number of connections on so_q */
+	short	so_qlimit;		/* max number queued connections */
+	struct	sockbuf so_rcv;		/* receive queue */
+	struct	sockbuf so_snd;		/* send queue */
+	short	so_timeo;		/* connection timeout */
+	u_short	so_error;		/* error affecting connection */
+	u_short	so_oobmark;		/* chars to oob mark */
+	short	so_pgrp;		/* pgrp for signals */
+};
+.DE
+.PP
+Each socket contains two data queues, \fIso_rcv\fP and \fIso_snd\fP,
+and a pointer to routines which provide supporting services. 
+The type of the socket,
+\fIso_type\fP is defined at socket creation time and used in selecting
+those services which are appropriate to support it.  The supporting
+protocol is selected at socket creation time and recorded in
+the socket data structure for later use.  Protocols are defined
+by a table of procedures, the \fIprotosw\fP structure, which will
+be described in detail later.  A pointer to a protocol-specific
+data structure,
+the ``protocol control block,'' is also present in the socket structure.
+Protocols control this data structure, which normally includes a
+back pointer to the parent socket structure to allow easy
+lookup when returning information to a user 
+(for example, placing an error number in the \fIso_error\fP
+field).  The other entries in the socket structure are used in
+queuing connection requests, validating user requests, storing
+socket characteristics (e.g.
+options supplied at the time a socket is created), and maintaining
+a socket's state.
+.PP
+Processes ``rendezvous at a socket'' in many instances.  For instance,
+when a process wishes to extract data from a socket's receive queue
+and it is empty, or lacks sufficient data to satisfy the request,
+the process blocks, supplying the address of the receive queue as
+a ``wait channel' to be used in notification.  When data arrives
+for the process and is placed in the socket's queue, the blocked
+process is identified by the fact it is waiting ``on the queue.''
+.NH 3
+Socket state
+.PP
+A socket's state is defined from the following:
+.DS
+.ta \w'#define 'u +\w'SS_ISDISCONNECTING    'u +\w'0x000     'u
+#define	SS_NOFDREF	0x001	/* no file table ref any more */
+#define	SS_ISCONNECTED	0x002	/* socket connected to a peer */
+#define	SS_ISCONNECTING	0x004	/* in process of connecting to peer */
+#define	SS_ISDISCONNECTING	0x008	/* in process of disconnecting */
+#define	SS_CANTSENDMORE	0x010	/* can't send more data to peer */
+#define	SS_CANTRCVMORE	0x020	/* can't receive more data from peer */
+#define	SS_RCVATMARK	0x040	/* at mark on input */
+
+#define	SS_PRIV	0x080	/* privileged */
+#define	SS_NBIO	0x100	/* non-blocking ops */
+#define	SS_ASYNC	0x200	/* async i/o notify */
+.DE
+.PP
+The state of a socket is manipulated both by the protocols
+and the user (through system calls).
+When a socket is created, the state is defined based on the type of socket.
+It may change as control actions are performed, for example connection
+establishment.
+It may also change according to the type of
+input/output the user wishes to perform, as indicated by options
+set with \fIfcntl\fP.  ``Non-blocking'' I/O  implies that
+a process should never be blocked to await resources.  Instead, any
+call which would block returns prematurely
+with the error EWOULDBLOCK, or the service request may be partially
+fulfilled, e.g. a request for more data than is present.
+.PP
+If a process requested ``asynchronous'' notification of events
+related to the socket, the SIGIO signal is posted to the process
+when such events occur.
+An event is a change in the socket's state;
+examples of such occurrences are: space
+becoming available in the send queue, new data available in the
+receive queue, connection establishment or disestablishment, etc. 
+.PP
+A socket may be marked ``privileged'' if it was created by the
+super-user.  Only privileged sockets may
+bind addresses in privileged portions of an address space
+or use ``raw'' sockets to access lower levels of the network.
+.NH 3
+Socket data queues
+.PP
+A socket's data queue contains a pointer to the data stored in
+the queue and other entries related to the management of
+the data.  The following structure defines a data queue:
+.DS
+._f
+struct sockbuf {
+	u_short	sb_cc;		/* actual chars in buffer */
+	u_short	sb_hiwat;	/* max actual char count */
+	u_short	sb_mbcnt;	/* chars of mbufs used */
+	u_short	sb_mbmax;	/* max chars of mbufs to use */
+	u_short	sb_lowat;	/* low water mark */
+	short	sb_timeo;	/* timeout */
+	struct	mbuf *sb_mb;	/* the mbuf chain */
+	struct	proc *sb_sel;	/* process selecting read/write */
+	short	sb_flags;	/* flags, see below */
+};
+.DE
+.PP
+Data is stored in a queue as a chain of mbufs.
+The actual count of data characters as well as high and low water marks are
+used by the protocols in controlling the flow of data.
+The amount of buffer space (characters of mbufs and associated data pages)
+is also recorded along with the limit on buffer allocation.
+The socket routines cooperate in implementing the flow control
+policy by blocking a process when it requests to send data and
+the high water mark has been reached, or when it requests to
+receive data and less than the low water mark is present
+(assuming non-blocking I/O has not been specified).*
+.FS
+* The low-water mark is always presumed to be 0
+in the current implementation.
+.FE
+.PP
+When a socket is created, the supporting protocol ``reserves'' space
+for the send and receive queues of the socket.
+The limit on buffer allocation is set somewhat higher than the limit
+on data characters
+to account for the granularity of buffer allocation.
+The actual storage associated with a
+socket queue may fluctuate during a socket's lifetime, but it is assumed
+that this reservation will always allow a protocol to acquire enough memory
+to satisfy the high water marks.
+.PP
+The timeout and select values are manipulated by the socket routines
+in implementing various portions of the interprocess communications
+facilities and will not be described here.
+.PP
+Data queued at a socket is stored in one of two styles.
+Stream-oriented sockets queue data with no addresses, headers
+or record boundaries.
+The data are in mbufs linked through the \fIm_next\fP field.
+Buffers containing access rights may be present within the chain
+if the underlying protocol supports passage of access rights.
+Record-oriented sockets, including datagram sockets,
+queue data as a list of packets; the sections of packets are distinguished
+by the types of the mbufs containing them.
+The mbufs which comprise a record are linked through the \fIm_next\fP field;
+records are linked from the \fIm_act\fP field of the first mbuf
+of one packet to the first mbuf of the next.
+Each packet begins with an mbuf containing the ``from'' address
+if the protocol provides it,
+then any buffers containing access rights, and finally any buffers
+containing data.
+If a record contains no data,
+no data buffers are required unless neither address nor access rights
+are present.
+.PP
+A socket queue has a number of flags used in synchronizing access
+to the data and in acquiring resources:
+.DS
+._d
+#define	SB_LOCK	0x01	/* lock on data queue (so_rcv only) */
+#define	SB_WANT	0x02	/* someone is waiting to lock */
+#define	SB_WAIT	0x04	/* someone is waiting for data/space */
+#define	SB_SEL	0x08	/* buffer is selected */
+#define	SB_COLL	0x10	/* collision selecting */
+.DE
+The last two flags are manipulated by the system in implementing
+the select mechanism.
+.NH 3
+Socket connection queuing
+.PP
+In dealing with connection oriented sockets (e.g. SOCK_STREAM)
+the two ends are considered distinct.  One end is termed
+\fIactive\fP, and generates connection requests.  The other
+end is called \fIpassive\fP and accepts connection requests.
+.PP
+From the passive side, a socket is marked with
+SO_ACCEPTCONN when a \fIlisten\fP call is made, 
+creating two queues of sockets: \fIso_q0\fP for connections
+in progress and \fIso_q\fP for connections already made and
+awaiting user acceptance.
+As a protocol is preparing incoming connections, it creates
+a socket structure queued on \fIso_q0\fP by calling the routine
+\fIsonewconn\fP().  When the connection
+is established, the socket structure is then transferred
+to \fIso_q\fP, making it available for an \fIaccept\fP.
+.PP
+If an SO_ACCEPTCONN socket is closed with sockets on either
+\fIso_q0\fP or \fIso_q\fP, these sockets are dropped,
+with notification to the peers as appropriate.
+.NH 2
+Protocol layer(s)
+.PP
+Each socket is created in a communications domain,
+which usually implies both an addressing structure (address family)
+and a set of protocols which implement various socket types within the domain
+(protocol family).
+Each domain is defined by the following structure:
+.DS
+.ta .5i +\w'struct  'u +\w'(*dom_externalize)();   'u
+struct	domain {
+	int	dom_family;		/* PF_xxx */
+	char	*dom_name;
+	int	(*dom_init)();		/* initialize domain data structures */
+	int	(*dom_externalize)();	/* externalize access rights */
+	int	(*dom_dispose)();	/* dispose of internalized rights */
+	struct	protosw *dom_protosw, *dom_protoswNPROTOSW;
+	struct	domain *dom_next;
+};
+.DE
+.PP
+At boot time, each domain configured into the kernel
+is added to a linked list of domain.
+The initialization procedure of each domain is then called.
+After that time, the domain structure is used to locate protocols
+within the protocol family.
+It may also contain procedure references
+for externalization of access rights at the receiving socket
+and the disposal of access rights that are not received.
+.PP
+Protocols are described by a set of entry points and certain
+socket-visible characteristics, some of which are used in
+deciding which socket type(s) they may support.  
+.PP
+An entry in the ``protocol switch'' table exists for each
+protocol module configured into the system.  It has the following form:
+.DS
+.ta .5i +\w'struct  'u +\w'domain *pr_domain;    'u
+struct protosw {
+	short	pr_type;		/* socket type used for */
+	struct	domain *pr_domain;	/* domain protocol a member of */
+	short	pr_protocol;		/* protocol number */
+	short	pr_flags;		/* socket visible attributes */
+/* protocol-protocol hooks */
+	int	(*pr_input)();		/* input to protocol (from below) */
+	int	(*pr_output)();		/* output to protocol (from above) */
+	int	(*pr_ctlinput)();	/* control input (from below) */
+	int	(*pr_ctloutput)();	/* control output (from above) */
+/* user-protocol hook */
+	int	(*pr_usrreq)();		/* user request */
+/* utility hooks */
+	int	(*pr_init)();		/* initialization routine */
+	int	(*pr_fasttimo)();	/* fast timeout (200ms) */
+	int	(*pr_slowtimo)();	/* slow timeout (500ms) */
+	int	(*pr_drain)();		/* flush any excess space possible */
+};
+.DE
+.PP
+A protocol is called through the \fIpr_init\fP entry before any other.
+Thereafter it is called every 200 milliseconds through the
+\fIpr_fasttimo\fP entry and
+every 500 milliseconds through the \fIpr_slowtimo\fP for timer based actions.
+The system will call the \fIpr_drain\fP entry if it is low on space and
+this should throw away any non-critical data.
+.PP
+Protocols pass data between themselves as chains of mbufs using
+the \fIpr_input\fP and \fIpr_output\fP routines.  \fIPr_input\fP
+passes data up (towards
+the user) and \fIpr_output\fP passes it down (towards the network); control
+information passes up and down on \fIpr_ctlinput\fP and \fIpr_ctloutput\fP.
+The protocol is responsible for the space occupied by any of the
+arguments to these entries and must either pass it onward or dispose of it.
+(On output, the lowest level reached must free buffers storing the arguments;
+on input, the highest level is responsible for freeing buffers.)
+.PP
+The \fIpr_usrreq\fP routine interfaces protocols to the socket
+code and is described below.
+.PP
+The \fIpr_flags\fP field is constructed from the following values:
+.DS
+.ta \w'#define 'u +\w'PR_CONNREQUIRED   'u +8n
+#define	PR_ATOMIC	0x01		/* exchange atomic messages only */
+#define	PR_ADDR	0x02		/* addresses given with messages */
+#define	PR_CONNREQUIRED	0x04		/* connection required by protocol */
+#define	PR_WANTRCVD	0x08		/* want PRU_RCVD calls */
+#define	PR_RIGHTS	0x10		/* passes capabilities */
+.DE
+Protocols which are connection-based specify the PR_CONNREQUIRED
+flag so that the socket routines will never attempt to send data
+before a connection has been established.  If the PR_WANTRCVD flag
+is set, the socket routines will notify the protocol when the user
+has removed data from the socket's receive queue.  This allows
+the protocol to implement acknowledgement on user receipt, and
+also update windowing information based on the amount of space
+available in the receive queue.  The PR_ADDR field indicates that any
+data placed in the socket's receive queue will be preceded by the
+address of the sender.  The PR_ATOMIC flag specifies that each \fIuser\fP
+request to send data must be performed in a single \fIprotocol\fP send
+request; it is the protocol's responsibility to maintain record
+boundaries on data to be sent.  The PR_RIGHTS flag indicates that the
+protocol supports the passing of capabilities;  this is currently
+used only by the protocols in the UNIX protocol family.
+.PP
+When a socket is created, the socket routines scan the protocol
+table for the domain
+looking for an appropriate protocol to support the type of
+socket being created.  The \fIpr_type\fP field contains one of the
+possible socket types (e.g. SOCK_STREAM), while the \fIpr_domain\fP
+is a back pointer to the domain structure.
+The \fIpr_protocol\fP field contains the protocol number of the
+protocol, normally a well-known value.
+.NH 2
+Network-interface layer
+.PP
+Each network-interface configured into a system defines a
+path through which packets may be sent and received.
+Normally a hardware device is associated with this interface,
+though there is no requirement for this (for example, all
+systems have a software ``loopback'' interface used for 
+debugging and performance analysis).
+In addition to manipulating the hardware device, an interface
+module is responsible
+for encapsulation and decapsulation of any link-layer header
+information required to deliver a message to its destination.
+The selection of which interface to use in delivering packets
+is a routing decision carried out at a
+higher level than the network-interface layer.
+An interface may have addresses in one or more address families.
+The address is set at boot time using an \fIioctl\fP on a socket
+in the appropriate domain; this operation is implemented by the protocol
+family, after verifying the operation through the device \fIioctl\fP entry.
+.PP
+An interface is defined by the following structure,
+.DS
+.ta .5i +\w'struct   'u +\w'ifaddr *if_addrlist;   'u
+struct ifnet {
+	char	*if_name;		/* name, e.g. ``en'' or ``lo'' */
+	short	if_unit;		/* sub-unit for lower level driver */
+	short	if_mtu;			/* maximum transmission unit */
+	short	if_flags;		/* up/down, broadcast, etc. */
+	short	if_timer;		/* time 'til if_watchdog called */
+	struct	ifaddr *if_addrlist;	/* list of addresses of interface */
+	struct	ifqueue if_snd;		/* output queue */
+	int	(*if_init)();		/* init routine */
+	int	(*if_output)();		/* output routine */
+	int	(*if_ioctl)();		/* ioctl routine */
+	int	(*if_reset)();		/* bus reset routine */
+	int	(*if_watchdog)();	/* timer routine */
+	int	if_ipackets;		/* packets received on interface */
+	int	if_ierrors;		/* input errors on interface */
+	int	if_opackets;		/* packets sent on interface */
+	int	if_oerrors;		/* output errors on interface */
+	int	if_collisions;		/* collisions on csma interfaces */
+	struct	ifnet *if_next;
+};
+.DE
+Each interface address has the following form:
+.DS
+.ta \w'#define 'u +\w'struct   'u +\w'struct   'u +\w'sockaddr ifa_addr;   'u-\w'struct   'u
+struct ifaddr {
+	struct	sockaddr ifa_addr;	/* address of interface */
+	union {
+		struct	sockaddr ifu_broadaddr;
+		struct	sockaddr ifu_dstaddr;
+	} ifa_ifu;
+	struct	ifnet *ifa_ifp;		/* back-pointer to interface */
+	struct	ifaddr *ifa_next;	/* next address for interface */
+};
+.ta \w'#define 'u +\w'ifa_broadaddr   'u +\w'ifa_ifu.ifu_broadaddr	   'u
+#define	ifa_broadaddr	ifa_ifu.ifu_broadaddr	/* broadcast address */
+#define	ifa_dstaddr	ifa_ifu.ifu_dstaddr	/* other end of p-to-p link */
+.DE
+The protocol generally maintains this structure as part of a larger
+structure containing additional information concerning the address.
+.PP
+Each interface has a send queue and routines used for 
+initialization, \fIif_init\fP, and output, \fIif_output\fP.
+If the interface resides on a system bus, the routine \fIif_reset\fP
+will be called after a bus reset has been performed. 
+An interface may also
+specify a timer routine, \fIif_watchdog\fP;
+if \fIif_timer\fP is non-zero, it is decremented once per second
+until it reaches zero, at which time the watchdog routine is called.
+.PP
+The state of an interface and certain characteristics are stored in
+the \fIif_flags\fP field.  The following values are possible:
+.DS
+._d
+#define	IFF_UP	0x1	/* interface is up */
+#define	IFF_BROADCAST	0x2	/* broadcast is possible */
+#define	IFF_DEBUG	0x4	/* turn on debugging */
+#define	IFF_LOOPBACK	0x8	/* is a loopback net */
+#define	IFF_POINTOPOINT	0x10	/* interface is point-to-point link */
+#define	IFF_NOTRAILERS	0x20	/* avoid use of trailers */
+#define	IFF_RUNNING	0x40	/* resources allocated */
+#define	IFF_NOARP	0x80	/* no address resolution protocol */
+.DE
+If the interface is connected to a network which supports transmission
+of \fIbroadcast\fP packets, the IFF_BROADCAST flag will be set and
+the \fIifa_broadaddr\fP field will contain the address to be used in
+sending or accepting a broadcast packet.  If the interface is associated
+with a point-to-point hardware link (for example, a DEC DMR-11), the
+IFF_POINTOPOINT flag will be set and \fIifa_dstaddr\fP will contain the
+address of the host on the other side of the connection.  These addresses
+and the local address of the interface, \fIif_addr\fP, are used in
+filtering incoming packets.  The interface sets IFF_RUNNING after
+it has allocated system resources and posted an initial read on the
+device it manages.  This state bit is used to avoid multiple allocation
+requests when an interface's address is changed.  The IFF_NOTRAILERS
+flag indicates the interface should refrain from using a \fItrailer\fP
+encapsulation on outgoing packets, or (where per-host negotiation
+of trailers is possible) that trailer encapsulations should not be requested;
+\fItrailer\fP protocols are described
+in section 14.  The IFF_NOARP flag indicates the interface should not
+use an ``address resolution protocol'' in mapping internetwork addresses
+to local network addresses.
+.PP
+Various statistics are also stored in the interface structure.  These
+may be viewed by users using the \fInetstat\fP(1) program.
+.PP
+The interface address and flags may be set with the SIOCSIFADDR and
+SIOCSIFFLAGS \fIioctl\fP\^s.  SIOCSIFADDR is used initially to define each
+interface's address; SIOGSIFFLAGS can be used to mark
+an interface down and perform site-specific configuration.
+The destination address of a point-to-point link is set with SIOCSIFDSTADDR.
+Corresponding operations exist to read each value.
+Protocol families may also support operations to set and read the broadcast
+address.
+In addition, the SIOCGIFCONF \fIioctl\fP retrieves a list of interface
+names and addresses for all interfaces and protocols on the host.
+.NH 3
+UNIBUS interfaces
+.PP
+All hardware related interfaces currently reside on the UNIBUS.
+Consequently a common set of utility routines for dealing
+with the UNIBUS has been developed.  Each UNIBUS interface
+utilizes a structure of the following form:
+.DS
+.ta \w'#define 'u +\w'ifw_xtofree 'u +\w'pte ifu_wmap[IF_MAXNUBAMR];    'u
+struct	ifubinfo {
+	short	iff_uban;			/* uba number */
+	short	iff_hlen;			/* local net header length */
+	struct	uba_regs *iff_uba;		/* uba regs, in vm */
+	short	iff_flags;			/* used during uballoc's */
+};
+.DE
+Additional structures are associated with each receive and transmit buffer,
+normally one each per interface; for read,
+.DS
+.ta \w'#define 'u +\w'ifw_xtofree 'u +\w'pte ifu_wmap[IF_MAXNUBAMR];    'u
+struct	ifrw {
+	caddr_t	ifrw_addr;			/* virt addr of header */
+	short	ifrw_bdp;			/* unibus bdp */
+	short	ifrw_flags;			/* type, etc. */
+#define	IFRW_W	0x01				/* is a transmit buffer */
+	int	ifrw_info;			/* value from ubaalloc */
+	int	ifrw_proto;			/* map register prototype */
+	struct	pte *ifrw_mr;			/* base of map registers */
+};
+.DE
+and for write,
+.DS
+.ta \w'#define 'u +\w'ifw_xtofree 'u +\w'pte ifu_wmap[IF_MAXNUBAMR];    'u
+struct	ifxmt {
+	struct	ifrw ifrw;
+	caddr_t	ifw_base;			/* virt addr of buffer */
+	struct	pte ifw_wmap[IF_MAXNUBAMR];	/* base pages for output */
+	struct	mbuf *ifw_xtofree;		/* pages being dma'd out */
+	short	ifw_xswapd;			/* mask of clusters swapped */
+	short	ifw_nmr;			/* number of entries in wmap */
+};
+.ta \w'#define 'u +\w'ifw_xtofree 'u +\w'pte ifu_wmap[IF_MAXNUBAMR];    'u
+#define	ifw_addr	ifrw.ifrw_addr
+#define	ifw_bdp	ifrw.ifrw_bdp
+#define	ifw_flags	ifrw.ifrw_flags
+#define	ifw_info	ifrw.ifrw_info
+#define	ifw_proto	ifrw.ifrw_proto
+#define	ifw_mr	ifrw.ifrw_mr
+.DE
+One of each of these structures is conveniently packaged for interfaces
+with single buffers for each direction, as follows:
+.DS
+.ta \w'#define 'u +\w'ifw_xtofree 'u +\w'pte ifu_wmap[IF_MAXNUBAMR];    'u
+struct	ifuba {
+	struct	ifubinfo ifu_info;
+	struct	ifrw ifu_r;
+	struct	ifxmt ifu_xmt;
+};
+.ta \w'#define 'u +\w'ifw_xtofree 'u
+#define	ifu_uban	ifu_info.iff_uban
+#define	ifu_hlen	ifu_info.iff_hlen
+#define	ifu_uba		ifu_info.iff_uba
+#define	ifu_flags	ifu_info.iff_flags
+#define	ifu_w		ifu_xmt.ifrw
+#define	ifu_xtofree	ifu_xmt.ifw_xtofree
+.DE
+.PP
+The \fIif_ubinfo\fP structure contains the general information needed
+to characterize the I/O-mapped buffers for the device.
+In addition, there is a structure describing each buffer, including
+UNIBUS resources held by the interface.
+Sufficient memory pages and bus map registers are allocated to each buffer
+upon initialization according to the maximum packet size and header length.
+The kernel virtual address of the buffer is held in \fIifrw_addr\fP,
+and the map registers begin
+at \fIifrw_mr\fP.  UNIBUS map register \fIifrw_mr\fP\^[\-1]
+maps the local network header
+ending on a page boundary.  UNIBUS data paths are
+reserved for read and for
+write, given by \fIifrw_bdp\fP.  The prototype of the map
+registers for read and for write is saved in \fIifrw_proto\fP.
+.PP
+When write transfers are not at least half-full pages on page boundaries,
+the data are just copied into the pages mapped on the UNIBUS
+and the transfer is started.
+If a write transfer is at least half a page long and on a page
+boundary, UNIBUS page table entries are swapped to reference
+the pages, and then the initial pages are
+remapped from \fIifw_wmap\fP when the transfer completes.
+The mbufs containing the mapped pages are placed on the \fIifw_xtofree\fP
+queue to be freed after transmission.
+.PP
+When read transfers give at least half a page of data to be input, page
+frames are allocated from a network page list and traded
+with the pages already containing the data, mapping the allocated
+pages to replace the input pages for the next UNIBUS data input.
+.PP
+The following utility routines are available for use in
+writing network interface drivers; all use the
+structures described above.
+.LP
+if_ubaminit(ifubinfo, uban, hlen, nmr, ifr, nr, ifx, nx);
+.br
+if_ubainit(ifuba, uban, hlen, nmr);
+.IP
+\fIif_ubaminit\fP allocates resources on UNIBUS adapter \fIuban\fP,
+storing the information in the \fIifubinfo\fP, \fIifrw\fP and \fIifxmt\fP
+structures referenced.
+The \fIifr\fP and \fIifx\fP parameters are pointers to arrays
+of \fIifrw\fP and \fIifxmt\fP structures whose dimensions
+are \fInr\fP and \fInx\fP, respectively.
+\fIif_ubainit\fP is a simpler, backwards-compatible interface used
+for hardware with single buffers of each type.
+They are called only at boot time or after a UNIBUS reset. 
+One data path (buffered or unbuffered,
+depending on the \fIifu_flags\fP field) is allocated for each buffer.
+The \fInmr\fP parameter indicates
+the number of UNIBUS mapping registers required to map a maximal
+sized packet onto the UNIBUS, while \fIhlen\fP specifies the size
+of a local network header, if any, which should be mapped separately
+from the data (see the description of trailer protocols in chapter 14).
+Sufficient UNIBUS mapping registers and pages of memory are allocated
+to initialize the input data path for an initial read.  For the output
+data path, mapping registers and pages of memory are also allocated
+and mapped onto the UNIBUS.  The pages associated with the output
+data path are held in reserve in the event a write requires copying
+non-page-aligned data (see \fIif_wubaput\fP below).
+If \fIif_ubainit\fP is called with memory pages already allocated,
+they will be used instead of allocating new ones (this normally
+occurs after a UNIBUS reset).
+A 1 is returned when allocation and initialization are successful,
+0 otherwise.
+.LP
+m = if_ubaget(ifubinfo, ifr, totlen, off0, ifp);
+.br
+m = if_rubaget(ifuba, totlen, off0, ifp);
+.IP
+\fIif_ubaget\fP and \fIif_rubaget\fP pull input data
+out of an interface receive buffer and into an mbuf chain.
+The first interface passes pointers to the \fIifubinfo\fP structure
+for the interface and the \fIifrw\fP structure for the receive buffer;
+the second call may be used for single-buffered devices.
+\fItotlen\fP specifies the length of data to be obtained, not counting the
+local network header.  If \fIoff0\fP is non-zero, it indicates
+a byte offset to a trailing local network header which should be
+copied into a separate mbuf and prepended to the front of the resultant mbuf
+chain.  When the data amount to at least a half a page,
+the previously mapped data pages are remapped
+into the mbufs and swapped with fresh pages, thus avoiding
+any copy.
+The receiving interface is recorded as \fIifp\fP, a pointer to an \fIifnet\fP
+structure, for the use of the receiving network protocol.
+A 0 return value indicates a failure to allocate resources.
+.LP
+if_wubaput(ifubinfo, ifx, m);
+.br
+if_wubaput(ifuba, m);
+.IP
+\fIif_ubaput\fP and \fIif_wubaput\fP map a chain of mbufs
+onto a network interface in preparation for output.
+The first interface is used by devices with multiple transmit buffers.
+The chain includes any local network
+header, which is copied so that it resides in the mapped and
+aligned I/O space.
+Page-aligned data that are page-aligned in the output buffer
+are mapped to the UNIBUS in place of the normal buffer page,
+and the corresponding mbuf is placed on a queue to be freed after transmission.
+Any other mbufs which contained non-page-sized
+data portions are copied to the I/O space and then freed.
+Pages mapped from a previous output operation (no longer needed)
+are unmapped.
diff --git a/share/doc/smm/18.net/7.t b/share/doc/smm/18.net/7.t
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8ccecc8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/share/doc/smm/18.net/7.t
@@ -0,0 +1,256 @@
+.\" Copyright (c) 1983, 1986, 1993
+.\"	The Regents of the University of California.  All rights reserved.
+.\"
+.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+.\" are met:
+.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+.\"    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+.\" 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
+.\"    must display the following acknowledgement:
+.\"	This product includes software developed by the University of
+.\"	California, Berkeley and its contributors.
+.\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
+.\"    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+.\"    without specific prior written permission.
+.\"
+.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+.\" ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
+.\"
+.\"	@(#)7.t	8.1 (Berkeley) 6/8/93
+.\"
+.nr H2 1
+.br
+.ne 30v
+.\".ds RH "Socket/protocol interface
+.NH
+\s+2Socket/protocol interface\s0
+.PP
+The interface between the socket routines and the communication
+protocols is through the \fIpr_usrreq\fP routine defined in the
+protocol switch table.  The following requests to a protocol
+module are possible:
+.DS
+._d
+#define	PRU_ATTACH	0	/* attach protocol */
+#define	PRU_DETACH	1	/* detach protocol */
+#define	PRU_BIND	2	/* bind socket to address */
+#define	PRU_LISTEN	3	/* listen for connection */
+#define	PRU_CONNECT	4	/* establish connection to peer */
+#define	PRU_ACCEPT	5	/* accept connection from peer */
+#define	PRU_DISCONNECT	6	/* disconnect from peer */
+#define	PRU_SHUTDOWN	7	/* won't send any more data */
+#define	PRU_RCVD	8	/* have taken data; more room now */
+#define	PRU_SEND	9	/* send this data */
+#define	PRU_ABORT	10	/* abort (fast DISCONNECT, DETATCH) */
+#define	PRU_CONTROL	11	/* control operations on protocol */
+#define	PRU_SENSE	12	/* return status into m */
+#define	PRU_RCVOOB	13	/* retrieve out of band data */
+#define	PRU_SENDOOB	14	/* send out of band data */
+#define	PRU_SOCKADDR	15	/* fetch socket's address */
+#define	PRU_PEERADDR	16	/* fetch peer's address */
+#define	PRU_CONNECT2	17	/* connect two sockets */
+/* begin for protocols internal use */
+#define	PRU_FASTTIMO	18	/* 200ms timeout */
+#define	PRU_SLOWTIMO	19	/* 500ms timeout */
+#define	PRU_PROTORCV	20	/* receive from below */
+#define	PRU_PROTOSEND	21	/* send to below */
+.DE
+A call on the user request routine is of the form,
+.DS
+._f
+error = (*protosw[].pr_usrreq)(so, req, m, addr, rights);
+int error; struct socket *so; int req; struct mbuf *m, *addr, *rights;
+.DE
+The mbuf data chain \fIm\fP is supplied for output operations
+and for certain other operations where it is to receive a result.
+The address \fIaddr\fP is supplied for address-oriented requests
+such as PRU_BIND and PRU_CONNECT.
+The \fIrights\fP parameter is an optional pointer to an mbuf
+chain containing user-specified capabilities (see the \fIsendmsg\fP
+and \fIrecvmsg\fP system calls).  The protocol is responsible for
+disposal of the data mbuf chains on output operations.
+A non-zero return value gives a
+UNIX error number which should be passed to higher level software.
+The following paragraphs describe each
+of the requests possible.
+.IP PRU_ATTACH
+.br
+When a protocol is bound to a socket (with the \fIsocket\fP
+system call) the protocol module is called with this
+request.  It is the responsibility of the protocol module to
+allocate any resources necessary.
+The ``attach'' request
+will always precede any of the other requests, and should not
+occur more than once.
+.IP PRU_DETACH
+.br
+This is the antithesis of the attach request, and is used
+at the time a socket is deleted.  The protocol module may
+deallocate any resources assigned to the socket.
+.IP PRU_BIND
+.br
+When a socket is initially created it has no address bound
+to it.  This request indicates that an address should be bound to
+an existing socket.  The protocol module must verify that the
+requested address is valid and available for use.
+.IP PRU_LISTEN
+.br
+The ``listen'' request indicates the user wishes to listen
+for incoming connection requests on the associated socket.
+The protocol module should perform any state changes needed
+to carry out this request (if possible).  A ``listen'' request
+always precedes a request to accept a connection.
+.IP PRU_CONNECT
+.br
+The ``connect'' request indicates the user wants to a establish
+an association.  The \fIaddr\fP parameter supplied describes
+the peer to be connected to.  The effect of a connect request
+may vary depending on the protocol.  Virtual circuit protocols,
+such as TCP [Postel81b], use this request to initiate establishment of a
+TCP connection.  Datagram protocols, such as UDP [Postel80], simply
+record the peer's address in a private data structure and use
+it to tag all outgoing packets.  There are no restrictions
+on how many times a connect request may be used after an attach.
+If a protocol supports the notion of \fImulti-casting\fP, it
+is possible to use multiple connects to establish a multi-cast
+group.  Alternatively, an association may be broken by a
+PRU_DISCONNECT request, and a new association created with a
+subsequent connect request; all without destroying and creating
+a new socket.
+.IP PRU_ACCEPT
+.br
+Following a successful PRU_LISTEN request and the arrival
+of one or more connections, this request is made to
+indicate the user
+has accepted the first connection on the queue of
+pending connections.  The protocol module should fill
+in the supplied address buffer with the address of the
+connected party.
+.IP PRU_DISCONNECT
+.br
+Eliminate an association created with a PRU_CONNECT request.
+.IP PRU_SHUTDOWN
+.br
+This call is used to indicate no more data will be sent and/or
+received (the \fIaddr\fP parameter indicates the direction of
+the shutdown, as encoded in the \fIsoshutdown\fP system call).
+The protocol may, at its discretion, deallocate any data
+structures related to the shutdown and/or notify a connected peer
+of the shutdown.
+.IP PRU_RCVD
+.br
+This request is made only if the protocol entry in the protocol
+switch table includes the PR_WANTRCVD flag.
+When a user removes data from the receive queue this request
+will be sent to the protocol module.  It may be used to trigger
+acknowledgements, refresh windowing information, initiate
+data transfer, etc.
+.IP PRU_SEND
+.br
+Each user request to send data is translated into one or more
+PRU_SEND requests (a protocol may indicate that a single user
+send request must be translated into a single PRU_SEND request by
+specifying the PR_ATOMIC flag in its protocol description).
+The data to be sent is presented to the protocol as a list of
+mbufs and an address is, optionally, supplied in the \fIaddr\fP
+parameter.  The protocol is responsible for preserving the data
+in the socket's send queue if it is not able to send it immediately,
+or if it may need it at some later time (e.g. for retransmission).
+.IP PRU_ABORT
+.br
+This request indicates an abnormal termination of service.  The
+protocol should delete any existing association(s).
+.IP PRU_CONTROL
+.br
+The ``control'' request is generated when a user performs a
+UNIX \fIioctl\fP system call on a socket (and the ioctl is not
+intercepted by the socket routines).  It allows protocol-specific
+operations to be provided outside the scope of the common socket
+interface.  The \fIaddr\fP parameter contains a pointer to a static
+kernel data area where relevant information may be obtained or returned.
+The \fIm\fP parameter contains the actual \fIioctl\fP request code
+(note the non-standard calling convention).
+The \fIrights\fP parameter contains a pointer to an \fIifnet\fP structure
+if the \fIioctl\fP operation pertains to a particular network interface.
+.IP PRU_SENSE
+.br
+The ``sense'' request is generated when the user makes an \fIfstat\fP
+system call on a socket; it requests status of the associated socket. 
+This currently returns a standard \fIstat\fP structure.
+It typically contains only the
+optimal transfer size for the connection (based on buffer size,
+windowing information and maximum packet size).
+The \fIm\fP parameter contains a pointer
+to a static kernel data area where the status buffer should be placed.
+.IP PRU_RCVOOB
+.br
+Any ``out-of-band'' data presently available is to be returned.  An
+mbuf is passed to the protocol module, and the protocol
+should either place
+data in the mbuf or attach new mbufs to the one supplied if there is
+insufficient space in the single mbuf.
+An error may be returned if out-of-band data is not (yet) available
+or has already been consumed.
+The \fIaddr\fP parameter contains any options such as MSG_PEEK
+to examine data without consuming it.
+.IP PRU_SENDOOB
+.br
+Like PRU_SEND, but for out-of-band data.
+.IP PRU_SOCKADDR
+.br
+The local address of the socket is returned, if any is currently
+bound to it.  The address (with protocol specific format) is returned
+in the \fIaddr\fP parameter.
+.IP PRU_PEERADDR
+.br
+The address of the peer to which the socket is connected is returned.
+The socket must be in a SS_ISCONNECTED state for this request to
+be made to the protocol.  The address format (protocol specific) is
+returned in the \fIaddr\fP parameter.
+.IP PRU_CONNECT2
+.br
+The protocol module is supplied two sockets and requested to
+establish a connection between the two without binding any
+addresses, if possible.  This call is used in implementing
+the
+.IR socketpair (2)
+system call.
+.PP
+The following requests are used internally by the protocol modules
+and are never generated by the socket routines.  In certain instances,
+they are handed to the \fIpr_usrreq\fP routine solely for convenience
+in tracing a protocol's operation (e.g. PRU_SLOWTIMO).
+.IP PRU_FASTTIMO
+.br
+A ``fast timeout'' has occurred.  This request is made when a timeout
+occurs in the protocol's \fIpr_fastimo\fP routine.  The \fIaddr\fP
+parameter indicates which timer expired.
+.IP PRU_SLOWTIMO
+.br
+A ``slow timeout'' has occurred.  This request is made when a timeout
+occurs in the protocol's \fIpr_slowtimo\fP routine.  The \fIaddr\fP
+parameter indicates which timer expired.
+.IP PRU_PROTORCV
+.br
+This request is used in the protocol-protocol interface, not by the
+routines.  It requests reception of data destined for the protocol and
+not the user.  No protocols currently use this facility.
+.IP PRU_PROTOSEND
+.br
+This request allows a protocol to send data destined for another
+protocol module, not a user.  The details of how data is marked
+``addressed to protocol'' instead of ``addressed to user'' are
+left to the protocol modules.  No protocols currently use this facility.
diff --git a/share/doc/smm/18.net/8.t b/share/doc/smm/18.net/8.t
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e65e656
--- /dev/null
+++ b/share/doc/smm/18.net/8.t
@@ -0,0 +1,166 @@
+.\" Copyright (c) 1983, 1986, 1993
+.\"	The Regents of the University of California.  All rights reserved.
+.\"
+.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+.\" are met:
+.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+.\"    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+.\" 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
+.\"    must display the following acknowledgement:
+.\"	This product includes software developed by the University of
+.\"	California, Berkeley and its contributors.
+.\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
+.\"    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+.\"    without specific prior written permission.
+.\"
+.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+.\" ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
+.\"
+.\"	@(#)8.t	8.1 (Berkeley) 6/8/93
+.\"
+.nr H2 1
+.\".ds RH "Protocol/protocol interface
+.br
+.ne 2i
+.NH
+\s+2Protocol/protocol interface\s0
+.PP
+The interface between protocol modules is through the \fIpr_usrreq\fP,
+\fIpr_input\fP, \fIpr_output\fP, \fIpr_ctlinput\fP, and
+\fIpr_ctloutput\fP routines.  The calling conventions for all
+but the \fIpr_usrreq\fP routine are expected to be specific to
+the protocol
+modules and are not guaranteed to be consistent across protocol
+families.  We
+will examine the conventions used for some of the Internet
+protocols in this section as an example.
+.NH 2
+pr_output
+.PP
+The Internet protocol UDP uses the convention,
+.DS
+error = udp_output(inp, m);
+int error; struct inpcb *inp; struct mbuf *m;
+.DE
+where the \fIinp\fP, ``\fIin\fP\^ternet
+\fIp\fP\^rotocol \fIc\fP\^ontrol \fIb\fP\^lock'',
+passed between modules conveys per connection state information, and
+the mbuf chain contains the data to be sent.  UDP
+performs consistency checks, appends its header, calculates a
+checksum, etc. before passing the packet on.
+UDP is based on the Internet Protocol, IP [Postel81a], as its transport.
+UDP passes a packet to the IP module for output as follows:
+.DS
+error = ip_output(m, opt, ro, flags);
+int error; struct mbuf *m, *opt; struct route *ro; int flags;
+.DE
+.PP
+The call to IP's output routine is more complicated than that for
+UDP, as befits the additional work the IP module must do.
+The \fIm\fP parameter is the data to be sent, and the \fIopt\fP
+parameter is an optional list of IP options which should
+be placed in the IP packet header.  The \fIro\fP parameter is
+is used in making routing decisions (and passing them back to the
+caller for use in subsequent calls).  The
+final parameter, \fIflags\fP contains flags indicating whether the
+user is allowed to transmit a broadcast packet
+and if routing is to be performed.  The broadcast flag may
+be inconsequential if the underlying hardware does not support the
+notion of broadcasting.
+.PP
+All output routines return 0 on success and a UNIX error number
+if a failure occurred which could be detected immediately
+(no buffer space available, no route to destination, etc.).
+.NH 2
+pr_input
+.PP
+Both UDP and TCP use the following calling convention,
+.DS
+(void) (*protosw[].pr_input)(m, ifp);
+struct mbuf *m; struct ifnet *ifp;
+.DE
+Each mbuf list passed is a single packet to be processed by
+the protocol module.
+The interface from which the packet was received is passed as the second
+parameter.
+.PP
+The IP input routine is a VAX software interrupt level routine,
+and so is not called with any parameters.  It instead communicates
+with network interfaces through a queue, \fIipintrq\fP, which is
+identical in structure to the queues used by the network interfaces
+for storing packets awaiting transmission.
+The software interrupt is enabled by the network interfaces
+when they place input data on the input queue.
+.NH 2
+pr_ctlinput
+.PP
+This routine is used to convey ``control'' information to a
+protocol module (i.e. information which might be passed to the
+user, but is not data).
+.PP
+The common calling convention for this routine is,
+.DS
+(void) (*protosw[].pr_ctlinput)(req, addr);
+int req; struct sockaddr *addr;
+.DE
+The \fIreq\fP parameter is one of the following,
+.DS
+.ta \w'#define  'u +\w'PRC_UNREACH_NEEDFRAG   'u +8n
+#define	PRC_IFDOWN	0	/* interface transition */
+#define	PRC_ROUTEDEAD	1	/* select new route if possible */
+#define	PRC_QUENCH	4	/* some said to slow down */
+#define	PRC_MSGSIZE	5	/* message size forced drop */
+#define	PRC_HOSTDEAD	6	/* normally from IMP */
+#define	PRC_HOSTUNREACH	7	/* ditto */
+#define	PRC_UNREACH_NET	8	/* no route to network */
+#define	PRC_UNREACH_HOST	9	/* no route to host */
+#define	PRC_UNREACH_PROTOCOL	10	/* dst says bad protocol */
+#define	PRC_UNREACH_PORT	11	/* bad port # */
+#define	PRC_UNREACH_NEEDFRAG	12	/* IP_DF caused drop */
+#define	PRC_UNREACH_SRCFAIL	13	/* source route failed */
+#define	PRC_REDIRECT_NET	14	/* net routing redirect */
+#define	PRC_REDIRECT_HOST	15	/* host routing redirect */
+#define	PRC_REDIRECT_TOSNET	14	/* redirect for type of service & net */
+#define	PRC_REDIRECT_TOSHOST	15	/* redirect for tos & host */
+#define	PRC_TIMXCEED_INTRANS	18	/* packet lifetime expired in transit */
+#define	PRC_TIMXCEED_REASS	19	/* lifetime expired on reass q */
+#define	PRC_PARAMPROB	20	/* header incorrect */
+.DE
+while the \fIaddr\fP parameter is the address to which the condition applies.
+Many of the requests have obviously been
+derived from ICMP (the Internet Control Message Protocol [Postel81c]),
+and from error messages defined in the 1822 host/IMP convention
+[BBN78].  Mapping tables exist to convert
+control requests to UNIX error codes which are delivered
+to a user.
+.NH 2
+pr_ctloutput
+.PP
+This is the routine that implements per-socket options at the protocol
+level for \fIgetsockopt\fP and \fIsetsockopt\fP.
+The calling convention is,
+.DS
+error = (*protosw[].pr_ctloutput)(op, so, level, optname, mp);
+int op; struct socket *so; int level, optname; struct mbuf **mp;
+.DE
+where \fIop\fP is one of PRCO_SETOPT or PRCO_GETOPT,
+\fIso\fP is the socket from whence the call originated,
+and \fIlevel\fP and \fIoptname\fP are the protocol level and option name
+supplied by the user.
+The results of a PRCO_GETOPT call are returned in an mbuf whose address
+is placed in \fImp\fP before return.
+On a PRCO_SETOPT call, \fImp\fP contains the address of an mbuf
+containing the option data; the mbuf should be freed before return.
diff --git a/share/doc/smm/18.net/9.t b/share/doc/smm/18.net/9.t
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..506037a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/share/doc/smm/18.net/9.t
@@ -0,0 +1,124 @@
+.\" Copyright (c) 1983, 1986, 1993
+.\"	The Regents of the University of California.  All rights reserved.
+.\"
+.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+.\" are met:
+.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+.\"    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+.\" 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
+.\"    must display the following acknowledgement:
+.\"	This product includes software developed by the University of
+.\"	California, Berkeley and its contributors.
+.\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
+.\"    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+.\"    without specific prior written permission.
+.\"
+.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+.\" ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
+.\"
+.\"	@(#)9.t	8.1 (Berkeley) 6/8/93
+.\"
+.nr H2 1
+.\".ds RH "Protocol/network-interface
+.br
+.ne 2i
+.NH
+\s+2Protocol/network-interface interface\s0
+.PP
+The lowest layer in the set of protocols which comprise a
+protocol family must interface itself to one or more network
+interfaces in order to transmit and receive
+packets.  It is assumed that
+any routing decisions have been made before handing a packet
+to a network interface, in fact this is absolutely necessary
+in order to locate any interface at all (unless, of course,
+one uses a single ``hardwired'' interface).  There are two
+cases with which to be concerned, transmission of a packet
+and receipt of a packet; each will be considered separately.
+.NH 2
+Packet transmission
+.PP
+Assuming a protocol has a handle on an interface, \fIifp\fP,
+a (struct ifnet\ *),
+it transmits a fully formatted packet with the following call,
+.DS
+error = (*ifp->if_output)(ifp, m, dst)
+int error; struct ifnet *ifp; struct mbuf *m; struct sockaddr *dst;
+.DE
+The output routine for the network interface transmits the packet
+\fIm\fP to the \fIdst\fP address, or returns an error indication
+(a UNIX error number).  In reality transmission may
+not be immediate or successful; normally the output
+routine simply queues the packet on its send queue and primes
+an interrupt driven routine to actually transmit the packet.
+For unreliable media, such as the Ethernet, ``successful''
+transmission simply means that the packet has been placed on the cable
+without a collision.  On the other hand, an 1822 interface guarantees
+proper delivery or an error indication for each message transmitted.
+The model employed in the networking system attaches no promises
+of delivery to the packets handed to a network interface, and thus
+corresponds more closely to the Ethernet.  Errors returned by the
+output routine are only those that can be detected immediately,
+and are normally trivial in nature (no buffer space, 
+address format not handled, etc.).
+No indication is received if errors are detected after the call has returned.
+.NH 2
+Packet reception
+.PP
+Each protocol family must have one or more ``lowest level'' protocols.
+These protocols deal with internetwork addressing and are responsible
+for the delivery of incoming packets to the proper protocol processing
+modules.  In the PUP model [Boggs78] these protocols are termed Level
+1 protocols,
+in the ISO model, network layer protocols.  In this system each such
+protocol module has an input packet queue assigned to it.  Incoming
+packets received by a network interface are queued for the protocol
+module, and a VAX software interrupt is posted to initiate processing.  
+.PP
+Three macros are available for queuing and dequeuing packets:
+.IP "IF_ENQUEUE(ifq, m)"
+.br
+This places the packet \fIm\fP at the tail of the queue \fIifq\fP.
+.IP "IF_DEQUEUE(ifq, m)"
+.br
+This places a pointer to the packet at the head of queue \fIifq\fP 
+in \fIm\fP
+and removes the packet from the queue.
+A zero value will be returned in \fIm\fP if the queue is empty.
+.IP "IF_DEQUEUEIF(ifq, m, ifp)"
+.br
+Like IF_DEQUEUE, this removes the next packet from the head of a queue
+and returns it in \fIm\fP.
+A pointer to the interface on which the packet was received
+is placed in \fIifp\fP, a (struct ifnet\ *).
+.IP "IF_PREPEND(ifq, m)"
+.br
+This places the packet \fIm\fP at the head of the queue \fIifq\fP.
+.PP
+Each queue has a maximum length associated with it as a simple form
+of congestion control.  The macro IF_QFULL(ifq) returns 1 if the queue
+is filled, in which case the macro IF_DROP(ifq) should be used to
+increment the count of the number of packets dropped, and the offending
+packet is dropped.  For example, the following code fragment is commonly
+found in a network interface's input routine,
+.DS 
+._f
+if (IF_QFULL(inq)) {
+	IF_DROP(inq);
+	m_freem(m);
+} else
+	IF_ENQUEUE(inq, m);
+.DE
diff --git a/share/doc/smm/18.net/Makefile b/share/doc/smm/18.net/Makefile
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fde100a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/share/doc/smm/18.net/Makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,10 @@
+#	@(#)Makefile	8.1 (Berkeley) 6/10/93
+
+DIR=	smm/18.net
+SRCS=	0.t 1.t 2.t 3.t 4.t 5.t 6.t 7.t 8.t 9.t a.t b.t c.t d.t e.t f.t
+MACROS=	-ms
+
+paper.ps: ${SRCS}
+	${TBL} ${SRCS} | ${ROFF} > ${.TARGET}
+
+.include <bsd.doc.mk>
diff --git a/share/doc/smm/18.net/a.t b/share/doc/smm/18.net/a.t
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..dddba57
--- /dev/null
+++ b/share/doc/smm/18.net/a.t
@@ -0,0 +1,219 @@
+.\" Copyright (c) 1983, 1986, 1993
+.\"	The Regents of the University of California.  All rights reserved.
+.\"
+.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+.\" are met:
+.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+.\"    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+.\" 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
+.\"    must display the following acknowledgement:
+.\"	This product includes software developed by the University of
+.\"	California, Berkeley and its contributors.
+.\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
+.\"    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+.\"    without specific prior written permission.
+.\"
+.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+.\" ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
+.\"
+.\"	@(#)a.t	8.1 (Berkeley) 6/8/93
+.\"
+.nr H2 1
+.\".ds RH "Gateways and routing
+.br
+.ne 2i
+.NH
+\s+2Gateways and routing issues\s0
+.PP
+The system has been designed with the expectation that it will
+be used in an internetwork environment.  The ``canonical''
+environment was envisioned to be a collection of local area
+networks connected at one or more points through hosts with
+multiple network interfaces (one on each local area network),
+and possibly a connection to a long haul network (for example,
+the ARPANET).  In such an environment, issues of
+gatewaying and packet routing become very important.  Certain
+of these issues, such as congestion
+control, have been handled in a simplistic manner or specifically
+not addressed.
+Instead, where possible, the network system
+attempts to provide simple mechanisms upon which more involved
+policies may be implemented.  As some of these problems become
+better understood, the solutions developed will be incorporated
+into the system.
+.PP
+This section will describe the facilities provided for packet
+routing.  The simplistic mechanisms provided for congestion
+control are described in chapter 12.
+.NH 2
+Routing tables
+.PP
+The network system maintains a set of routing tables for
+selecting a network interface to use in delivering a 
+packet to its destination.  These tables are of the form:
+.DS
+.ta \w'struct   'u +\w'u_long   'u +\w'sockaddr rt_gateway;    'u
+struct rtentry {
+	u_long	rt_hash;		/* hash key for lookups */
+	struct	sockaddr rt_dst;	/* destination net or host */
+	struct	sockaddr rt_gateway;	/* forwarding agent */
+	short	rt_flags;		/* see below */
+	short	rt_refcnt;		/* no. of references to structure */
+	u_long	rt_use;			/* packets sent using route */
+	struct	ifnet *rt_ifp;		/* interface to give packet to */
+};
+.DE
+.PP
+The routing information is organized in two separate tables, one
+for routes to a host and one for routes to a network.  The
+distinction between hosts and networks is necessary so
+that a single mechanism may be used
+for both broadcast and multi-drop type networks, and
+also for networks built from point-to-point links (e.g
+DECnet [DEC80]).
+.PP
+Each table is organized as a hashed set of linked lists.
+Two 32-bit hash values are calculated by routines defined for
+each address family; one based on the destination being
+a host, and one assuming the target is the network portion
+of the address.  Each hash value is used to
+locate a hash chain to search (by taking the value modulo the
+hash table size) and the entire 32-bit value is then
+used as a key in scanning the list of routes.  Lookups are
+applied first to the routing
+table for hosts, then to the routing table for networks.
+If both lookups fail, a final lookup is made for a ``wildcard''
+route (by convention, network 0).
+The first appropriate route discovered is used.
+By doing this, routes to a specific host on a network may be
+present as well as routes to the network.  This also allows a
+``fall back'' network route to be defined to a ``smart'' gateway
+which may then perform more intelligent routing.
+.PP
+Each routing table entry contains a destination (the desired final destination),
+a gateway to which to send the packet,
+and various flags which indicate the route's status and type (host or
+network).  A count
+of the number of packets sent using the route is kept, along
+with a count of ``held references'' to the dynamically
+allocated structure to insure that memory reclamation
+occurs only when the route is not in use.  Finally, a pointer to the
+a network interface is kept; packets sent using
+the route should be handed to this interface.
+.PP
+Routes are typed in two ways: either as host or network, and as
+``direct'' or ``indirect''.  The host/network
+distinction determines how to compare the \fIrt_dst\fP field
+during lookup.  If the route is to a network, only a packet's
+destination network is compared to the \fIrt_dst\fP entry stored
+in the table.  If the route is to a host, the addresses must
+match bit for bit.
+.PP
+The distinction between ``direct'' and ``indirect'' routes indicates
+whether the destination is directly connected to the source.
+This is needed when performing local network encapsulation.  If
+a packet is destined for a peer at a host or network which is
+not directly connected to the source, the internetwork packet
+header will
+contain the address of the eventual destination, while
+the local network header will address the intervening
+gateway.  Should the destination be directly connected, these addresses
+are likely to be identical, or a mapping between the two exists.
+The RTF_GATEWAY flag indicates that the route is to an ``indirect''
+gateway agent, and that the local network header should be filled in
+from the \fIrt_gateway\fP field instead of
+from the final internetwork destination address.
+.PP
+It is assumed that multiple routes to the same destination will not
+be present; only one of multiple routes, that most recently installed,
+will be used.
+.PP
+Routing redirect control messages are used to dynamically
+modify existing routing table entries as well as dynamically
+create new routing table entries.  On hosts where exhaustive
+routing information is too expensive to maintain (e.g. work
+stations), the
+combination of wildcard routing entries and routing redirect
+messages can be used to provide a simple routing management
+scheme without the use of a higher level policy process. 
+Current connections may be rerouted after notification of the protocols
+by means of their \fIpr_ctlinput\fP entries.
+Statistics are kept by the routing table routines
+on the use of routing redirect messages and their
+affect on the routing tables.  These statistics may be viewed using
+.IR netstat (1).
+.PP
+Status information other than routing redirect control messages
+may be used in the future, but at present they are ignored.
+Likewise, more intelligent ``metrics'' may be used to describe
+routes in the future, possibly based on bandwidth and monetary
+costs.
+.NH 2
+Routing table interface
+.PP
+A protocol accesses the routing tables through
+three routines,
+one to allocate a route, one to free a route, and one
+to process a routing redirect control message.
+The routine \fIrtalloc\fP performs route allocation; it is
+called with a pointer to the following structure containing
+the desired destination:
+.DS
+._f
+struct route {
+	struct	rtentry *ro_rt;
+	struct	sockaddr ro_dst;
+};
+.DE
+The route returned is assumed ``held'' by the caller until
+released with an \fIrtfree\fP call.  Protocols which implement
+virtual circuits, such as TCP, hold onto routes for the duration
+of the circuit's lifetime, while connection-less protocols,
+such as UDP, allocate and free routes whenever their destination address
+changes.
+.PP
+The routine \fIrtredirect\fP is called to process a routing redirect
+control message.  It is called with a destination address,
+the new gateway to that destination, and the source of the redirect.
+Redirects are accepted only from the current router for the destination.
+If a non-wildcard route
+exists to the destination, the gateway entry in the route is modified 
+to point at the new gateway supplied.  Otherwise, a new routing
+table entry is inserted reflecting the information supplied.  Routes
+to interfaces and routes to gateways which are not directly accessible
+from the host are ignored.
+.NH 2
+User level routing policies
+.PP
+Routing policies implemented in user processes manipulate the
+kernel routing tables through two \fIioctl\fP calls.  The
+commands SIOCADDRT and SIOCDELRT add and delete routing entries,
+respectively; the tables are read through the /dev/kmem device.
+The decision to place policy decisions in a user process implies
+that routing table updates may lag a bit behind the identification of
+new routes, or the failure of existing routes, but this period
+of instability is normally very small with proper implementation
+of the routing process.  Advisory information, such as ICMP
+error messages and IMP diagnostic messages, may be read from
+raw sockets (described in the next section).
+.PP
+Several routing policy processes have already been implemented.  The
+system standard
+``routing daemon'' uses a variant of the Xerox NS Routing Information
+Protocol [Xerox82] to maintain up-to-date routing tables in our local
+environment.  Interaction with other existing routing protocols,
+such as the Internet EGP (Exterior Gateway Protocol), has been
+accomplished using a similar process.
diff --git a/share/doc/smm/18.net/b.t b/share/doc/smm/18.net/b.t
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2e39a8a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/share/doc/smm/18.net/b.t
@@ -0,0 +1,145 @@
+.\" Copyright (c) 1983, 1986, 1993
+.\"	The Regents of the University of California.  All rights reserved.
+.\"
+.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+.\" are met:
+.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+.\"    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+.\" 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
+.\"    must display the following acknowledgement:
+.\"	This product includes software developed by the University of
+.\"	California, Berkeley and its contributors.
+.\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
+.\"    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+.\"    without specific prior written permission.
+.\"
+.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+.\" ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
+.\"
+.\"	@(#)b.t	8.1 (Berkeley) 6/8/93
+.\"
+.nr H2 1
+.\".ds RH "Raw sockets
+.br
+.ne 2i
+.NH
+\s+2Raw sockets\s0
+.PP
+A raw socket is an object which allows users direct access
+to a lower-level protocol.  Raw sockets are intended for knowledgeable
+processes which wish to take advantage of some protocol
+feature not directly accessible through the normal interface, or 
+for the development of new protocols built atop existing lower level
+protocols.  For example, a new version of TCP might be developed at the
+user level by utilizing a raw IP socket for delivery of packets.
+The raw IP socket interface attempts to provide an identical interface
+to the one a protocol would have if it were resident in the kernel.
+.PP
+The raw socket support is built around a generic raw socket interface,
+(possibly) augmented by protocol-specific processing routines.
+This section will describe the core of the raw socket interface.
+.NH 2
+Control blocks
+.PP
+Every raw socket has a protocol control block of the following form:
+.DS
+.ta \w'struct  'u +\w'caddr_t  'u +\w'sockproto rcb_proto;    'u 
+struct rawcb {
+	struct	rawcb *rcb_next;	/* doubly linked list */
+	struct	rawcb *rcb_prev;
+	struct	socket *rcb_socket;	/* back pointer to socket */
+	struct	sockaddr rcb_faddr;	/* destination address */
+	struct	sockaddr rcb_laddr;	/* socket's address */
+	struct	sockproto rcb_proto;	/* protocol family, protocol */
+	caddr_t	rcb_pcb;		/* protocol specific stuff */
+	struct	mbuf *rcb_options;	/* protocol specific options */
+	struct	route rcb_route;	/* routing information */
+	short	rcb_flags;
+};
+.DE
+All the control blocks are kept on a doubly linked list for
+performing lookups during packet dispatch.  Associations may
+be recorded in the control block and used by the output routine
+in preparing packets for transmission.
+The \fIrcb_proto\fP structure contains the protocol family and protocol
+number with which the raw socket is associated.
+The protocol, family and addresses are
+used to filter packets on input; this will be described in more
+detail shortly.  If any protocol-specific information is required,
+it may be attached to the control block using the \fIrcb_pcb\fP
+field.
+Protocol-specific options for transmission in outgoing packets
+may be stored in \fIrcb_options\fP.
+.PP
+A raw socket interface is datagram oriented.  That is, each send
+or receive on the socket requires a destination address.  This
+address may be supplied by the user or stored in the control block
+and automatically installed in the outgoing packet by the output
+routine.  Since it is not possible to determine whether an address
+is present or not in the control block, two flags, RAW_LADDR and
+RAW_FADDR, indicate if a local and foreign address are present.
+Routing is expected to be performed by the underlying protocol
+if necessary.
+.NH 2
+Input processing
+.PP
+Input packets are ``assigned'' to raw sockets based on a simple
+pattern matching scheme.  Each network interface or protocol
+gives unassigned packets
+to the raw input routine with the call:
+.DS
+raw_input(m, proto, src, dst)
+struct mbuf *m; struct sockproto *proto, struct sockaddr *src, *dst;
+.DE
+The data packet then has a generic header prepended to it of the
+form
+.DS
+._f
+struct raw_header {
+	struct	sockproto raw_proto;
+	struct	sockaddr raw_dst;
+	struct	sockaddr raw_src;
+};
+.DE
+and it is placed in a packet queue for the ``raw input protocol'' module.
+Packets taken from this queue are copied into any raw sockets that
+match the header according to the following rules,
+.IP 1)
+The protocol family of the socket and header agree.
+.IP 2)
+If the protocol number in the socket is non-zero, then it agrees
+with that found in the packet header.
+.IP 3)
+If a local address is defined for the socket, the address format
+of the local address is the same as the destination address's and
+the two addresses agree bit for bit.
+.IP 4)
+The rules of 3) are applied to the socket's foreign address and the packet's
+source address.
+.LP
+A basic assumption is that addresses present in the
+control block and packet header (as constructed by the network
+interface and any raw input protocol module) are in a canonical
+form which may be ``block compared''.
+.NH 2
+Output processing
+.PP
+On output the raw \fIpr_usrreq\fP routine 
+passes the packet and a pointer to the raw control block to the
+raw protocol output routine for any processing required before
+it is delivered to the appropriate network interface.  The
+output routine is normally the only code required to implement
+a raw socket interface.
diff --git a/share/doc/smm/18.net/c.t b/share/doc/smm/18.net/c.t
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2c7f752
--- /dev/null
+++ b/share/doc/smm/18.net/c.t
@@ -0,0 +1,151 @@
+.\" Copyright (c) 1983, 1986, 1993
+.\"	The Regents of the University of California.  All rights reserved.
+.\"
+.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+.\" are met:
+.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+.\"    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+.\" 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
+.\"    must display the following acknowledgement:
+.\"	This product includes software developed by the University of
+.\"	California, Berkeley and its contributors.
+.\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
+.\"    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+.\"    without specific prior written permission.
+.\"
+.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+.\" ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
+.\"
+.\"	@(#)c.t	8.1 (Berkeley) 6/8/93
+.\"
+.nr H2 1
+.\".ds RH "Buffering and congestion control
+.br
+.ne 2i
+.NH
+\s+2Buffering and congestion control\s0
+.PP
+One of the major factors in the performance of a protocol is
+the buffering policy used.  Lack of a proper buffering policy
+can force packets to be dropped, cause falsified windowing
+information to be emitted by protocols, fragment host memory,
+degrade the overall host performance, etc.  Due to problems
+such as these, most systems allocate a fixed pool of memory
+to the networking system and impose
+a policy optimized for ``normal'' network operation.  
+.PP
+The networking system developed for UNIX is little different in this
+respect.  At boot time a fixed amount of memory is allocated by
+the networking system.  At later times more system memory
+may be requested as the need arises, but at no time is
+memory ever returned to the system.  It is possible to
+garbage collect memory from the network, but difficult.  In
+order to perform this garbage collection properly, some
+portion of the network will have to be ``turned off'' as
+data structures are updated.  The interval over which this
+occurs must kept small compared to the average inter-packet
+arrival time, or too much traffic may
+be lost, impacting other hosts on the network, as well as
+increasing load on the interconnecting mediums.  In our
+environment we have not experienced a need for such compaction,
+and thus have left the problem unresolved.
+.PP
+The mbuf structure was introduced in chapter 5.  In this
+section a brief description will be given of the allocation
+mechanisms, and policies used by the protocols in performing
+connection level buffering.
+.NH 2
+Memory management
+.PP
+The basic memory allocation routines manage a private page map,
+the size of which determines the maximum amount of memory
+that may be allocated by the network.
+A small amount of memory is allocated at boot time
+to initialize the mbuf and mbuf page cluster free lists.
+When the free lists are exhausted, more memory is requested
+from the system memory allocator if space remains in the map.
+If memory cannot be allocated,
+callers may block awaiting free memory,
+or the failure may be reflected to the caller immediately.
+The allocator will not block awaiting free map entries, however,
+as exhaustion of the page map usually indicates that buffers have been lost
+due to a ``leak.''
+The private page table is used by the network buffer management
+routines in remapping pages to
+be logically contiguous as the need arises.  In addition, an
+array of reference counts parallels the page table and is used
+when multiple references to a page are present.
+.PP
+Mbufs are 128 byte structures, 8 fitting in a 1Kbyte
+page of memory.  When data is placed in mbufs,
+it is copied or remapped into logically contiguous pages of
+memory from the network page pool if possible.
+Data smaller than half of the size
+of a page is copied into one or more 112 byte mbuf data areas. 
+.NH 2
+Protocol buffering policies
+.PP
+Protocols reserve fixed amounts of
+buffering for send and receive queues at socket creation time.  These
+amounts define the high and low water marks used by the socket routines
+in deciding when to block and unblock a process.  The reservation
+of space does not currently
+result in any action by the memory management
+routines.
+.PP
+Protocols which provide connection level flow control do this
+based on the amount of space in the associated socket queues.  That
+is, send windows are calculated based on the amount of free space
+in the socket's receive queue, while receive windows are adjusted
+based on the amount of data awaiting transmission in the send queue.
+Care has been taken to avoid the ``silly window syndrome'' described
+in [Clark82] at both the sending and receiving ends.
+.NH 2
+Queue limiting
+.PP
+Incoming packets from the network are always received unless
+memory allocation fails.  However, each Level 1 protocol
+input queue
+has an upper bound on the queue's length, and any packets
+exceeding that bound are discarded.  It is possible for a host to be
+overwhelmed by excessive network traffic (for instance a host
+acting as a gateway from a high bandwidth network to a low bandwidth
+network).  As a ``defensive'' mechanism the queue limits may be
+adjusted to throttle network traffic load on a host.
+Consider a host willing to devote some percentage of
+its machine to handling network traffic. 
+If the cost of handling an
+incoming packet can be calculated so that an acceptable
+``packet handling rate''
+can be determined, then input queue lengths may be dynamically
+adjusted based on a host's network load and the number of packets
+awaiting processing.  Obviously, discarding packets is
+not a satisfactory solution to a problem such as this
+(simply dropping packets is likely to increase the load on a network);
+the queue lengths were incorporated mainly as a safeguard mechanism.
+.NH 2
+Packet forwarding
+.PP
+When packets can not be forwarded because of memory limitations,
+the system attempts to generate a ``source quench'' message.  In addition,
+any other problems encountered during packet forwarding are also
+reflected back to the sender in the form of ICMP packets.  This
+helps hosts avoid unneeded retransmissions.
+.PP
+Broadcast packets are never forwarded due to possible dire
+consequences.  In an early stage of network development, broadcast
+packets were forwarded and a ``routing loop'' resulted in network
+saturation and every host on the network crashing.
diff --git a/share/doc/smm/18.net/d.t b/share/doc/smm/18.net/d.t
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..675bece
--- /dev/null
+++ b/share/doc/smm/18.net/d.t
@@ -0,0 +1,73 @@
+.\" Copyright (c) 1983, 1986, 1993
+.\"	The Regents of the University of California.  All rights reserved.
+.\"
+.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+.\" are met:
+.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+.\"    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+.\" 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
+.\"    must display the following acknowledgement:
+.\"	This product includes software developed by the University of
+.\"	California, Berkeley and its contributors.
+.\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
+.\"    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+.\"    without specific prior written permission.
+.\"
+.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+.\" ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
+.\"
+.\"	@(#)d.t	8.1 (Berkeley) 6/8/93
+.\"
+.nr H2 1
+.\".ds RH "Out of band data
+.br
+.ne 2i
+.NH
+\s+2Out of band data\s0
+.PP
+Out of band data is a facility peculiar to the stream socket
+abstraction defined.  Little agreement appears to exist as
+to what its semantics should be.  TCP defines the notion of
+``urgent data'' as in-line, while the NBS protocols [Burruss81]
+and numerous others provide a fully independent logical
+transmission channel along which out of band data is to be
+sent.
+In addition, the amount of the data which may be sent as an out
+of band message varies from protocol to protocol; everything
+from 1 bit to 16 bytes or more.
+.PP
+A stream socket's notion of out of band data has been defined
+as the lowest reasonable common denominator (at least reasonable
+in our minds);
+clearly this is subject to debate.  Out of band data is expected
+to be transmitted out of the normal sequencing and flow control
+constraints of the data stream.  A minimum of 1 byte of out of
+band data and one outstanding out of band message are expected to
+be supported by the protocol supporting a stream socket.
+It is a protocol's prerogative to support larger-sized messages, or
+more than one outstanding out of band message at a time.
+.PP
+Out of band data is maintained by the protocol and is usually not
+stored in the socket's receive queue.
+A socket-level option, SO_OOBINLINE,
+is provided to force out-of-band data to be placed in the normal
+receive queue when urgent data is received;
+this sometimes amelioriates problems due to loss of data
+when multiple out-of-band
+segments are received before the first has been passed to the user.
+The PRU_SENDOOB and PRU_RCVOOB
+requests to the \fIpr_usrreq\fP routine are used in sending and
+receiving data.
diff --git a/share/doc/smm/18.net/e.t b/share/doc/smm/18.net/e.t
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..77e8a2a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/share/doc/smm/18.net/e.t
@@ -0,0 +1,129 @@
+.\" Copyright (c) 1983, 1986, 1993
+.\"	The Regents of the University of California.  All rights reserved.
+.\"
+.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+.\" are met:
+.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+.\"    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+.\" 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
+.\"    must display the following acknowledgement:
+.\"	This product includes software developed by the University of
+.\"	California, Berkeley and its contributors.
+.\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
+.\"    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+.\"    without specific prior written permission.
+.\"
+.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+.\" ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
+.\"
+.\"	@(#)e.t	8.1 (Berkeley) 6/8/93
+.\"
+.nr H2 1
+.\".ds RH "Trailer protocols
+.br
+.ne 2i
+.NH
+\s+2Trailer protocols\s0
+.PP
+Core to core copies can be expensive.
+Consequently, a great deal of effort was spent
+in minimizing such operations.  The VAX architecture
+provides virtual memory hardware organized in
+page units.  To cut down on copy operations, data
+is kept in page-sized units on page-aligned
+boundaries whenever possible.  This allows data
+to be moved in memory simply by remapping the page
+instead of copying.  The mbuf and network
+interface routines perform page table manipulations
+where needed, hiding the complexities of the VAX
+virtual memory hardware from higher level code. 
+.PP
+Data enters the system in two ways: from the user,
+or from the network (hardware interface).  When data
+is copied from the user's address space
+into the system it is deposited in pages (if sufficient
+data is present).
+This encourages the user to transmit information in
+messages which are a multiple of the system page size.
+.PP
+Unfortunately, performing a similar operation when taking
+data from the network is very difficult.
+Consider the format of an incoming packet.  A packet
+usually contains a local network header followed by
+one or more headers used by the high level protocols. 
+Finally, the data, if any, follows these headers.  Since
+the header information may be variable length, DMA'ing the eventual
+data for the user into a page aligned area of
+memory is impossible without
+\fIa priori\fP knowledge of the format (e.g., by supporting
+only a single protocol header format).
+.PP
+To allow variable length header information to
+be present and still ensure page alignment of data,
+a special local network encapsulation may be used.
+This encapsulation, termed a \fItrailer protocol\fP [Leffler84],
+places the variable length header information after
+the data.  A fixed size local network
+header is then prepended to the resultant packet. 
+The local network header contains the size of the
+data portion (in units of 512 bytes), and a new \fItrailer protocol
+header\fP, inserted before the variable length
+information, contains the size of the variable length
+header information.  The following trailer
+protocol header is used to store information
+regarding the variable length protocol header:
+.DS
+._f
+struct {
+	short	protocol;	/* original protocol no. */
+	short	length;	/* length of trailer */
+};
+.DE
+.PP
+The processing of the trailer protocol is very
+simple.  On output, the local network header indicates that
+a trailer encapsulation is being used.
+The header also includes an indication
+of the number of data pages present before the trailer
+protocol header.  The trailer protocol header is
+initialized to contain the actual protocol identifier and the
+variable length header size, and is appended to the data
+along with the variable length header information.
+.PP
+On input, the interface routines identify the
+trailer encapsulation
+by the protocol type stored in the local network header,
+then calculate the number of
+pages of data to find the beginning of the trailer. 
+The trailing information is copied into a separate
+mbuf and linked to the front of the resultant packet.
+.PP
+Clearly, trailer protocols require cooperation between
+source and destination.  In addition, they are normally
+cost effective only when sizable packets are used.  The
+current scheme works because the local network encapsulation
+header is a fixed size, allowing DMA operations
+to be performed at a known offset from the first data page
+being received.  Should the local network header be
+variable length this scheme fails. 
+.PP
+Statistics collected indicate that as much as 200Kb/s
+can be gained by using a trailer protocol with
+1Kbyte packets.  The average size of the variable
+length header was 40 bytes (the size of a
+minimal TCP/IP packet header).  If hardware
+supports larger sized packets, even greater gains
+may be realized.
diff --git a/share/doc/smm/18.net/f.t b/share/doc/smm/18.net/f.t
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..18995fd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/share/doc/smm/18.net/f.t
@@ -0,0 +1,117 @@
+.\" Copyright (c) 1983, 1986, 1993
+.\"	The Regents of the University of California.  All rights reserved.
+.\"
+.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+.\" are met:
+.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+.\"    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+.\" 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
+.\"    must display the following acknowledgement:
+.\"	This product includes software developed by the University of
+.\"	California, Berkeley and its contributors.
+.\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
+.\"    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+.\"    without specific prior written permission.
+.\"
+.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+.\" ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
+.\"
+.\"	@(#)f.t	8.1 (Berkeley) 6/8/93
+.\"
+.nr H2 1
+.\".ds RH Acknowledgements
+.br
+.ne 2i
+.SH
+\s+2Acknowledgements\s0
+.PP
+The internal structure of the system is patterned
+after the Xerox PUP architecture [Boggs79], while in certain
+places the Internet
+protocol family has had a great deal of influence in the design.
+The use of software interrupts for process invocation
+is based on similar facilities found in
+the VMS operating system.
+Many of the
+ideas related to protocol modularity, memory management, and network
+interfaces are based on Rob Gurwitz's TCP/IP implementation for the 
+4.1BSD version of UNIX on the VAX [Gurwitz81].
+Greg Chesson explained his use of trailer encapsulations in Datakit,
+instigating their use in our system.
+.\".ds RH References
+.nr H2 1
+.sp 2
+.ne 2i
+.SH
+\s+2References\s0
+.LP
+.IP [Boggs79] 20
+Boggs, D. R., J. F. Shoch, E. A. Taft, and R. M. Metcalfe;
+\fIPUP: An Internetwork Architecture\fP.  Report CSL-79-10.
+XEROX Palo Alto Research Center, July 1979.
+.IP [BBN78] 20
+Bolt Beranek and Newman;
+Specification for the Interconnection of Host and IMP.
+BBN Technical Report 1822.  May 1978.
+.IP [Cerf78] 20
+Cerf, V. G.;  The Catenet Model for Internetworking.
+Internet Working Group, IEN 48.  July 1978.
+.IP [Clark82] 20
+Clark, D. D.;  Window and Acknowledgement Strategy in TCP, RFC-813.
+Network Information Center, SRI International.  July 1982.
+.IP [DEC80] 20
+Digital Equipment Corporation;  \fIDECnet DIGITAL Network
+Architecture \- General Description\fP.  Order No.
+AA-K179A-TK.  October 1980.
+.IP [Gurwitz81] 20
+Gurwitz, R. F.;  VAX-UNIX Networking Support Project \- Implementation
+Description.  Internetwork Working Group, IEN 168.
+January 1981.
+.IP [ISO81] 20
+International Organization for Standardization.
+\fIISO Open Systems Interconnection \- Basic Reference Model\fP.
+ISO/TC 97/SC 16 N 719.  August 1981.
+.IP [Joy86] 20
+Joy, W.; Fabry, R.; Leffler, S.; McKusick, M.; and Karels, M.;
+Berkeley Software Architecture Manual, 4.4BSD Edition.
+\fIUNIX Programmer's Supplementary Documents\fP, Vol. 1 (PSD:5).
+Computer Systems Research Group,
+University of California, Berkeley.
+May, 1986.
+.IP [Leffler84] 20
+Leffler, S.J. and Karels, M.J.; Trailer Encapsulations, RFC-893.
+Network Information Center, SRI International.
+April 1984.
+.IP [Postel80] 20
+Postel, J.  User Datagram Protocol, RFC-768.
+Network Information Center, SRI International.  May 1980.
+.IP [Postel81a] 20
+Postel, J., ed.  Internet Protocol, RFC-791.
+Network Information Center, SRI International.  September 1981.
+.IP [Postel81b] 20
+Postel, J., ed.  Transmission Control Protocol, RFC-793.
+Network Information Center, SRI International.  September 1981.
+.IP [Postel81c] 20
+Postel, J.  Internet Control Message Protocol, RFC-792.
+Network Information Center, SRI International.  September 1981.
+.IP [Xerox81] 20
+Xerox Corporation.  \fIInternet Transport Protocols\fP. 
+Xerox System Integration Standard 028112.  December 1981.
+.IP [Zimmermann80] 20
+Zimmermann, H.  OSI Reference Model \- The ISO Model of
+Architecture for Open Systems Interconnection.
+\fIIEEE Transactions on Communications\fP.  Com-28(4); 425-432.
+April 1980.
diff --git a/share/doc/smm/18.net/spell.ok b/share/doc/smm/18.net/spell.ok
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f9a387b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/share/doc/smm/18.net/spell.ok
@@ -0,0 +1,307 @@
+A,1986A
+AA
+ACCEPTCONN
+ADDR
+ARPANET
+ASYNC
+BBN
+BBN78
+Beranek
+Boggs
+Boggs78
+Boggs79
+Burruss81
+CANTRCVMORE
+CANTSENDMORE
+CLSIZE
+COLL
+CONNECT2
+CONNREQUIRED
+COPYALL
+CSL
+Catenet
+Cerf
+Cerf78
+Chesson
+Clark82
+Com
+DEC80
+DECnet
+DEQUEUE
+DEQUEUEIF
+DETATCH
+DMA
+DMA'ing
+DMR
+DONTWAIT
+Datagram
+Datakit
+EGP
+EWOULDBLOCK
+Ethernet
+FADDR
+FASTTIMO
+Fabry
+GETOPT
+Gurwitz
+Gurwitz's
+Gurwitz81
+HASCL
+HOSTDEAD
+HOSTUNREACH
+ICMP
+IEN
+IFDOWN
+IFF
+IFRW
+INTRANS
+IP
+IP's
+ISCONNECTED
+ISCONNECTING
+ISDISCONNECTING
+ISO
+ISO81
+Ircb
+Joy86
+K179A
+Karels
+LADDR
+LOOPBACK
+Leffler
+Leffler84
+M.J
+MAXNUBAMR
+MCLGET
+MFREE
+MGET
+MLEN
+MSG
+MSGSIZE
+MSIZE
+Mbufs
+McKusick
+Metcalfe
+NBIO
+NEEDFRAG
+NOARP
+NOFDREF
+NOTRAILERS
+NS
+Notes''SMM:15
+OOBINLINE
+OSI
+PARAMPROB
+PEERADDR
+PF
+POINTOPOINT
+PRC
+PRCO
+PRIV
+PROTORCV
+PROTOSEND
+PRU
+PS1:6
+Postel
+Postel80
+Postel81a
+Postel81b
+Postel81c
+QFULL
+RCVATMARK
+RCVD
+RCVOOB
+RFC
+RH
+ROUTEDEAD
+RTF
+S.J
+SB
+SEL
+SENDOOB
+SETOPT
+SIGIO
+SIOCADDRT
+SIOCDELRT
+SIOCGIFCONF
+SIOCSIFADDR
+SIOCSIFDSTADDR
+SIOCSIFFLAGS
+SIOGSIFFLAGS
+SLOWTIMO
+SMM:15
+SOCKADDR
+SRCFAIL
+SS
+Shoch
+TCP
+TIMXCEED
+TOSHOST
+TOSNET
+UDP
+UNIBUS
+VAX
+VMS
+Vol
+WANTRCVD
+Xerox81
+Xerox82
+Zimmermann
+Zimmermann80
+addr
+addrlist
+adj
+amelioriates
+async
+bdp
+broadaddr
+caddr
+csma
+ctlinput
+ctloutput
+daemon
+dat
+datagram
+decapsulation
+dequeuing
+dev
+dma'd
+dom
+dst
+dstaddr
+dtom
+faddr
+fastimo
+fasttimo
+fcntl
+freem
+fstat
+getsockopt
+hardwired
+hiwat
+hlen
+ierrors
+ifa
+ifaddr
+iff
+ifnet
+ifp
+ifq
+ifqueue
+ifr
+ifrw
+ifrw.ifrw
+ifu
+ifu.ifu
+ifuba
+ifubinfo
+ifw
+ifx
+ifxmt
+info
+info.iff
+init
+inp
+inpcb
+inq
+ip
+ipackets
+ipintrq
+laddr
+len
+loopback
+lowat
+m,n
+mb
+mbcnt
+mbmax
+mbuf
+mbuf's
+mbufs
+mp
+mr
+mtod
+mtu
+netstat
+nmr
+nr
+nx
+oerrors
+off0
+ontrol
+oob
+oobmark
+op
+opackets
+ops
+optname
+pcb
+pgrp
+prev
+proc
+proto
+protosw
+protoswNPROTOSW
+pte
+pullup
+q0len
+qlen
+qlimit
+rawcb
+rcb
+rcv
+recvmsg
+ref
+refcnt
+regs
+req
+rerouted
+ro
+rotocol
+rt
+rtalloc
+rtentry
+rtfree
+rtredirect
+rubaget
+sb
+sel
+sendmsg
+setsockopt
+slowtimo
+snd
+sockaddr
+sockbuf
+socketpair
+sockproto
+sonewconn
+soshutdown
+src
+ta
+ternet
+timeo
+totlen
+uba
+ubaalloc
+ubaget
+ubainit
+uballoc's
+ubaminit
+uban
+ubaput
+ubinfo
+udp
+unibus
+usrreq
+virt
+vm
+wildcard
+wmap
+wubaput
+x,t
+xmt
+xmt.ifrw
+xmt.ifw
+xswapd
+xtofree
+xxx
diff --git a/share/doc/smm/Makefile b/share/doc/smm/Makefile
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2e22765
--- /dev/null
+++ b/share/doc/smm/Makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,28 @@
+#	@(#)Makefile	8.1 (Berkeley) 6/10/93
+
+# The following modules do not build/install:
+# 10.named, 13.amd
+
+BINDIR=	/usr/share/doc/smm
+FILES=	00.contents Makefile Title
+SUBDIR=	01.setup 02.config 03.fsck 04.quotas 05.fastfs 06.nfs 07.lpd \
+	08.sendmailop 09.sendmail 11.timedop 12.timed 14.uucpimpl \
+	15.uucpnet 16.security 17.password 18.net
+
+Title.ps: ${FILES}
+	groff Title > ${.TARGET}
+
+contents.ps: ${FILES}
+	groff -ms 00.contents > ${.TARGET}
+
+.if	${MACHINE} == "tahoe"
+SUBDIR+=01.setup
+.elif	${MACHINE} == "vax"
+SUBDIR+=01.setup
+.endif
+
+beforeinstall:
+	install -c -o ${BINOWN} -g ${BINGRP} -m 444 ${FILES} \
+	    ${DESTDIR}${BINDIR}
+
+.include <bsd.subdir.mk>
diff --git a/share/doc/smm/Title b/share/doc/smm/Title
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4dd1b89
--- /dev/null
+++ b/share/doc/smm/Title
@@ -0,0 +1,203 @@
+.\" Copyright (c) 1986, 1993 The Regents of the University of California.
+.\" All rights reserved.
+.\"
+.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+.\" are met:
+.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+.\"    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+.\" 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
+.\"    must display the following acknowledgement:
+.\"	This product includes software developed by the University of
+.\"	California, Berkeley and its contributors.
+.\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
+.\"    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+.\"    without specific prior written permission.
+.\"
+.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+.\" ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
+.\"
+.\"	@(#)Title	8.2 (Berkeley) 4/19/94
+.\"
+.ps 18
+.vs 22
+.sp 2.75i
+.ft B
+.ce 2
+UNIX System Manager's Manual
+(SMM)
+.ps 14
+.vs 16
+.sp |4i
+.ce 2
+4.4 Berkeley Software Distribution
+.sp |5.75i
+.ft R
+.pt 12
+.vs 16
+.ce
+June, 1993
+.sp |8.2i
+.ce 5
+Computer Systems Research Group
+Computer Science Division
+Department of Electrical Engineering and Computer Science
+University of California
+Berkeley, California  94720
+.bp
+\&
+.sp |1i
+.hy 0
+.ps 10
+.vs 12p
+Copyright 1979, 1980, 1983, 1986, 1988, 1989, 1991, 1992, 1993
+The Regents of the University of California.  All rights reserved.
+.sp 2
+Other than the specific manual pages and documents listed below
+as copyrighted by AT&T,
+redistribution and use of this manual in source and binary forms,
+with or without modification, are permitted provided that the
+following conditions are met:
+.sp 0.5
+.in +0.2i
+.ta 0.2i
+.ti -0.2i
+1)	Redistributions of this manual must retain the copyright
+notices on this page, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+.ti -0.2i
+2)	Software or documentation that incorporates part of this manual must
+reproduce the copyright notices on this page, this list of conditions and
+the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials
+provided with the distribution.
+.ti -0.2i
+3)	All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
+must display the following acknowledgement:
+``This product includes software developed by the University of
+California, Berkeley and its contributors.''
+.ti -0.2i
+4)	Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
+may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+without specific prior written permission.
+.in -0.2i
+.sp
+\fB\s-1THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+SUCH DAMAGE.\s+1\fP
+.sp 2
+The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers and the American
+National Standards Committee X3, on Information Processing Systems have
+given us permission to reprint portions of their documentation.
+.sp
+In the following statement, the phrase ``this text'' refers to portions
+of the system documentation.
+.sp 0.5
+``Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in
+electronic form in 4.4BSD from IEEE Std 1003.1-1988, IEEE
+Standard Portable Operating System Interface for Computer Environments
+(POSIX), copyright 1988 by the Institute of Electrical and Electronics
+Engineers, Inc.  In the event of any discrepancy between these versions
+and the original IEEE Standard, the original IEEE Standard is the referee
+document.''
+.sp
+In the following statement, the phrase ``This material'' refers to portions
+of the system documentation.
+.sp 0.5
+``This material is reproduced with permission from American National
+Standards Committee X3, on Information Processing Systems.  Computer and
+Business Equipment Manufacturers Association (CBEMA), 311 First St., NW,
+Suite 500, Washington, DC 20001-2178.  The developmental work of
+Programming Language C was completed by the X3J11 Technical Committee.''
+.sp 2
+Manual pages cron.8, icheck.8, ncheck.8, and sa.8
+and documents SMM:15, 16, and 17
+are copyright 1979, AT&T Bell Laboratories, Incorporated.
+Document SMM:14 is a modification of an earlier document that
+is copyrighted 1979 by AT&T Bell Laboratories, Incorporated.
+Holders of \x'-1p'UNIX\v'-4p'\s-3TM\s0\v'4p'/32V,
+System III, or System V software licenses are
+permitted to copy these documents, or any portion of them,
+as necessary for licensed use of the software,
+provided this copyright notice and statement of permission
+are included.
+.sp 2
+The views and conclusions contained in this manual are those of the
+authors and should not be interpreted as representing official policies,
+either expressed or implied, of the Regents of the University of California.
+.br
+.ll 6.5i
+.lt 6.5i
+.po .75i
+.in 0i
+.af % i
+.ds ET\"
+.de HD
+.po 0
+.lt 7.4i
+.tl ''''
+.lt
+.po
+'sp 18p
+.if o .tl '\\*(ET''\\*(OT'
+.if e .tl '\\*(OT''\\*(ET'
+'sp 18p
+.ns
+..
+.de FO
+'sp 18p
+.if e .tl '\s9\\*(Dt''\\*(Ed\s0'
+.if o .tl '\s9\\*(Ed''\\*(Dt\s0'
+'bp
+..
+.wh 0 HD
+.wh -60p FO
+.bp 5
+.ds ET \s9\f2Table \|of \|Contents\fP\s0
+.ds OT - % -
+.ce
+\f3TABLE \|OF \|CONTENTS\fP
+.nr x .5i
+.in +\nxu
+.nf
+.ta \n(.lu-\nxuR
+.de xx
+\\$1\f3 \a \fP\\$2
+..
+.de t
+.sp 1v
+.ne .5i
+.cs 3
+.ti -.5i
+.ss 18
+\f3\s9\\$2. \\$3\s0\fP
+.ss 12
+.if t .sp .5v
+.cs 3 36
+.ds Ed Section \\$2
+.ds Dt \\$3
+.so \\$1
+..
+.t /usr/src/share/man/man0/toc8 8 "System Maintenance"
+.in -.5i
+.cs 3
+.if n .ta 8n 16n 24n 32n 40n 48n 56n 64n 72n 80n
+.if t .ta .5i 1i 1.5i 2i 2.5i 3i 3.5i 4i 4.5i 5i 5.5i 6i 6.5i